JP2020022813A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a novel game content.SOLUTION: A VDP 205, on the basis of a drawing instruction from a display CPU 201, performs geometry calculation including an arrangement process of image data to a world coordinate system and performs rendering including a projection process to a projection plane, thereby creating drawing data that is two-dimensional data. A signal corresponding to the drawing data is output to a pattern display device 41, thereby allowing an image corresponding to the drawing data to be displayed in the pattern display device 41. In this case, when time of an RTC 65 is the one corresponding to a start trigger of a time correspondence performance, the time correspondence performance starts. When the time correspondence performance starts, a preparation period occurs first. When the preparation period elapses, a special period occurs in which the display content of the image in the pattern display device 41 is more brilliant than that in the preparation period.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 66

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Pachinko machines, slot machines and the like are known as a kind of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on a predetermined lottery condition being satisfied, and a bonus is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, a configuration is generally used in which an effect for causing the player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

  For pachinko machines, a lottery is performed based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry area provided in the game area, and a variation display of the pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device. There is known a configuration in which, when a winning result is obtained, a combination of specific patterns and the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and the game machine shifts to a special game state advantageous to the player. Then, in the case of transition to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2009-261415 A

  Here, it is necessary to provide novel game contents in the gaming machines as exemplified above, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of providing novel game contents.

In order to solve the above problem, the invention according to claim 1 includes a display unit that displays an image,
Display control means capable of controlling the display means in such a manner that the player can recognize that the individual image is variably displayed in front of the background image;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means includes a time-correspondence control means for starting a special effect on the display means when a predetermined start-response time is reached, and when a start condition is satisfied,
In the special effect, the processing load for displaying the background image is greater than when a predetermined effect different from the special effect is performed,
A configuration in which a first display effect can be executed in a situation where the predetermined effect is executed, and a second display effect in which a processing load for displaying an image is greater than that of the first display effect. And
The time-corresponding control means enables the first display effect to be executed in a situation where the special effect is executed, but does not execute the second display effect.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide novel game contents.

It is a perspective view showing the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view showing the composition of a game board. (A)-(j) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display device. (A), (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of various counters used for a jackpot occurrence lottery etc. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by the MPU of the main control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU of the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the table setting process performed by a sound light side MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of an announcement lottery table, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of a reach lottery table, (c) Explains the structure of a sound-light side RAM. FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for describing a control pattern table. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that a symbol is displayed in a symbol display device, and (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode in which a symbol is fixedly displayed on a symbol display device. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating various parts tables. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the variable display time determined by (a1)-(a3), (b1)-(b3) parts table. It is a flowchart which shows the pointer update process performed by the sound light side MPU. (A)-(e2) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the effect for game rounds is performed. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a V interrupt process executed by the display CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a task process executed by the display CPU. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a drawing list. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process performed by the VDP. 6A to 6F are time charts showing an example of a symbol change display mode. (A), (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display device. FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of a memory module, and FIG. 4B is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of a work RAM. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution object table for acceleration periods, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution object table for 1st high speed period. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for describing an execution target table for a first low-speed period. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the value set to a 1st adjustment counter and a 3rd adjustment counter, and the kind of design, (b) The value set to a 2nd adjustment counter and It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship with the kind of design. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution object table for acceleration periods, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution object table for 1st high speed period. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for describing an execution target table for a first low-speed period. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command corresponding process executed by the display CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a normal fluctuation calculation process executed by the display CPU. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a loop display effect. (A)-(d) It is a time chart which shows the flow of a loop display effect. FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of a memory module, and FIG. 4B is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of a work RAM. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the table for stationary characters, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the table for character movement, (c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the table for backgrounds. 9 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for a character loop executed by the display CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a calculation process for a background loop executed by a display CPU. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a group display effect. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining moving image data for group display. (A1) to (a3) are time charts showing a relationship between an image update cycle and a cycle in which still image data can be used, and (b) and (c) render in a frame area to be rendered in the same decoded image data. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state in which different ranges are set. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for group display effects performed by a display CPU. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the decoding process performed by a moving image decoder, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for group display performed by VDP. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of an effective period display effect. (A), (b) It is a time chart which shows the comparative example of an effective period display effect. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of a memory module. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the table for a band display, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the table for a blinking display. (A1), (b1), (a2), (b2) are time charts showing how a valid period display effect is executed using both the band display table and the blinking display table. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a calculation process for displaying a validity period performed by the display CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of the number display effect. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure for performing a number display effect. It is a front view of the inner frame concerned which expands and shows the lower region of the inner frame. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a count performed by the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the output setting process of the measurement command performed by the sound light side MPU. 9 is a flowchart showing a measurement command corresponding process executed by the display CPU. 9 is a flowchart showing a calculation display calculation process executed by a display CPU. (A)-(c) It is a time chart which shows a mode that a number display effect is performed. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a calculation process for increasing display executed by the display CPU. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of a memory module. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the image for 1st characters, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an effect image, (c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the image for 2nd characters. . FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a manner in which a range to be drawn in a frame area to be drawn is different in each image data. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for describing a pseudo moving image table. It is a time chart which shows a mode that a pseudo animation production is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for a pseudo moving image effect performed by a display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for round effects performed by a display CPU. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating another example of a pseudo moving image effect. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a V interrupt process executed by the display CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a task process executed by the display CPU. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a drawing list. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process performed by the VDP. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for describing a state in which drawing data is created along with execution of a drawing process. (A)-(c) It is a time chart which shows a mode that a time corresponding effect is performed. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the symbol display device in a normal period, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the symbol display device in a preparation period, (c) In the special period It is an explanatory view for explaining display contents of a symbol display device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the symbol display device when it becomes the start timing of a time-corresponding effect in the situation where the effect for game play is performed. (A)-(h) It is a time chart which shows a mode that a time-response effect is performed in relation with the execution state of the effect for game times. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of ROM on the sound light side, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data table for time-response effects. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of a memory module. It is a flowchart which shows the RTC correspondence process performed by the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the preparation period start performed by the sound light side MPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command corresponding process executed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process during the preparation period performed by the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process during the special period performed by the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the table setting process performed by a sound light side MPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining another example of the display contents of the symbol display device during the preparation period. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the setting process for the preparation period start performed by the sound light side MPU. 11 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the command corresponding process executed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the setting process during the preparation period performed by the sound light side MPU. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific content of another preservation | save effect. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the comparative example of another storage effect. (A)-(h) It is a time chart which shows a mode that a separate preservation effect is performed. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific content of another preservation | save effect. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for another preservation | save effect performed by a display CPU. 9 is a flowchart showing processing during the operation valid period executed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process corresponding to the operation corresponding effect performed by the display CPU. 11 is a flowchart illustrating a setting process for separate storage display executed by the VDP. 11 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing data creation process for separately stored display executed by the VDP. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific display content of an angle display effect. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of a memory module. (A)-(i) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating various moving image data groups. (A)-(g) It is a time chart which shows a mode that an angle display effect progresses. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for angle display effects performed by a display CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an opening process executed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the decoding process performed by VDP. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the moving image correspondence table corresponding to A angle, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a switching reference table. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for angle display effects performed by VDP. FIG. 7A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of normal moving image data, and FIG. 8B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of special moving image data. (A)-(g) It is a time chart which shows a mode that a special moving image use effect is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the special moving image use effect performed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting processing for special moving-image use effects performed by VDP.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as a “pachinko machine”) that is a kind of gaming machine will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a game machine main body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 forward. . The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. More specifically, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward with the left side being a rotation base end side and the right side being a rotation end side in a front view. A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13. The front door frame 14 is rotatable forward with the left side being a rotation base end side and the right side being a rotation tip side in a front view. A back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation front end side in front view.

  The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at the tip end of its rotation, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11. The door frame 14 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 so that the door frame 14 cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using an unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front of the pachinko machine 10.

  A game board 24 is mounted on the inner frame 13. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 24.

  An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of an outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 provide guidance means. As a guide rail. Game balls fired from a game ball firing mechanism (not shown) mounted below the game board 24 in the inner frame 13 are guided to the upper portion of the game area PA by the guide rail. The game ball firing mechanism performs a shooting operation of the game ball by manually operating a firing operation device 28 provided on the front door frame 14.

  The game board 24 has a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a second operating opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a general drawing unit 38, and the like. ing.

  Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, when balls enter the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. More specifically, when the ball enters the first operating port 33 or the ball enters the second operating port 34, the payout of three prize balls is executed. In the case where a ball has entered the general winning opening 31, payout of 10 prize balls is executed. Be executed.

  The number of the prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the second operating port 34 may have a smaller number of prize balls than the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 may have the first operating port. The number of award balls may be larger than 33.

  In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports and the like are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. In addition, a large number of nails 24b are planted on the game board 24 for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game ball, and various members such as a windmill are provided.

  Here, entering the ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only in the form of being discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the game area PA continues to flow down without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the through gate 35 are distinguished from each other in order to clearly distinguish game balls from entering the out opening 24a. Entering a game ball into is also referred to as winning.

  The first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 are unitized as operation port devices and installed on the game board 24. The first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 are both open upward. The two working ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction such that the first working port 33 faces upward. The second operating port 34 is provided with a general electric part 34a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. The game ball cannot enter the second operation port 34 in the closed state of the general electric role object 34a, and the prize in the second operation port 34 becomes possible when the general electric role object 34a is opened.

  A through gate 35 is provided upstream of the second operation port 34 in the downflow direction of the game ball. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and a game ball that has won the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning. Thereby, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can win the second operating port 34.

  On the basis of the winning in the through gate 35, the general-purpose part 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed with a winning in the through gate 35 as a trigger, and a general-purpose display of a general-purpose unit 38 provided in a lower right corner which is an area where the game ball does not pass in the game area PA. The display of the pattern is changed in the section 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electrification release winning, and a stop result corresponding to the result is displayed and the variable display on the ordinary figure display unit 38a is ended, the state shifts to the ordinary electricity release state. In the normal-power open state, the general-purpose part 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

  In addition, the general-purpose display unit 38a is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited thereto, and is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device. , CRT or other types of display devices such as a dot matrix display. Further, as the pattern variably displayed on the ordinary figure display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are switched and displayed may be considered.

  In the general-purpose unit 38, a general-purpose display display 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the general-purpose display 38a. The number of awarded game balls to the through gate 35 is retained up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the general-purpose reservation display section 38b.

  A lottery is performed with a winning in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 as a trigger. The lottery result is clearly shown through the display effects on the symbol display device 41 of the special figure unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

  More specifically, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display section 37a. The display area of the special figure display section 37a is smaller than the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. In the special figure display section 37a, the winning display lottery is triggered by a prize in the first operating port 33 or a prize in the second operating port 34, so that a variation display of the pattern is performed. Then, as a stop result after the change display of the pattern is performed, a display corresponding to the result of the jackpot occurrence lottery is performed. Note that the special figure display unit 37a is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined mode, but is not limited thereto, and is not limited to a liquid crystal display device and an organic EL display device. , CRT or other types of display devices such as a dot matrix display. Further, as a pattern displayed on the special figure display section 37a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors May be displayed.

  In the special figure unit 37, a special figure reservation display section 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display section 37a. The number of game balls winning in the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 is retained up to a maximum of four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the special figure reservation display section 37b.

  More specifically, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, but may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and may be a dot matrix display device. You may.

  In the symbol display device 41, when the symbol change display is performed on the special figure display unit 37a based on the winning in the first operating port 33 or the winning in the second operating port 34, the symbol variable display is performed accordingly. Will be That is, when the variable display is performed on the special figure display unit 37a, the variable display is performed on the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the variable display. Then, for example, in the game time in which the result of the jackpot occurrence lottery is the jackpot result, symbols of a predetermined combination are stopped and displayed on the activated line preset in the symbol display device 41.

  The display contents of the symbol display device 41 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 3 (a) to 3 (j) are diagrams individually showing symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41, and FIGS. 4 (a) and 4 (b) are display surfaces of the symbol display device 41. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 (a) to 3 (j), the pattern, which is a kind of pattern, includes nine types of main patterns, each of which has a number of "1" to "9", and a shell-shaped pattern. And a sub-symbol consisting of More specifically, a main symbol is configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” to nine types of character symbols such as an octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. More specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

  That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1” are arranged. , A main symbol of “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of the main symbols. That is, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols with 10 main symbols arranged. Then, on the display surface P, the symbols in each of the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 are displayed so as to be scrolled in a predetermined direction with a periodicity.

  As shown in FIG. 4B, on the display surface P, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has become. Further, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set on the display surface P. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2, and all symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same numeral assigned to any of the activated lines is formed. When the variable display of ~ Z3 is completed, the big hit moving image is displayed as the occurrence of the normal big hit result or the 15R certainty big hit result described later.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to “specific symbols”, and the even symbols (2, 4, 6, 8) with numbers. The main symbol corresponds to a “non-specific symbol”. When the 15R probability change jackpot result occurs, the same combination of specific symbols or the same combination of non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. Also, when a normal jackpot result occurs, the same combination of non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. In addition, when an explicit 2R probability change jackpot result to be described later is obtained, the variation display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 ends in a state where a predetermined symbol combination different from the same symbol combination is formed, and thereafter, An explicit movie is displayed.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, and the like are included. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described symbol, and for example, a configuration in which only numbers are variably displayed as the symbol may be employed.

  Further, based on the winning of one of the operating ports 33, 34, the variable display is started in the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41, and a predetermined stop result is displayed until the variable display is stopped. Corresponds to one game time.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 2, when a jackpot is won by a jackpot generation lottery based on a prize in the first operating port 33 or a prize in the second operating port 34, it is possible to win the special electric winning device 32. To the open / close execution mode. The special electric winning device 32 has a large winning opening (not shown) communicating with the back side of the game board 24 and an opening / closing door 32a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The opening / closing door 32a is arranged in one of a closed state and an open state. Specifically, the opening / closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot be won, and is switched to an open state in which game balls can be won when a transition to the open / close execution mode is won in the internal lottery. It has become. Incidentally, the open / close execution mode is a mode to which a shift is made when a winning result is obtained. In the closed state, a prize is not impossible, but a prize may be less likely to occur than in the open state. In the opening / closing execution mode, a display effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode is executed by the symbol display device 41.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 having the game board 24 having the above configuration. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 42 so that substantially the entire game area PA can be visually recognized from the front. The window 42 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 43 is fitted therein. The window panel 43 is formed of glass to be colorless and transparent, but is not limited thereto, and may be formed of synthetic resin so as to be colorless and transparent. The game area PA is formed through the window panel 43 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. It may be formed colored and transparent as long as it is visible.

  A display light emitting section 44 is provided above the window section 42. Also, a pair of left and right speaker units 45 for outputting a sound effect or the like according to a game state is provided. Below the window 42, an upper swelling portion 46 and a lower swelling portion 47 swelling toward the near side are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 46a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 46, and a lower plate 47a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 47. The upper plate 46a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device provided in the back pack unit 15 and guiding the game balls to the game ball launching mechanism side while aligning them in a line. The lower plate 47a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper plate 46a.

  In the lower bulging portion 47, in a region outside the lower plate 47a, a rendering operation device 48 including an operation portion manually operated by a player is provided. The operation unit of the effect operation device 48 is manually operated by a player to change the effect contents on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 or the like to predetermined effect contents.

  On the rear side of the inner frame 13, a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device are mounted. The back pack unit 15 is equipped with a payout mechanism including a payout device, a payout control device, and a power supply / emission control device. Hereinafter, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

<Main controller 50>
The main control device 50 includes a main control board 51 that performs main control of the game. In the main control device 50, the substrate box accommodating the main control substrate 51 and the like may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of the opening or a trace structure for leaving a trace of the opening. It may be. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are inseparably connected and a connection portion (caulking portion) which requires destruction of a predetermined portion at the time of separation, or an adhesive layer is applied to an object to be peeled when peeled off. A configuration is conceivable in which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of being peeled off by being left is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to a boundary between a plurality of case bodies constituting the board box is considered.

  The main control board 51 has an MPU 52 mounted thereon. The MPU 52 includes a ROM 53 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 52 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 53. A certain RAM 54, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built in.

  As the ROM 53, a storage unit (that is, a non-volatile storage unit) that can be randomly accessed when reading out a control program or fixed value data and does not require external power supply for storage and storage is used. Specifically, a NOR cache memory is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of memory used as the ROM 53 is arbitrary as long as random access is possible. Further, the configuration in which the control and calculation portion, the ROM 53, and the RAM 54 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be configured as a separate chip, and some functions may be implemented as separate chips. It is good also as a structure mounted.

  The MPU 52 is provided with an input port and an output port. The power supply / emission control device 57 is connected to the input side of the MPU 52. The power supply / emission control device 57 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, the operating power is supplied to the main control board 51 based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply. Incidentally, the operating power is supplied not only to the main control board 51 but also to other devices such as the payout control device 55 and a display control device 70 described later.

  A power failure monitoring board may be provided on a power path between the MPU 52 and the power supply / emission control device 57. In this case, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored by the power failure monitoring board, and when the occurrence of the power failure is confirmed, a power failure signal is transmitted to the MPU 52 so that the MPU 52 executes processing for a power failure. It is possible to do.

  Various sensors (not shown) are connected to the input side of the MPU 52. As a part of the various sensors, detection provided in a one-to-one manner with respect to a winning corresponding ball portion such as a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a second operating opening 34, and a through gate 35. A sensor is included, and the MPU 52 makes a winning determination (ball entry determination) for each ball entry unit. In addition, the MPU 52 executes a jackpot occurrence lottery and a jackpot result type lottery based on winning in the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34, and executes a reach occurrence lottery of each game time and a determination lottery of a variable display time. I do.

  Here, a configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 52 will be described.

  The MPU 52 uses the various counter information during the game to perform a jackpot occurrence lottery, set the display on the special figure display unit 37a, set the symbol display on the symbol display device 41, and set the display on the ordinary symbol display unit 38a. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, a hit random number counter C1 used for a jackpot occurrence lottery, and a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining a jackpot type such as a 15R certain-variable jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, A reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery when the symbol display device 41 comes off and fluctuates, a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting an initial value of the hit random number counter C1, a special figure display section 37a and the symbol display device 41 And a variation type counter CS for determining the variation display time. In addition, a general-purpose part opening counter C4 used for a lottery to determine whether or not the general-purpose part 34a of the second operating port 34 is set to the electric-part open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in a lottery counter buffer 54a.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value every time the counter is updated, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The information corresponding to the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in a holding storage area 54b as an acquired information storage unit when a prize is generated in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. Is stored in

  The hold storage area 54b includes a hold area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and stores a winning history to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port. At the same time, each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 as holding information.

  In the first to fourth holding areas RE1 to RE4, the first holding area RE1 → the second holding area RE2 when the winning in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 occurs plural times consecutively. Each numerical information is stored in chronological order from the third reserved area RE3 to the fourth reserved area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 are stored on hold. . It should be noted that the number of items that can be held and stored is not limited to four, but may be any number, such as two, three, five or more, or a single number. The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display unit 37a. Is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

  More specifically, each counter is configured such that the random number counter C1 is incremented by "1" in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 599, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and is stored in the hold storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored in the ROM 53 as a winning / failing table. As the success / failure table, a success / failure table for the low probability mode and a success / failure table for the high probability mode are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the low probability mode and the high probability mode are set as the lottery modes in the jackpot occurrence lottery means.

  Under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of the random numbers for the jackpot winning is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high-probability mode is referred to at the time of the above-mentioned lottery, the number of random numbers to be a big hit is 20. If the winning probability is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured so that “1” is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 29, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and is stored in the hold storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. The plurality of jackpot results are (1) the mode of opening / closing control of the special power winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the jackpot generation lottery means after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and (3) the end of the opening / closing execution mode. A plurality of jackpot results are set by providing a difference in three conditions, that is, a support mode of the second working port 34 in the general electric role object 34a.

  The opening / closing control of the special power prize device 32 in the open / close execution mode is performed such that the frequency of winning of the special power prize device 32 between the start and the end of the open / close execution mode is relatively high or low. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in the high frequency winning mode, the opening and closing of the special winning opening is performed 15 times from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 seconds elapse or a winning in the special winning opening is performed. The process is continued until the number reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the big winning opening is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 0.2 seconds elapse or the number of winnings to the big winning opening. Is continued until there are six.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the shooting operation device 28 is operated by the player, the driving control of the game ball firing mechanism 58 is performed so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA in 0.6 seconds. Is done. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of one large winning opening is 0.2 sec as described above. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of one large winning opening is shorter than the firing cycle of the game balls. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur.

  The number of times the large winning opening is opened and closed in the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time limit for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode. The value is not limited to the above value as long as the frequency of winning in the special power winning device 32 during the period from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode increases. Specifically, if the high-frequency winning mode has a larger number of times of opening and closing than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time limit for one opening is longer, or the opening limit number for one opening is set larger. Good.

  However, in order to clarify the difference in privilege between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, a configuration in which no prize to the special power winning device 32 substantially occurs in the open / close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode. It is good to For example, in the high frequency winning mode, for one opening, the product of the launch cycle of the game ball and the opening number is set to be shorter than the opening time limit, while in the low frequency winning mode, the product is The product of the launch cycle of the game balls and the limited number of openings may be set to be longer than the limited opening time. Also, even if the firing interval of the game balls and the opening time of one big winning opening are not as described above, in the low frequency winning mode, the latter is set to be shorter than the former so that the actual In particular, it is possible to easily realize a configuration in which no prize is won in the special electric prize winning device 32.

  The support mode of the general operating object 34a of the second operating port 34 is the same as that of the game area PA when the launch of the game ball is continued in the same manner. The low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency with which the electric utility product 34a is opened per unit time is relatively high and low.

  Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of being in the electric-power-opening-state win in the electric-power-operated-goods opening lottery using the general electric-power-goods opening counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). ), In the high frequency support mode, the number of times the ordinary electric role product 34a is opened when the electrification is released is set higher than in the low frequency support mode. Is set to a long open time. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, in the case where the electric-power-released state is elected and the open state of the general electric role object 34a occurs a plurality of times, the period from the end of one open-state to the start of the next open-state is started. The closing time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, a shorter time is secured than the low-frequency support mode as a minimum time to be secured after one electric-powered-object opening lottery is performed and then the next electric-powered-object opening lottery is performed. Is set to be selected.

  As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that a winning in the second operating port 34 will occur is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize to the first operating port 33 is higher than in the second operating port 34, but in the high-frequency support mode, the second operating port 33 is more likely to win. The probability that the winning in the mouth 34 will occur increases. In the case where a prize is generated in the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of balls held. It can be carried out.

  In addition, the configuration for increasing the frequency of the electric utility opening state per unit time in the high frequency support mode compared to the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration. It is good also as a structure which makes the probability of electrification open state winning high in. Further, a securing time to be secured after one electric-power-use opening lottery is performed after the next electric-power-use opening lottery is performed (for example, in the general-purpose display unit 38a based on a prize to the through gate 35). In a configuration in which a plurality of types of variable display to be executed are prepared, a setting is made such that a shorter securing time is more easily selected or the average securing time is shorter in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode. May be. Further, increasing the number of times of opening and lengthening the opening time, shortening the securing time secured after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed (ie, One of the conditions or any combination of reducing the average display time of the reserved time and increasing the probability of winning is shortened. Thus, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be enhanced.

  The distribution destination of the game result to the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the ROM 53 as a distribution table. Then, as the distribution destination, a normal jackpot result, an explicit 2R probability-change jackpot result, and a 15R probability-change jackpot result are set.

  The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the jackpot occurrence lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. However, the high frequency support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift. In other words, the normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the gaming state to the normal jackpot state.

  The explicit 2R probability change jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the jackpot occurrence lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. is there. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the jackpot occurrence lottery becomes a jackpot state win and the game shifts to the jackpot state. In other words, the explicit 2R probability change jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the gaming state to the explicit 2R probability change jackpot state.

  The 15R probability change jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the jackpot occurrence lottery mode becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. . The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the jackpot occurrence lottery becomes a jackpot state win and the game shifts to the jackpot state. In other words, the 15R probability change jackpot result is a jackpot result for shifting the gaming state to the 15R probability change jackpot state.

  Note that the normal gaming state in relation to each of the above gaming states refers to a state in which the jackpot occurrence lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

  In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and “10 to 14” corresponds to the explicit 2R sure-change jackpot result. "15-29" corresponds to the 15R probability change jackpot result.

  As described above, since the explicit 2R probability-change jackpot result is set as the probability-change jackpot result, the modes of the probability-change jackpot result are diversified. That is, when the two types of the probability change jackpot results are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is that the 15R probability change jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode is the high frequency winning mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode is the highest, In the mode, the low frequency winning mode is set, but in the support mode, the explicit 2R certainty variable jackpot result in the high frequency support mode is the lowest. Thereby, the monotony of the game is suppressed, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

  In addition, as a kind of the probability change jackpot result, the opening / closing execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the jackpot occurrence lottery mode becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode is maintained in the previous mode. May be included. In this case, further diversification of the probability variable jackpot result is achieved.

  Further, as one type of the deviation result in the jackpot occurrence lottery, a special deviation result in which the transition to the jackpot occurrence lottery mode and the support mode does not occur after the transition to the open / close execution mode of the low frequency winning mode is included. Is also good. In a configuration in which both the implicit 2R probability change jackpot result and the special outlier result are set as described above, the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the low frequency winning mode, and the support mode is maintained in the previous mode. In contrast to the above, the transition mode of the jackpot generation lottery mode is different, for example, when one of the non-explicit 2R certainty variable jackpot result or the special off result occurs in the normal game state, It is possible to make the player predict which result it actually corresponds to.

  The reach random number counter C <b> 3 is configured to sequentially add “1”, for example, in the range of 0 to 238, and return to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically, and is stored in the hold storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a type of display effect on the symbol display device 41. The expected effect is provided with a symbol display device 41 capable of performing a variable display of symbols, and in a game time in which the open / close execution mode of the special electric winning device 32 is a high frequency winning mode, a stop display result after the variable display is specially displayed. In the resulting gaming machine, at the stage before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the symbol variable display is started on the symbol display device 41, the player is made to think that the variable display state is likely to be the special display result. Display state.

  Two types of expected effects are set: the above-described reach effect and a notice effect for expecting the occurrence of a reach effect and the occurrence of a special display result before the reach effect occurs.

  In the reach effect, the combination of the big hit symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is achieved by stopping and displaying the symbols in some of the symbol columns among the plurality of symbol columns displayed on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. Is displayed, in which a combination of reach symbols that may be satisfied is displayed, and in that state, symbols are variably displayed in the remaining symbol columns. In addition, in the state where the combination of the reach symbols is displayed as described above, while performing the variation display of the symbols in the remaining symbol columns, and performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image in the background image, , A combination of reach symbols is reduced or displayed, and a reach effect is displayed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface P.

  Specifically, as a pre-stage for terminating the fluctuation display of the symbol, the hit effect corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency prize mode is displayed on a preset effective line in the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 as a stage prior to ending the variable display of the symbol. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a reach symbol combination in which a combination is likely to be established, and a variation display of a symbol is performed by a final stop symbol row in a state where the reach line is formed.

  When the display content of FIG. 4 is specifically described, first, the variable display of symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 is terminated, and furthermore, in the state where the variable display of symbols is terminated in the lower symbol row Z3, any valid Reach lines are formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols having the same numbers attached to the lines L1 to L5, and in the situation where the reach lines are formed, the symbol variation display is performed in the middle symbol column Z2. Become a reach production. When the high frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbol having the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line so that the main symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed. The variable display of the symbol is ended.

  In the notice effect, in the situation where the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 after the symbol variance display is started on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, or in some symbol columns. In a situation where a symbol is variably displayed in a plurality of symbol columns, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is included. Further, the background image may have a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, or the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may have a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such a notice effect may occur at any of the game times when the reach effect is performed and when the reach effect is not performed.However, the case where the reach effect is performed is higher than the case where the reach effect is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

  The reach effect is executed irrespective of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times that shift to the open / close execution mode. Further, in the game time that does not shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 53 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach effect. Will be executed if On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not to perform the announcement effect is made not by the main control device 50 but by the sound emission control device 60.

  The variation type counter CS is configured such that “1” is sequentially added in the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used by the MPU 52 to determine the variation display time on the special figure display section 37a and the variation display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once each time a timer interrupt process described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time of the main process described later. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired at the time of determining the variation pattern at the time of starting the variation display on the special figure display unit 37a and at the time of starting the symbol variation by the symbol display device 41. When determining the variable display time, a variable display time table stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area of the ROM 53 is referred to.

  The general electric appliance open counter C4 is configured such that, for example, "1" is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 250, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The general-purpose electrical item opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electrical-power holding area 54c at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the general purpose electronic part 34a to the open state according to the stored value of the general purpose electronic part opening counter C4.

  The output side of the MPU 52 is connected to a payout control device 55 and a power supply / emission control device 57. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 55 based on the result of the prize determination to the prize-corresponding ball entry section. The payout control device 55 controls the payout device 56 to pay out prize balls and loaned balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 50. The firing permission command is transmitted to the power supply / fire control device 57 based on the fact that the fire operation device 28 is operated. The power supply / fire control device 57 drives the game ball firing mechanism 58 based on the fire permission command received from the main control device 50 to fire the game ball toward the game area PA.

  To the output side of the MPU 52, a special-figure display section 37a and a general-figure display section 38a are connected, and display control of the special-figure display section 37a and the general-figure display section 38a is directly performed by the MPU 52. That is, at the time of each game, display control of the special figure display section 37a is executed in the MPU 52. In addition, when the lottery result indicating whether or not to bring the general electric role object 34a to the open state is specified, the display control of the general-purpose display unit 38a is executed in the MPU 52.

  To the output side of the MPU 52, a special electric winning drive unit for opening and closing the opening and closing door of the special electric winning device 32, and a general electric role driving unit for opening and closing the general electric work 34a of the second operating port 34 are connected. . That is, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 52 controls the driving of the special power winning drive unit so that the special winning opening is opened / closed. In addition, in a case where the open state of the general electric part 34a is won, the drive control of the general electric part driving unit is executed in the MPU 52 so that the general electric part 34a is opened and closed. Further, an audio light emission control device 60 is connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and transmits various commands for effects to the audio light emission control device 60.

  Here, the processing executed by the MPU 52 will be described. The processing of the MPU 52 is roughly classified into a main processing started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt processing started periodically (in the present embodiment, at a period of 4 msec).

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the main processing. In step S101, a power-on wait process is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without advancing to the next process until a predetermined time for wait (specifically, 1 second) elapses after the main process is started. In the execution period of the power-on wait processing, the operation start and the initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. In the following step S102, access to the RAM 54 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the MPU 52 is set.

  Then, in a step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasure switch provided in the power / fire control device 57 is manually operated. In a succeeding step S105, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag of the RAM 54 is set to “1”. Is determined. In step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is performed. In step S107, it is determined whether the checksum matches the checksum stored when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined. judge.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the game hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch has been pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Also, when the power shutdown occurrence information is not set, or when the stored data is confirmed to be abnormal by the checksum, the process similarly shifts to step S108. In step S108, the RAM 54 is cleared. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S109.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch has not been pressed, the process proceeds to step S109 without executing the process in step S108, provided that the power failure flag is set to “1” and the checksum is normal. Proceed to. In step S109, a power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting processing, a predetermined area of the RAM 54, such as initialization of a power failure flag, is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current game state is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60 in order to recognize the current game state. I do.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps S110 to S113. That is, the MPU 52 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time varies according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining process of steps S110 to S113 is repeatedly executed using the irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S110 to S113 are irregular processes that are executed irregularly.

  In the remaining process, first, in step S110, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of the timer interrupt process. In the following step S111, a random number initial value updating process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in step S112, a variation counter updating process for updating the variation type counter CS is executed. In these updating processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter in the RAM 54, the process of adding the read numerical information to 1 is executed, and then the process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, each is cleared to “0”. Thereafter, in step S113, an interrupt permission setting for switching from a state in which the generation of the timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which the timer interrupt processing is permitted is performed. After executing the process of step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the processes of steps S110 to S113 are repeated.

  Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, at a period of 4 msec). First, a power failure information storage process is executed in step S201. In the power failure information storage processing, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption has been received from the power failure monitoring board, and if a power failure has been identified, a power failure processing is executed.

  In a succeeding step S202, a random number updating process for lottery is executed. In the random number updating process for lottery, the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric object unlock counter C4 are updated. More specifically, the present numerical value information is sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general public goods open counter C4, and a process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information is executed. Thereafter, a process of overwriting the counter of the read source is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, each is cleared to “0”. Thereafter, in step S203, a random number initial value updating process is executed as in step S111, and in step S204, a fluctuation counter updating process is executed as in step S112.

  In the following step S205, a fraud detection process is performed to monitor whether a predetermined event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred. In the fraud detection processing, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, the game stop flag provided in the RAM 54 is set to “1”.

  In subsequent step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not the game stop flag is set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S206, the processing after step S207 is executed.

  In step S207, a port output process is performed. In the port output process, when output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing output corresponding to the output information to various driving units is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special power winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special power winning driving unit is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set, the information is set. Stop the output of the drive signal. In addition, when the information for switching the general purpose accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the general purpose accessory drive unit is started and the information for switching to the closed state is set. Is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

  In a succeeding step S208, a reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processes.

  In a succeeding step S209, a winning detection process is executed. In the prize detection process, the signals received from the respective prize detection sensors are read, and the presence / absence of prize in the general prize port 31, the special power prize device 32, the first operation port 33, the second operation port 34, and the through gate 35 is determined. Is executed.

  In a succeeding step S210, a timer updating process for collectively updating numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the RAM 54 is executed. In this case, the timer counter, which is updated by subtracting the stored numerical information, is collectively handled. However, both the updating of the subtracting timer counter and the updating of the adding timer counter are collectively performed. It may be configured.

  In a succeeding step S211, a launch control process for performing launch control of the game ball is executed. In a situation where the firing operation to the firing operation device 28 is continued, as described above, one game ball is fired in a predetermined firing cycle of 0.6 sec.

  In the following step S212, as an input state monitoring process, based on the information read in the reading process in step S208, disconnection of each winning detection sensor and opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed.

  In the following step S213, special figure special power control processing for performing execution control of the game times and execution control of the opening / closing execution mode is executed. In the special figure special power control process, when a prize is generated in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 in a situation where the number of hold information stored in the hold storage area 54b is less than the upper limit number, A process of storing the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the time as the hold information in the hold storage area 54b in time series is executed. In addition, in the special map special power control process, a big hit occurs to determine whether or not the held information corresponds to a big hit on condition that the held information is not stored in the game rotation or the open / close execution mode and the held information is stored. If it corresponds to the lottery process and the jackpot winning, a sorting determination process for determining which jackpot result the suspension information corresponds to is executed. In addition, in the special figure special power control processing, in addition to the jackpot occurrence lottery processing and distribution determination processing, if the hold information does not correspond to the jackpot winning, whether or not the hold information corresponds to the occurrence of reach Is performed, and the process of selecting the fluctuation display time of the game times using the numerical value information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is executed. In this case, the variable display time table corresponding to the presence or absence of the jackpot winning, the jackpot type, and the occurrence of the reach is read from the ROM 53, and the read variable display time table and the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that timing are used to determine the current time. The variable display time of the game times is determined. Then, a variation command including information on the determined variation display time of the game times and a type command including information on the game result are transmitted to the sound emission control device 60, and the variation in the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a is transmitted. Start the display. As a result, one game round is started, and the effect for the game round is started on the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41. The MPU 52 starts measuring the fluctuation display time when transmitting the fluctuation command and the type command.

  Also, in the special figure special power control processing, during the execution of one game round, if the variable display time corresponding to the game round has elapsed, the special figure display unit 37a displays the current game round jackpot occurrence lottery processing and distribution. The stop result corresponding to the result of the determination processing is displayed, and the measurement of the final display time (specifically, 0.5 sec) is started. Then, the state in which the stop result is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a is maintained for the fixed display time. If the final display time has elapsed, and if the current game time corresponds to the departure result, a new game time is started on condition that the hold information is stored in the hold storage area 54b. Execute the process. If the suspension information is not stored, the process waits until the suspension information is newly acquired.

  On the other hand, if the current game time corresponds to the jackpot result, a process for starting the open / close execution mode is executed. Upon this start, an opening command indicating that the open / close execution mode is started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60. In the special figure special power control process, a process for starting each round game and a process for ending each round game are executed. In each of these processes, an open command indicating that the round game is started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60, and a close command indicating that the round game is ended is sent to the sound emission control device 60. In addition, in the special figure special power control process, when the opening / closing execution mode is ended, an ending command indicating the end is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60, and the jackpot occurrence lottery mode and the support mode after the opening / closing execution mode are set. The processing of is performed. In the opening / closing execution mode, an opening period occurs over a period of, for example, 3 seconds, and an effect is performed to enable a player to recognize that the opening / closing execution mode has occurred in the opening period. Thereafter, the round game in which the opening and closing of the special power winning device 32 is executed is executed a predetermined number of times. After a predetermined number of round games have been executed, an ending period occurs over a period of, for example, 5 seconds, and an effect is performed to enable the player to recognize that the opening / closing execution mode has ended in this ending period. .

  After executing the special figure special power control processing of step S213 in the timer interrupt processing, the general figure general power control processing is executed in step S214. In the general-purpose general-purpose control process, a process for acquiring general-purpose side hold information is performed when a prize to the through gate 35 occurs, and a general-purpose side hold information is stored. Then, a release determination is made for the hold information, and a process for performing an effect for ordinary drawing is executed with the release determination as an opportunity. In addition, based on the result of the open determination, a process of opening and closing the general purpose accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is executed.

  In the following step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, the output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information corresponding to the special figure display section 37a on the special figure hold display section 37b is set. At the same time, output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information corresponding to the general-purpose display section 38a on the general-purpose display section 38b is set. In step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, output information for updating the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a is set, and the display contents of the general figure display unit 38a are changed. Set the output information to be updated.

  In a succeeding step S216, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 55 are confirmed, and a payout state receiving process for performing a process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed. In step S217, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed. In the following step S218, an external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing result of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process is executed. Thereafter, the timer interrupt processing ends.

<Sound emission control device 60>
Next, the sound emission control device 60 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the sound emission control device 60 includes a sound emission control board 61 on which the MPU 62 is mounted. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 62 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 63. A certain RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built in.

  As the ROM 63, a storage unit (that is, a non-volatile storage unit) that can be randomly accessed when reading out a control program or fixed value data and does not require external power supply for storage and storage is used. Specifically, a NOR cache memory is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of memory used as the ROM 63 is arbitrary as long as random access is possible. Further, the configuration in which the control and calculation part, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be configured as a separate chip, and some functions may be implemented as separate chips. It is good also as a structure mounted.

  The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control device 50 and the operation device 48 for effect are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. A display light emitting section 44 and a speaker section 45 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62, and a display CPU 72 of the display control device 70 to be described later is connected.

<Display control device 70>
Next, the display control device 70 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the display control device 70 includes a display control board 71 on which a display CPU 72, a work RAM 73, a memory module 74, a VRAM 75, and a video display processor (VDP) 76 are mounted. .

  The display CPU 72 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 70, and reads, interprets, and executes a control program and the like. Specifically, the display CPU 72 is connected via a bus to an input port 77 mounted on the display control board 71, and various commands transmitted from the audio light emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 72 through the input port 77. Is done. Note that receiving a command from the sound emission control device 60 in the display CPU 72 is not limited to a configuration in which a command is directly received from the sound emission control device 60, but also includes a structure in which a command relayed to a relay board is received. It is.

  The display CPU 72 is connected to the work RAM 73, the memory module 74, and the VRAM 75 via the bus, and transfers various data stored in the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 based on a command received from the sound emission control device 60. Instructs transfer. The display CPU 72 is connected to the VDP 76 via a bus, and issues a drawing instruction to output an image signal to the symbol display device 41 based on a command received from the sound emission control device 60. Hereinafter, the memory module 74, the work RAM 73, the VRAM 75, and the VDP 76 will be described.

  The memory module 74 stores control data including a control program and fixed value data in advance, and includes sprite data such as symbols and characters displayed on the symbol display device 41, background data, and moving image data. Various image data are stored in advance. The memory module 74 has a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require external power supply for storing and storing. Incidentally, the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is executed well. When the pachinko machine 10 is used, the memory module 74 is used as a non-writing and read-only memory (ROM).

  Here, each sprite data includes at least a combination of bitmap format data that defines the outer shape and pattern of the character and a color palette table that is referred to when determining the display color at each pixel of the bitmap image. I have. The background data is stored and held as JPEG format data in a state where the still image data is compressed. The moving image data will be described later in detail.

  The work RAM 73 is a storage unit for temporarily storing control data read and transferred from the memory module 74 and temporarily storing flags and the like. The work RAM 73 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for storing and holding, and a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory in detail. However, the present invention is not limited to a DRAM, and another RAM such as an SRAM may be used. Although the storage capacity is 1 Gbit, the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is performed well. The work RAM 73 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  Control data is transferred from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 72 to the memory module 74. Then, the display CPU 72 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 73 into an internal memory area (register group) as necessary, and executes various processes.

  The VRAM 75 is storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for outputting an image to the symbol display device 41. The VRAM 75 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for storing and holding data. In detail, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the present invention is not limited to the SDRAM, and another RAM such as a DRAM, an SRAM, or a dual port RAM may be used. Although the storage capacity is 2 Gbits, the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is performed well. The VRAM 75 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  The VRAM 75 has an expansion buffer 81. Image data is transferred from the memory module 74 to the expansion buffer 81 based on a data transfer instruction from the VDP 76 to the memory module 74. The VRAM 75 is provided with a frame buffer 82 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 76. The VRAM 75 may be built in the VDP 76.

  The VDP 76 is an image generation device that draws data on the symbol display device 41 by specifically processing the data stored in the expansion buffer 81 based on a drawing instruction from the display CPU 72. This is a kind of drawing circuit that operates an image processing device 41b incorporated to drive and control the liquid crystal display unit 41a in the symbol display device 41. The VDP 76 is also called a “drawing chip” because it is formed as an IC chip, and its substance can be called a microcomputer chip having firmware dedicated to drawing.

  Specifically, the VDP 76 includes a control unit 91, a register 92, a moving image decoder 93, and a display circuit 94. These circuits are connected to each other via a bus, and are also connected to an I / F 95 for the display CPU 72 and an I / F 96 for the VRAM 75.

  The VDP 76 causes the register 92 to store a drawing list as drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 72. When the drawing list is stored in the register 92, the control unit 91 starts a program according to the drawing list and executes a predetermined process. Note that all of the control programs for operating the control unit 91 may be provided in the form of a drawing list, and a memory in which the control program is stored in advance is built in the control unit 91, and the contents of the control program and the drawing list are stored. The control unit 91 may execute a predetermined process. Further, the configuration may be such that the control program is read from the memory module 74 in advance.

  As the above process, the control unit 91 reads out the image data stored in the memory module 74 to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Further, the control unit 91 creates drawing data for one frame in the frame buffer 82 using (or by processing) the image data read into the development buffer 81. The drawing data for one frame is data necessary for displaying an image at one update timing in a configuration in which an image on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 is updated at a predetermined update timing. Say.

  Here, the frame buffer 82 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 82a and 82b. Specifically, a first frame area 82a and a second frame area 82b are provided. Each of these frame areas 82a and 82b is set to a capacity capable of storing one frame of drawing data. Specifically, each of the frame areas 82a and 82b includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display unit 41a (that is, the display surface P) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color is to be displayed. More specifically, a full-color method is adopted, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) in each dot. Correspondingly, in each unit area, one byte (8 bits) is allocated to each color of RGB. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the full-color system. For example, in a configuration in which only 256 colors can be displayed in each dot, the storage capacity required for storing color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

  By providing the first frame area 82a and the second frame area 82b in the frame buffer 82, in a situation where drawing on the symbol display device 41 is executed using drawing data created in one frame area. Then, creation of drawing data to be used in the future for other frame areas is executed. That is, the frame buffer 82 employs the double buffer method.

  The display circuit 94 generates an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display unit 41a based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 82a or the second frame area 82b. It is output to the symbol display device 41 via the connected output port 78. Specifically, the drawing data is transferred from the output target frame areas 82a and 82b to the display circuit 94. The transferred drawing data is converted into gradation data by adjusting the resolution by a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the symbol display device 41. Then, based on the gradation data, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the symbol display device 41 is generated and output. The display circuit 94 also outputs a synchronization signal such as a horizontal synchronization signal or a vertical synchronization signal. The moving image decoder 93 decodes the moving image data transferred to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75.

<Processing Configuration of MPU 62 of Audio Light Emission Control Device 60>
Next, a process executed by the MPU 62 of the sound emission control device 60 (hereinafter, referred to as a sound light side MPU 62) will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec) by the sound-light-side MPU 62.

  First, in step S301, a table setting process for setting a control table used to execute light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44, sound output control of the speaker unit 45, and control of the display control device 70 is executed. I do. In the table setting process, for example, a control pattern table for performing a process corresponding to a command received from the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 (hereinafter, referred to as the main MPU 52) is set. In the following step S302, a command selection process for instructing the display CPU 72 on the contents of the display control of the symbol display device 41 is executed. In the command selection process, a command is output to the display CPU 72 according to the control table read in the table setting process in step S301.

  Thereafter, in step S303, a light emission control process for performing light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission of the display light emitting unit 44 is controlled in accordance with the control table read in the table setting process in step S301. In step S304, a sound output control process for controlling the sound output of the speaker unit 45 is executed. In the sound output control process, the sound output of the speaker unit 45 is controlled according to the control table read in the table setting process in step S301. Then, a pointer update process is performed in step S305. In the pointer update processing, the current pointer information of the control table is updated to the next pointer information.

<Table setting process>
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the table setting process executed in step S301 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

  If the change command and the type command have been received from the main MPU 52 (step S401: YES), the game result storage process is executed (step S402). Specifically, from the information included in the type command, the information on which is the result of the jackpot occurrence lottery and the distribution lottery determined by the main MPU 52 at the start of the current game round is specified, The specified information is written to the RAM 64.

  Thereafter, on condition that the variable display time corresponding to the variable command received this time from the main-side MPU 52 is the variable display time corresponding to the situation where a notice effect can be generated (step S403: YES), the notice lottery process is executed. (Step S404). In the preview lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not a preview effect is to be performed on the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. As described above, as described above, in the situation in which the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 after the symbol variability display is started on the symbol display device 41, or in some cases. In a situation in which symbols are displayed in a variegated manner in a plurality of symbol columns, the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and the background screen is displayed in the same manner as the previous one. May include a predetermined mode different from that of the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The notice effect may occur at any of the game times when the reach effect is performed and when the reach effect is not performed.However, the effect when the reach effect is performed is higher than when the reach effect is not performed. It is set to occur with probability. In addition, the announcement effect is that the game time corresponding to one of the jackpot results is more likely to occur than the game time corresponding to the miss result, and the game effect corresponding to the jackpot result has a lower appearance rate. Is set to be easily generated.

  In the preliminary lottery process, the preliminary lottery table T1 stored in advance in the ROM 63 of the audio light emission control device 60 (hereinafter referred to as the sound light ROM 63) is stored in the RAM 64 of the audio light emission control device 60 (hereinafter referred to as the sound light RAM 64). read out. The preview lottery table T1 is prepared in one-to-one correspondence with a combination of a variation command and a type command. Therefore, in the preliminary lottery process, the preliminary lottery table T1 corresponding to the variation command and the type command received this time from the main MPU 52 is read from the sound light ROM 63.

  FIG. 11A is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a preview lottery table T1. In the preliminary lottery table T1, a preliminary lottery result is associated with a numerical range of a preliminary lottery counter. As the preview lottery result, non-occurrence in which a preview effect does not occur, a first preview effect in which the preview effect is performed in the first mode, and a second preview effect in which the preview effect is performed in the second mode are set. . In the first notice effect, for example, the individual image for the first notice effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41 so as to operate in a predetermined manner, and in the second notice effect, for example, the individual image for the second notice effect is displayed in a predetermined manner. It is displayed on the symbol display device 41 so as to operate. The notice lottery counter is provided in the sound-light side RAM 64. The preview lottery counter is a loop counter that can take any value from “0” to “239”, and is incremented by “1” periodically (for example, 4 msec), and becomes “0” when the maximum value is reached. Return. As shown in FIG. 11A, in the preview lottery table T1, values that can be taken by the preview lottery counter are assigned to any of the preview lottery results.

  It should be noted that the type of the notice effect to be drawn may differ depending on the type of the notice lottery table T1. In this case, the kind of the preview effect to be drawn is the same between the different types of the preliminary lottery tables T1, but the selectivity of the preliminary effect is different, or the different types of the preliminary lottery tables T1 are different. In some cases, some or all of the types of notice effects to be drawn may be different.

  In the preliminary lottery process, the value of the preliminary lottery counter at that time is acquired, and the obtained value is checked against the preliminary lottery table T1 read this time. Then, a notice lottery result corresponding to the value acquired from the notice lottery counter is obtained as a result of the present notice lottery process.

  Returning to the description of the table setting process (FIG. 10), when a negative determination is made in step S403 or when the process in step S404 is performed, the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation command received this time from the main MPU 52 is reached. The reach effect lottery process is executed on condition that the variable display time corresponds to the occurrence of the effect (step S405: YES) (step S406). That is, when the fluctuation display time of the game times determined by the main MPU 52 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach effect, the type of the reach effect to be executed is determined in the reach effect lottery process, and the main MPU 52 If the fluctuation display time of the game times determined in step does not correspond to the occurrence of the reach effect, the reach effect lottery process is not executed.

  In the reach effect, as described above, the symbols are stopped and displayed for some of the symbol rows displayed on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, thereby coping with the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode. A display state is displayed in which a combination of reach symbols in which the combination of the winning jackpot symbols is likely to be established is displayed, and in that state, a symbol is variably displayed in the remaining symbol columns. In addition, in the state where the combination of the reach symbols is displayed as described above, while performing the variation display of the symbols in the remaining symbol columns, and performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image in the background image, , A combination of reach symbols is reduced or displayed, and a reach effect is displayed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface P. The reach effect is more likely to occur in the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results than in the game times corresponding to the departure result, and in the reach effects with a lower appearance rate in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result It is set so that it easily occurs.

  In the reach effect lottery process, the reach lottery table T2 stored in the sound light ROM 63 in advance is read out to the sound light RAM 64. The reach lottery table T2 is prepared in one-to-one correspondence with a combination of a variation command and a type command. Therefore, in the reach effect lottery process, the reach lottery table T2 corresponding to the variation command and the type command received this time from the main MPU 52 is read from the sound light ROM 63.

  FIG. 11B is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the reach lottery table T2. In the reach lottery table T2, the result of the reach lottery is associated with the numerical range of the reach lottery counter. As a result of the reach lottery, a first reach effect in which the reach effect is executed in the first mode, a second reach effect in which the reach effect is executed in the second mode, and a third reach in which the reach effect is executed in the third mode Direction and has been set. In the first reach effect, for example, the individual images for the first reach effect are displayed on the symbol display device 41 so as to operate in a predetermined manner, and in the second reach effect, for example, the individual images for the second reach effect are displayed in a predetermined manner. In the third reach effect, for example, the individual images for the third reach effect are displayed on the symbol display device 41 so as to operate in a predetermined manner. The reach lottery counter is provided in the sound-light side RAM 64. The reach lottery counter is a loop counter that can take any value from “0” to “239”, and is incremented by “1” periodically (for example, 4 msec) and becomes “0” when the maximum value is reached. Return. As shown in FIG. 11B, in the reach lottery table T2, values that can be taken by the reach lottery counter are assigned to any of the reach lottery results.

  It should be noted that the type of the reach effect to be drawn may differ depending on the type of the reach lottery table T2. In this case, between the different types of reach lottery tables T2, there may be cases where the types of reach effects to be drawn are the same, but the select ratios of the reach effects are different between the different types of reach lottery tables T2. In some cases, some or all of the types of reach effects to be drawn may be different.

  In the reach effect lottery process, the value of the reach lottery counter at that time is obtained, and the obtained value is collated with the reach lottery table T2 read this time. Then, a reach lottery result corresponding to the value acquired from the reach lottery counter is acquired as a result of the current reach effect lottery process.

  Returning to the description of the table setting process (FIG. 10), when a negative determination is made in step S405 or when the process of step S406 is performed, a stop symbol determination process is performed (step S407). In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is one of the normal jackpot result and the 15R sure-change jackpot result, it corresponds to the stop result in which the same symbol combination is established on one activated line L1 to L5. The determined information is determined as the information of the current stop result. In this case, the same odd symbol combination may be selected for the 15R probability variable jackpot result, while the same even symbol combination may be selected for both the normal jackpot result and the 15R variable jackpot result. The active lines L1 to L5 at which the same symbol combination is stopped and displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the same odd symbol combination can be selected even if the result is a normal jackpot result.

  In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is the explicit 2R probability change jackpot result, it is a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on all the active lines L1 to L5, and one active line L1 The information corresponding to the stop result in which a specific symbol combination ("3.4.1") is established on L5 is determined as the information of the current stop result. In this case, the valid lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

  In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a departure result, the presence or absence of the reach effect is specified from the contents of the combination of the variation command and the type command. Then, when the reach effect occurs, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbol and the combination of the specific symbols are not established on all the activated lines L1 to L5, and is a result of stopping on one or two activated lines L1 to L5. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the reach symbols is established is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, when the reach effect does not occur, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbol and the specific symbol combination are not established on all the activated lines L1 to L5, and the reach is reached on all the activated lines L1 to L5. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the symbol combination is not established is determined as the information of the current stop result.

  After that, a control pattern table setting process is executed (step S408). In the setting process of the control pattern table, as a result of the preview lottery process (step S404), whether or not a reach effect has occurred, if a reach effect has occurred, the result of the reach effect lottery process (step S406), and a stop symbol determination process (step S406) The control pattern table corresponding to the combination of the result of step S407) is read out from the sound light side ROM 63 and stored in the sound light side RAM 64.

  The control pattern table T3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a control pattern table T3 that can be set when a notice effect and a reach effect are executed in a game time that results in a 15R probability change jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 12, in the control pattern table T3, pointer information for the number of frames corresponding to the variable display time of the target game time is set, and information on the contents of the task is associated with each pointer information. And information on the presence / absence of command output.

  The information on the content of the task is information set for performing the light emission control and the sound output control corresponding to the current game, and the light emission of the display light emitting section 44 in each frame in a manner corresponding to the information on the content of the task. The control is performed, and the sound output of the speaker unit 45 is controlled. Specifically, in the control pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 12, the data at the start of the change is set in the pointer information of “0”, and the data at the start of the announcement effect is set in the pointer information of “200”. , The data at the end of the notice effect is set in the pointer information of “300”, the data at the start of the normal reach is set in the pointer information of “400”, and the data at the start of the super reach is set in the pointer information of “700”. The data at the start of the fixed effect is set in the pointer information of “1000”, and the data at the start of the standby display is set in the pointer information of “1400”. These pieces of pointer information correspond to break timings such as the start of the effect, the switching of the effect, and the end of the effect. In the other pointer information, data for enabling the light emission control and the sound output control between the break timings are set.

  The information on the presence / absence of command output is information indicating the presence / absence of command output from the sound-light-side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 and the type of the command. By outputting a command to the display CPU 72 in accordance with the control pattern table T3 in the command selection process (step S302) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9), the content of the image in the symbol display device 41 and the light emission in the display light emitting unit 44 The content can be associated with the sound output content of the speaker unit 45. That is, in accordance with the content of the moving image in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 44 performs the effect of light, and the speaker unit 45 performs the effect of sound output. In the control pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 12, specifically, command data is set for pointer information of "0" in which data at the start of the change is set in the content of the task. Therefore, at the start of the fluctuation of the game times, the display control is started in the display CPU 72 based on the command transmission from the sound light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72. Further, in the contents of the task, each pointer information in which the data at the start of the announcement effect, the data at the start of the normal reach, the data at the start of the super reach, the data at the start of the fixed effect, and the data at the start of the standby display are set. Specifically, command data is set for each of the pointer information “200”, “400”, “700”, “1000”, and “1400”. Therefore, within the range of the effect for game play started by the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger that the command for change and the type command are transmitted from the main MPU 52, the effect category included in the effect for game play When the type changes, the display control corresponding to the new effect division is started in the display CPU 72 based on the command transmission from the sound light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72.

  In addition, the control pattern table T3 is an effect for the demonstration display in a situation where neither the effect for the opening / closing execution mode nor the effect for the game operation or the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is executed. It is provided corresponding to. Since the control pattern table T3 is set corresponding to various situations as described above, some control pattern table T3 is read out to the sound-light RAM 64 in a situation where the operating power is supplied to the sound-light MPU 62. It is in a state of being left.

  After that, the variable display time is determined (step S409). In this process, the information of the fluctuation display time of the current game is specified from the contents of the fluctuation command received this time from the main MPU 52, and the information of the specified fluctuation display time is described with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, it is set in a fluctuation time counter 64a provided in the sound light RAM 64. The fluctuating time counter 64a is a counter for specifying the timing of terminating the fluctuating display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 and starting the final display of the symbol by the sound light side MPU 62 in the current game time. The value set in the fluctuating time counter 64a is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is started by the sound-light-side MPU 62, that is, every time 4 msec elapses.

  A variation display mode of the symbol when the effect for the game round is executed will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 13A and 13B. FIG. 13A is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state in which a symbol is swingably displayed on the symbol display device 41, and FIG. FIG.

  A game time that results in a complete departure (a game time that results in a departure without occurrence of a reach effect) or a normal reach display (a reach effect using the symbols in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 without displaying a character for reach effect is displayed. In the game time in which the (display content to be performed) is performed, the variable display of the symbols of all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is started in the high-speed variable display which is the low identification mode, and thereafter, the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a predetermined order. The display is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display which is the high identification mode, and the standby display is started in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the predetermined order. Then, after the state in which the standby display is being performed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is continued for a predetermined period, each of the symbols that have been displayed in the standby state is finally displayed as the final stop display, and the final display state is finally displayed. Continued over time.

  The standby display is, as shown in FIG. 13A, the standby areas SA1 to SA3 virtually set on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 so that each of the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 is three. This is a display state in which symbols are waiting at SA9. In a state where only the upper symbol row Z1 is in the standby display and the symbol scroll display is continued in the remaining symbol rows Z2 and Z3, one symbol is standby in each of the standby areas SA1 to SA3 corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1. It will be in the state that you are doing. Further, in a state where the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are in the standby display and the scroll display of the symbol is continued in the middle symbol row Z2, the standby areas SA1 to SA3 corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3. Are in a state of waiting one symbol at a time in each of the waiting areas SA7 to SA9 corresponding to. Further, in a state where all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a standby state, one symbol is in a standby state in each of the standby areas SA1 to SA9. In the standby display, the symbols waiting in the standby areas SA1 to SA9 are not statically displayed, but are variably displayed within the same standby area SA1 to SA9. Specifically, each of the symbols to be displayed in the standby mode is swung up and down or left and right within a range including the stop position in the corresponding standby areas SA1 to SA9 and sandwiching the stop position. Move.

  As shown in FIG. 13 (b), the fixed display means that each of the symbols displayed in the standby areas SA1 to SA9 in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is displayed in the corresponding standby area SA1 to SA9. This is a display state in which the variable display within the range is terminated and the corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed at the stop position of each of the standby areas SA1 to SA9. By performing the fixed display in this manner, it is possible for the player to clearly recognize the stop result of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 of the current game time.

  On the other hand, in the game time in which the super reach display is performed, the fluctuation display of the symbols is started, and the symbols of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 which are a part of the symbol rows are displayed in the respective standby areas SA1 to SA3, SA7 to SA9. After the reach line is formed in standby display, an image for super reach is displayed. Thereafter, in a state where the combination of the big hit symbols or the combination of the out-reach symbols is formed, the symbols are displayed on standby in the respective standby areas on all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 for a predetermined period. Then, the symbols are fixedly displayed, and the state of the fixed display is continued for the fixed display time.

  Returning to the description of the table setting process (FIG. 10), it is a situation in which the effect execution control is being performed according to the control pattern table set in step S408 (step S410: YES), and the sound light side is set in step S409. When the value of the fluctuation time counter 64a of the RAM 64 is "0" (step S411: YES), the fixed display counter 64b provided in the sound-light-side RAM 64 displays the fixed display time (specifically, 0.5 sec. Is set (step S412). The value set in the fixed time counter 64b is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is started by the sound-light-side MPU 62, that is, every time 4 msec elapses. In addition, a table for determining display that determines the mode of light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 and the mode of sound output control of the speaker unit 45 during the fixed display time is read from the sound light ROM 63 and stored in the sound light RAM 64 (step S413). In the fixed display table, control data for executing the light emission control and the sound output control for the fixed display time are set. However, the display light emitting unit 44 is turned off in the fixed display time, and the speaker is turned off. The part 45 is in a mute state. Thereafter, a confirmed display start command is transmitted to the display CPU 72 (step S414). As a result, in the display CPU 72, each symbol which is displayed on standby in the symbol display device 41 is fixedly displayed as it is, and the state of the fixed display is maintained for a fixed display time (specifically, 0.5 sec). The display of the symbol display device 41 is controlled so as to be performed.

  Here, in the main-side MPU 52, when the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation command and the type command has elapsed, the special figure display unit 37a corresponds to the result of the current game's big hit occurrence lottery processing and distribution determination processing. The stop result is displayed and the state is maintained for the fixed display time. The variable display time measured by the main-side MPU 52 is the same as the variable display time set in step S409 in the sound-side MPU 62, and the final display time measured by the main-side MPU 52 is the same in the sound-side MPU 62. This is the same as the final display time set in step S412. Therefore, the symbol display is started to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 at the timing when the main display MPU 52 confirms the elapse of the variable display time, and the symbol display device is displayed at the timing when the elapse of the final display time is confirmed by the main MPU 52. At 41, the symbol confirmation display ends.

  In the table setting process, other processes are executed in step S415 in addition to the above processes. In other processes, for example, when an opening command is received from the main MPU 52, a control pattern table for executing an effect for the open / close execution mode is read, and when an ending command is received from the main MPU 52, Executes a process for ending the effect for the open / close execution mode. In a situation where neither the effect for the game round nor the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is executed, the control pattern table for executing the demonstration display effect is read.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the sound effect side MPU 62 executes the notice lottery process (step S404) for determining the presence or absence and content of the notice effect, and the reach effect lottery for determining the content of the reach effect. The process (Step S406) is executed. This eliminates the need for the main MPU 52 to determine the presence / absence and content of the notice effect, and further eliminates the need to determine the content of the reach effect. It is possible to do.

  However, due to the fact that both the announcement effect and the reach effect are determined by lottery in the sound-light MPU 62, the variable display time determined by the control pattern table T3 selected in the sound-light MPU 62 is changed to the main MPU 52. May not coincide with the determined variable display time. In other words, when trying to execute the lottery of the announcement effect and the lottery of the reach effect while completely matching the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52, the variable display time corresponding to the variable display time that can be determined by the main MPU 52 is set. Therefore, it is necessary to prepare a plurality of types of notice effects and a plurality of types of reach effects in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the types of notice effects and the types of reach effects are enormous. Further, even if a plurality of advance notice effects and a plurality of reach effects are prepared in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10 in correspondence with each of the variable display times that can be determined by the main MPU 52, If the lottery of the notice effect and the lottery of the reach effect are attempted to be executed while completely matching the determined fluctuation display time, restrictions are imposed on the design of the notice effect and the reach effect. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, while allowing the variable display time determined by the control pattern table T3 not to coincide with the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52, the pachinko machine 10 waits at the end of the game effect. The display and the confirmation display are configured to be performed favorably. Hereinafter, the configuration will be described.

  FIGS. 14A and 14B show various part tables T4 to T4 used when setting the control pattern table T3 in the control pattern table setting process (step S408) in the table setting process (FIG. 10). FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining T9.

  The parts tables T4 to T9 are tables for generating part or all of one control pattern table T3, and are stored in the sound-light side ROM 63 in advance. The parts tables T4 to T9 are classified into a plurality of table groups, and one part table read from one table group may be used as it is as one control pattern table T3, or from each table group. In some cases, one control pattern table T3 is generated by combining the read parts tables.

  The table group includes a table group TG1 for the first period and a table group TG2 for the second period. In the table group TG1 for the first period, in the case where the change display of the symbols is switched from the scroll display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in the effect for the game round. The parts table corresponding to the period from the start of the variable display to the start of the standby display in the lower symbol column Z3, and in the case where the display is switched to the standby display in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 at the same time in the game effect. A parts table corresponding to the entire period of the effect for the game round is included. When an announcement effect is performed as an effect for a game, control data for executing the announcement effect is set in the part tables T5 and T6 included in the table group TG1 for the first period. For example, the control data for executing the first announcement effect is set in the parts table T5 for the first announcement effect, and the control data for executing the second announcement effect is stored in the parts table T6 for the second announcement effect. Is set. Further, the control data corresponding to the period until the standby display is started in the lower symbol row Z3 of the game when the notice effect does not occur is set in the parts table T4 for not producing the notice effect. Note that the table group TG1 for the first period also includes a part table other than the part tables T4 to T6 exemplified above.

  In the table group TG2 for the second period, in the case of changing the display of symbols from scroll display to standby display in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 in the effect for game round. A part table corresponding to a period from the start of standby display in the lower symbol column Z3 to the end of standby display in the middle symbol column Z2 is included. When a reach effect is executed as a game effect, control data for executing the reach effect is set in the part tables T7 to T9 included in the table group TG2 for the second period. For example, the control data for executing the first reach effect is set in the parts table T7 for the first reach effect, and the control data for executing the second reach effect is set in the parts table T8 for the second reach effect. The control data for executing the third reach effect is set in the parts table T9 for the third reach effect. The table group TG2 for the second period also includes a part table other than the part tables T7 to T9 exemplified above. The parts table includes a parts table in a case where the reach effect is not executed.

  In the setting process of the control pattern table in step S408 of the table setting process (FIG. 10), one part table is read from the table group TG1 for the first period in the sound-light side ROM 63. In this case, for example, this is a game time that is started when the number of pieces of hold information stored in the hold storage area 54b is four, which is the upper limit number. If the change display time of the game times corresponds to the change display time that simultaneously occurs in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the switching from the scroll display of the change display of the symbol to the standby display corresponds to the first period table. One part table read out of the group TG1 is set as it is as the control pattern table T3.

  On the other hand, if the change display time of the current game times corresponds to the change display time in which the change of the symbol change display to the standby display corresponds to the change display time sequentially occurring in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the preliminary lottery processing (step One part table corresponding to the result of S404) is read from the table group TG1 for the first period in the sound light side ROM 63. If the game time does not cause the reach effect, one part table corresponding to the current fluctuation display time is read from the table group TG2 for the second period in the sound-side ROM 63, and the game time at which the reach effect occurs If so, one part table corresponding to the result of the reach effect lottery process (step S405) is read from the table group TG2 for the second period in the sound light side ROM 63. Then, a part table read from the table group TG1 for the first period and a part table read from the table group TG2 for the second period are combined to set one control pattern table T3.

  In a situation where one part table is directly set as one control pattern table T3, the type of the control pattern table T3 corresponding to one variable display time determined by the main MPU 52 is uniquely determined. On the other hand, in a situation where one control pattern table T3 is created by combining a plurality of parts tables, there are a plurality of types of control pattern tables T3 corresponding to one variable display time determined by the main MPU 52. It will exist. For example, the advance lottery process (step S404) is executed using the advance lottery table T1 shown in FIG. 11A, and the reach effect lottery process is executed using the reach lottery table T2 shown in FIG. 11B. In the situation where (Step S406) is executed, the parts table T4 for not generating a notice effect, the parts table T5 for the first notice effect, and the parts for the second notice effect are included in the table group TG1 for the first period. One of the tables T6 is selected, and a part table T7 for the first reach effect, a part table T8 for the second reach effect, and a part table T9 for the third reach effect are selected from the table group TG2 for the second period. Either is selected.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the variable display time determined by the parts tables T4 to T9. FIG. 15 (a1) shows the variable display time determined by the parts table T4 for no notice effect, and FIG. 15 (a2) shows the variable display time determined by the parts table T5 for the first notice effect. (A3) shows the variable display time determined by the parts table T6 for the second announcement effect. FIG. 15 (b1) shows the variable display time determined by the first reach part table T7, and FIG. 15 (b2) shows the variable display time determined by the second reach part table T8. FIG. 15 (b3) shows the variable display time determined by the parts table T9 for the third reach effect.

  As shown in FIG. 15 (a1) to FIG. 15 (a3), the variable display time determined by the parts table T5 for the first announcement effect is longer than the variable display time determined by the parts table T4 for the non-announcement effect. The variable display time defined by the parts table T6 for the second preview effect is longer by (Ta2-Ta1) than the variable display time defined by the parts table T5 for the first preview effect. Further, as shown in FIGS. 15 (b1) to 15 (b3), the variable display time determined by the parts table T8 for the second reach effect is longer than the variable display time determined by the parts table T7 for the first reach effect. Is longer by the time (Tb1), and the variable display time defined by the parts table T9 for the third reach effect is longer by the time (Tb2-Tb1) than the variable display time set by the parts table T8 for the second reach effect.

  In the above configuration, the preliminary lottery process (step S404) is executed using the preliminary lottery table T1 shown in FIG. 11A, and the reach effect lottery is performed using the reach lottery table T2 shown in FIG. 11B. When the process (Step S406) is executed, the variable display time determined by the control pattern table varies according to the combination of the part tables T4 to T9 to be used. Specifically, when the combination of the parts table T4 for the non-announcement effect and the parts table T7 for the first reach effect is selected, the variable display time becomes the shortest, and the parts table T6 for the second effect effect When the combination with the parts table T9 for the third reach effect is selected, the variable display time is the longest, but the difference between these variable display times is (Ta2 + Tb2). Therefore, a variable display time determined by the sound-light MPU 62 may be different from one variable command transmitted from the main MPU 52.

  However, the longest change display time among the change display times that can be selected for one change command is the change display time corresponding to the change command, that is, the change display time determined by the main MPU 52 or less. In such a manner, an announcement lottery table T1 and a reach lottery table T2 that are selected for a combination of the variation command and the type command are set. That is, no matter which of the preliminary lottery tables T1 is used and which of the reach lottery tables T2 are used, it corresponds to the control pattern table created by combining a plurality of parts tables. The variable display time is less than or equal to the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52.

  In a configuration in which the longest variable display time among the variable display times that can be selected for one variable command is equal to or less than the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52, the variable time counter of the sound-light RAM 64 is used. The control corresponding to the last pointer set in the control pattern table ends before the variable display time measured using the 64a elapses. On the other hand, if the control corresponding to the final pointer is completed before the fluctuation display time measured using the fluctuation time counter 64a has elapsed, the value of the pointer to be controlled is returned. The standby display is configured to be continued. A process for returning the value of the pointer will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process executed in step S305 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

  In the pointer updating process, one is added to the value of pointer information to be referred to among pointer information used when specifying control data to be used in a currently set control table (for example, a control pattern table). (Step S501). Accordingly, in the command selection process (step S302), the light emission control process (step S303), and the sound output control process (step S304) in the next process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9), the value of the pointer information that has been updated this time is used. The corresponding control data is used.

  Thereafter, on the condition that the value of the pointer information to be referred to is larger than the value of the last pointer defined in the control table, and that the currently set control table is the control pattern table for the game round. (Steps S502 and S503: YES), the pointer information is corrected (step S504). In the pointer information correction process, the control data corresponding to the pointer information corresponding to the timing at which the standby display is started is applied to the command selection process (step S302) in the next process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) and the light emission control process (step S302). The value of the pointer information to be referred to is corrected so as to be used in the step S303) and the sound output control process (step S304). Thus, even if the control corresponding to the last pointer is completed before the fluctuation display time measured using the fluctuation time counter 64a elapses, the standby display is continued until the fluctuation display time elapses. It will be.

  When the pointer information correction process (step S504) is executed, a standby extension command is transmitted to the display CPU 72 (step S505). When receiving the standby extension command, the display CPU 72 sets a data table for continuing the standby display, and causes the symbol display device 41 to continue the standby display.

  Next, with reference to a time chart of FIG. 17, a description will be given of how the effect for the game round is executed. FIG. 17 (a) shows the execution period of the game times, and FIGS. 17 (b1) and 17 (b2) show the execution control of the effect using the parts table read from the table group TG1 for the first period. FIG. 17 (c1) and FIG. 17 (c2) are periods in which the effect execution control using the parts table read from the table group TG2 for the second period is performed. 17 (d1) and 17 (d2) show the standby display period, and FIGS. 17 (e1) and 17 (e2) show the final display period. 17 (b1), FIG. 17 (c1), FIG. 17 (d1), and FIG. 17 (e1) show the preliminary lottery process (step S404) using the preliminary lottery table T1 shown in FIG. 11 (a). A control pattern table (hereinafter referred to as a shortest correspondence table) that has the shortest fluctuating display time when the reach effect lottery process (step S406) is executed using the reach lottery table T2 shown in FIG. 17 (b2), FIG. 17 (c2), FIG. 17 (d2), and FIG. 17 (e2) use the preview lottery table T1 shown in FIG. 11 (a). When the announcement lottery process (step S404) is executed and the reach effect lottery process (step S406) is executed using the reach lottery table T2 shown in FIG. Longest variable display time become the control pattern table (hereinafter, referred to as maximum correspondence table) Te shows the case where is used.

  In both the case where the shortest correspondence table is used and the case where the longest correspondence table is used, at the timing of t1, the game starts as shown in FIG. ) And FIG. 17 (b2), the first period is started. Thereafter, when the shortest correspondence table is used, the first period ends and the second period starts at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. 17 (b1) and FIG. 17 (c1), and the longest correspondence table becomes When used, the first period ends and the second period starts at the timing of t21 as shown in FIGS. 17 (b2) and 17 (c2).

  After that, when the shortest correspondence table is used, at the timing of t12, as shown in FIG. 17 (c1) and FIG. 17 (d1), the second period ends, the standby display period starts, and the longest correspondence table is When used, the second period ends and the standby display period starts at the timing of t22, as shown in FIGS. 17 (c2) and 17 (d2). In this case, in the situation where the shortest correspondence table is used, the end timing of the standby display defined in the control pattern table is earlier than the elapse timing of the variable display time, but the pointer update processing (FIG. 16) By executing the pointer information correcting process (step S504), the standby display is continued.

  Thereafter, in both the case where the shortest correspondence table is used and the case where the longest correspondence table is used, the fluctuation measured using the fluctuation time counter 64a of the sound-light side RAM 64 at the timing of t2. The display time elapses. Accordingly, if the shortest correspondence table is used, the standby display period ends and the fixed display period starts, as shown in FIGS. 17D1 and 17E1, and the longest correspondence table is used. If so, the standby display period ends and the confirmed display period starts as shown in FIG. 17 (d2) and FIG. 17 (e2). Then, when the confirmed display time elapses at the timing of t3, the confirmed display period ends as shown in FIG. 17 (e1) and FIG. 17 (e2), and as shown in FIG. Ends.

  As described above, the preview lottery process (step S404) for determining the presence or absence and the content of the preview effect is performed by the light side MPU 62, and the reach effect lottery process (step S406) for determining the content of the reach effect is performed. Be executed. This eliminates the need for the main MPU 52 to determine the presence / absence and content of the notice effect, and further eliminates the need to determine the content of the reach effect. Is achieved. Further, it is possible to diversify the effect form set for one combination of the variation command and the type command transmitted from the main MPU 52.

  Even if the same variation command is received from the main MPU 52, the result of the preliminary lottery process and the result of the reach effect lottery process are adjusted so that the variation display time determined by the control pattern table may be different. A control pattern table is set. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the main MPU 52 and to diversify the production mode, while suitably performing the design of the advance production and the reach production.

  Even in a configuration in which the variable display time determined by the control pattern table selected by using the same variable command as a trigger may be different, the symbol display device is set at a timing corresponding to the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52. The mode of the variable display of the symbol at 41 is switched from the standby display to the confirmed display. Thereby, even if the variable display time determined by the control pattern table can be different, the effect for the game round on the symbol display device 41 is ended at the timing corresponding to the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52. It becomes possible.

  Even in the case where the same variation command is received from the main MPU 52, in a configuration where the control pattern tables to be used may be different, the longest variation display time among the variation display times determined by the control pattern tables is used. The time corresponds to the variable display time or less determined by the main MPU 52. Then, when the control pattern table corresponding to the variable display time is shorter than the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52, the timing until the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52 elapses is reached. The symbol change display mode in the symbol display device 41 is maintained at the standby display. As a result, regardless of which control pattern table is to be used, at the end of the game round, the symbol display device 41 switches from the standby display to the confirmed display, for example, a predetermined effect. It is possible to prevent an event such as the sudden start of the finalized display in the middle of the process or the event that the finalized display of the symbol continues for a longer period than the normal finalized display period.

  A fluctuation time counter 64a is provided in the sound light RAM 64, and the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation command received from the main MPU 52 is set in the fluctuation time counter 64a. When the variable display time measured and used has elapsed, the symbol variable display mode in the symbol display device 41 is switched to the fixed display. Thereby, even in the case where the same fluctuation command is received from the main MPU 52, in a configuration in which the fluctuation display time determined by the control pattern table can be different, the command indicating the start timing of the definite display is changed to the main MPU 52. , It is possible to start the definite display at a timing corresponding to the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52.

  Note that the following configuration may be applied as a configuration in which the variable display time determined by the control pattern table can be different even when the same variation command is received from the main MPU 52.

  The various part tables T7 to T9 included in the table group TG2 for the second period are controlled for a time corresponding to a time longer than the longest variable display time assumed as a situation in which these parts tables T7 to T9 are used. Data may be set, and control data for executing standby display may be set as control data corresponding to a later period following the end timing. In this case, it is not necessary to perform a correction process for extending the execution period of the standby display on the control pattern table. However, it is necessary to end the use of the control pattern table at the timing when the fluctuation display time of the game times has elapsed.

  A control pattern table for controlling the execution of the effect after the start of the standby display is provided separately from the control pattern table for controlling the execution of the effect before the start of the standby display, and the standby display is started. In such a case, the state may be switched to a state in which the effect execution control is performed based on the control pattern table for standby display. In this case, by using the same standby display control pattern table in any of the game times, the standby display control pattern table can be shared in various situations. In this configuration, the control pattern table for standby display is set as a table for performing standby display for a predetermined period, and it is necessary to perform standby display for a period longer than the predetermined period. May be configured to use a control pattern table for standby display in a loop. In addition, the control pattern table for standby display is set as a table that allows the standby display to be executed for the maximum period or more that is assumed as the period during which the standby display is executed, and the variation display time of the game times is set. When the elapsed time has elapsed, the use of the standby display control pattern table may be terminated halfway.

  The measurement of the time for starting the definite display is not limited to the configuration in which the sound-light-side MPU 62 is executed. A corresponding command may be transmitted, and when the command is received by the sound-light-side MPU 62, processing for starting the final display in the sound-light-side MPU 62 may be executed.

  Even in the case where the same variation command is received from the main MPU 52, in a configuration where the control pattern tables to be used may be different, the longest variation among the variable display times determined by the control pattern tables Instead of the configuration in which the display time is equal to or less than the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52, the maximum variable display time among the variable display times determined by the control pattern table is determined by the main MPU 52. A configuration that can be longer than the display time may be adopted. In this case, it is necessary to end the effect during the execution of the game effect. Therefore, in such a case, the effect for forced termination occurs, and the content corresponding to the result of the jackpot occurrence lottery and the type lottery corresponding to the game times in the forced termination effect, more specifically, the game The content corresponding to the determination result of the stop symbol determination process (step S407) in the second table setting process (FIG. 10) may be notified. More specifically, even when an effect such as a reach effect corresponding to a period prior to the standby display is being performed on the symbol display device 41, the game time of the game is changed at the timing when the variable display time has elapsed. A combination of symbols determined as a stop result may be suddenly stopped and displayed, and the final display may be performed in a state where the symbol combination is stopped and displayed.

<Processing Configuration of Display CPU 72>
Next, processing executed by the display CPU 72 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle by the display CPU 72, specifically, at a cycle of 20 msec.

  In addition, when outputting the image signal for one frame to the symbol display device 41, the VDP 76 starts outputting the image signal from the dot at the upper left corner of the display surface P, and places it on a horizontal line including the dot at one end. An image signal is sequentially output for the arranged dots, and an image signal is output for each horizontal line from left to right in order from the top. Then, an image signal is finally output for the dot at the lower right corner of the display surface P. In this case, the VDP 76 outputs a V interrupt signal to the display CPU 72 at the timing when the image signal is output for the last dot to make the display CPU 72 recognize that the update of the image of one frame is completed. The output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec, which is the same as the update cycle of the image for one frame. In this regard, the V interrupt processing can be considered to be started in synchronization with the reception of the V interrupt signal. However, even if the V interrupt signal has not been received, a new V interrupt process is started if 20 msec has elapsed since the previous V interrupt process was started.

  In the V interruption processing, first, a command analysis processing is executed (step S601). Specifically, the contents of the command stored in the command buffer of the work RAM 73 are analyzed. Here, when the display CPU 72 receives the strobe signal from the sound-light-side MPU 62, the display CPU 72 executes the command interrupt processing regardless of what processing is being executed at that time. In the command interruption process, the command received at the input port 77 is transferred to a command buffer provided in the work RAM 73.

  Thereafter, on condition that the result of the command analysis processing corresponds to the result of receiving the new command (step S602: YES), the command corresponding processing is executed (step S603). In the command corresponding process, an execution target table for executing a program corresponding to the received command is read from the memory module 74. The execution target table defines processing required to display an image for one frame at each update timing of an image when displaying a moving image corresponding to the received command on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. Information group.

  The command that the display CPU 72 receives from the sound-side MPU 62 includes the command at the start of fluctuation, the command at the start of a notice effect, the command at the start of normal reach, the command at the start of super reach, the command at the start of the fixed effect, There are a standby display start command, a standby extension command, a fixed display start command, and the like. When these commands are received, the execution target table necessary for executing the effect for the game corresponding to each of the commands on the symbol display device 41 is read.

  If a negative determination is made in step S602 or if the process in step S603 is performed, task processing is performed (step S604). In the task processing, a drawing instruction is issued to the VDP 76 in order to display an image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing by referring to the control data of the current processing time in the execution target table set as the usage target. Performs various data settings required for this. Specifically, as the various data, address information of an area where image data to be controlled is stored in the memory module 74, address information of an area to which the image data to be controlled is transferred in the VRAM 75, and image data to be controlled are used. Information on target frame areas 82a and 82b in which drawing data is to be created, information on coordinates when writing image data to be controlled in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be created, information on scale when writing the image data, And information of a uniform α value (semi-transparent value) at the time of writing the image data.

  After that, a drawing list output process is executed (step S605). In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying one frame of image corresponding to the update timing of the current process is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 76. In this case, in the drawing list, the image grasped in the immediately preceding task process is to be drawn, and the parameter information updated in the task process is also set. The VDP 76 creates drawing data in the frame areas 82a and 82b of the VRAM 75 according to the drawing list. The processing in the VDP 76 will be described later in detail.

  The task processing in step S604 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. First, a control start setting process is executed (step S701). In the control start setting process, it is determined based on the currently set execution target table whether or not there is an individual image to be the control start target in the current process. If it exists, the work RAM 73 searches for an empty buffer area for performing various calculations in controlling the individual image, and corresponds one-to-one to the individual image that is grasped as the control start target. To secure a free buffer area. Further, the initialization processing is performed on all the secured free buffer areas, and the control start parameter information corresponding to the individual image is set in the initialized free buffer areas.

  Thereafter, the control update target is grasped (step S702). The control update target is an individual image for which the control start processing has been completed and which may be included in an image for one frame after the current processing.

  After that, the arithmetic processing for the background is executed (step S703). In the background arithmetic processing, the control update target of the current time is grasped among the rearmost still image and the background sprite that constitute the background image. Further, for the grasped control update target, various parameter information necessary for creating a drawing list such as coordinates on the virtual two-dimensional plane, rotation angle, scale, uniform α value and α data designation is calculated and derived. Then, the control information is updated by writing the derived various parameter information in an area secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with each individual image.

  After that, an effect calculation process is executed (step S704). In the effect calculation process, the control update target of the current control among effect sprites constituting an effect image to be displayed in various effects such as a reach effect, a notice effect, and a jackpot effect is grasped. In addition, the above various parameter information is derived for the grasped control update target. Then, the control information is updated by writing the derived various parameter information in an area secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with each individual image.

  Thereafter, a symbol calculation process is executed (step S705). In the symbol calculation process, the control update target of this time is grasped among the symbols to be subjected to the fluctuation display in each game time. In addition, the above various parameter information is derived for the grasped control update target. Then, the control information is updated by writing the derived various parameter information in an area secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with each individual image.

  Thereafter, a process of grasping the drawing instruction target is executed (step S706). In the process of grasping the drawing instruction target, the image of one frame corresponding to the current drawing data creation instruction among the individual images that have been subjected to the control update by the respective arithmetic processes of steps S703, S704, and S705 is described. A process for grasping the included individual images is executed. The grasp is performed by executing a predetermined calculation with reference to the information of the coordinates, the rotation angle, and the scale of each individual image. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list. As described above, the individual images to be specified in the drawing list are not all the individual images for which control has been started, but only the individual images to be displayed, so that it is necessary to select the individual images to be displayed in the VDP 76. It is not necessary to uselessly perform the drawing process on an individual image that is not a display target even if it is not selected. Thus, the processing load of the VDP 76 is reduced.

<Basic processing in VDP 76>
Next, a basic process executed by the VDP 76 will be described.

  The VDP 76 sets the value of the register 92 based on the command sent from the display CPU 72, creates drawing data in the frame areas 82a and 82b of the frame buffer 82 based on the drawing list sent from the display CPU 72, A process of outputting an image signal to the symbol display device 41 based on the drawing data created in the frame regions 82a and 82b is executed.

  Among the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 92 is executed by the circuit (not shown) attached to the I / F 95 for the display CPU 72 each time the drawing list is received. The process of creating drawing data is repeatedly started by the control unit 91 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 msec). The process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 94 at a predetermined image signal output start timing.

  Hereinafter, the process of creating the drawing data will be described in detail. Prior to the description of the processing, the contents of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 72 to the VDP 76 will be described. FIGS. 20A to 20C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

  Header information is set in the drawing list. The header information includes information indicating whether the drawing data for displaying the image for one frame corresponding to the drawing list is drawn in the first frame area 82a or the second frame area 82b. Information is set. In the header information, information on the presence / absence of decoding designation and the address of moving image data to be decoded is set.

  In the drawing list, in addition to the header information, a plurality of types of image data used for displaying an image for one frame are set. Further, information on a drawing order of each image data and information of each image data are set. Parameter information is set. In detail, the drawing order information is set so as to be serial number information, and information of image data to be used in one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information is set. Also, parameter information is set in one-to-one correspondence with information of each image data.

  The drawing order is set so that an individual image to be displayed so as to be located on the back side of the display surface P in an image for one frame becomes a drawing target first. Note that the individual image is one still image defined by still image data such as background data, or one sprite defined by sprite data such as design sprite data. In the drawing list of FIG. 20A, the background data is set as the first drawing target, the sprite data A is set as the second, the sprite data B is set as the third, and so on. Therefore, the background data is first written into the drawing target frame areas 82a and 82b, and then the sprite data A and the sprite data B are written so as to overlap the background data. In addition, in the image for one frame, each individual image is displayed so as to be on the near side in the order of the background image → the effect image → the design.

  A plurality of types of parameters are set in the parameter information P (1), P (2), P (3),. More specifically, the background data parameter P (1) is, as shown in FIG. 20B, information on the address of the area where the background data is stored in the memory module 74 and the area where the background data is transferred in the VRAM 75. Address information, coordinate information indicating a position on the virtual two-dimensional plane when background data is written, rotation angle information indicating a rotation angle on the virtual two-dimensional plane when background data is written, and background data With respect to the size set as the initial state of, the scale information indicating the magnification at the time of writing into the frame areas 82a and 82b and the uniform α value indicating the entire transparent information (or transparent information) when writing the background data And information of α data designation indicating whether or not the α data is applied and an application target. The types of the above parameters are the same for sprite data A as shown in FIG.

  The coordinate information is not individually set for all pixels constituting the image data, but one coordinate information is set for one image data. Specifically, one pixel at the center of the image data is set as a reference pixel for which coordinate information is specified. In the VDP 76, it is possible to recognize that the information of the designated coordinates is one pixel at the center of the image data, and when arranging the image data, one pixel at the center is on the designated coordinates. . As a result, the information capacity (that is, data amount) of information of coordinates to be designated for one image data in the display CPU 72 can be suppressed. Further, since it is not necessary for the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 to be able to recognize the coordinates of all the pixels of the image data, the program can be simplified.

  Incidentally, the reference pixel is not limited to one pixel at the center, and may be, for example, a pixel at a corner such as an upper left corner or an upper right corner. Since the sprite data and the still image data are basically defined as a rectangular shape, by using the pixels at the corners as the reference pixels, the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 can easily recognize the reference pixels.

  The uniform α value is transmission information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 72. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, the α data is transmission information applied to each pixel of background data and sprite data, and is previously stored in the memory module 74 as image data. In the α data, transmission information can be made different for each pixel within the range of the same background data or the same sprite data. The α data has a larger data capacity than program data for setting a uniform α value.

  Since the uniform α value and α data are set as described above, in a situation where the transparency of the background data and the sprite data need not be finely controlled in pixel units, but may be uniformly controlled for all pixels. By being able to cope with a uniform α value, the required data capacity can be reduced, and by applying the α data, the transmittance can be finely controlled in pixel units.

  The drawing process in the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S801, it is determined whether the creation of the drawing data specified by the drawing list already received is completed. If the drawing data has been created, it is determined in step S802 whether a new drawing list has been received from the display CPU 72. If a new drawing list has been received, a corresponding process at the time of reception is executed in step S803.

  In the reception process, it is determined from the information of the target buffer included in the drawing list in which of the frame areas 82a and 82b the drawing data for one frame corresponding to the drawing list received this time is to be drawn.

  In a succeeding step S804, a content grasping process is executed. In the content comprehension processing, image data set as a reading target in the drawing list is read from the memory module 74 and written into the development buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. In the content comprehension processing, the type of image data initially set as a drawing target in the drawing list is grasped, and various parameter information of the image data is grasped. In the writing process, the image data to be drawn this time is written into the frame areas 82a and 82b set as the creation targets, based on the grasp result of the content grasp process in step S804.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S801 that the drawing data specified by the drawing list already received is being created, a process of updating the drawing list counter is performed in step S806. Thereby, the drawing target is switched to the image data in the next drawing order. Then, the processing of steps S804 and S805 is performed on the switched image data. That is, by performing the drawing process a plurality of times, the drawing data of the image of one frame specified by one drawing list is created.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to a configuration in which only one image data is processed in one drawing process, and may be a configuration in which a plurality of image data is processed in one drawing process. The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the same number of image data is processed in each of the processing times, and a configuration in which different numbers of image data are processed in each of the processing times of the drawing processing may be employed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S802, or after the process in step S805 is performed, in step S807, it is determined whether the display circuit 94 has completed outputting one frame of image signal. If the drawing has not been completed, the main drawing process is terminated. If completed, a V interrupt signal is output to the display CPU 72 in step S808, followed by terminating the main drawing process.

  The creation of the drawing data for one frame is performed so as to be completed within a period of 20 msec. Further, an image signal is output from the display circuit 94 to the symbol display device 41 based on the created drawing data. However, since the double buffer method is employed as described above, the output of the image signal is output to the output. This is performed in parallel with the creation of the drawing data corresponding to the update timing one frame later than the corresponding frame. The display circuit 94 has a selector circuit for alternately switching the frame areas 82a and 82b to be referred each time the output of the image signal for one frame is completed. Are regulated so that the frame areas 82a and 82b, which are the drawing targets of the drawing data, are not output targets for outputting image signals.

<Configuration for sharing the execution target table>
Next, a configuration for sharing the execution target table will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the symbols are varied and displayed in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 set in the symbol display device 41 at each game time (see FIG. 4A). The symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set in a plurality of rows such as an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers, and no numbers are attached between the main symbols. Sub-designs are arranged one by one. Then, when the game round is started, the symbols are scrolled in a predetermined direction in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 according to the symbol arrangement order from the display mode of the symbol finally stopped and displayed in the previous game round. A symbol change display is performed. After that, the variable display of the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is stopped. In this case, since the display mode of the symbol finally stopped and displayed in each game round may be different, the type of the symbol displayed in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 when the game round is started may be different. .

  An example of the symbol change display mode will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 22A shows an execution period of a game round, FIG. 22B shows an acceleration period in all symbol columns Z1 to Z3, FIG. 22C shows a high-speed period in all symbol columns Z1 to Z3, FIG. 22D shows a low-speed period of the upper symbol row Z1, FIG. 22E shows a low-speed period of the lower symbol row Z3, and FIG. 22F shows a low-speed period of the middle symbol row Z2.

  At the timing of t1, a game round is started as shown in FIG. At the timing of the t1, the moving image display is performed such that the variable display speed of the symbols gradually increases in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 as shown in FIG. The variable display speed in this case is a variable display speed at which the type of the symbol displayed in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 can be identified or easily identified. Since the acceleration period exists in this manner, it is possible to set the start mode when the symbol change display is started in each game round to be a fixed mode, and to notify the player that the game round has started. Is easy to recognize.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t2, the acceleration period ends as shown in FIG. 22B, and a high-speed period in which the variable display is performed at high speed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 as shown in FIG. 22C. . In the high-speed period, the symbol variable display speed in all symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is a variable display speed in which the type of the symbol cannot be identified or is difficult to identify. In the high-speed period, the type of the symbol displayed on the display surface P is adjusted. Thereby, in the configuration in which the stop result of the current game round is determined regardless of the type of the symbol displayed in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 at the start of the current game round, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 It is possible to adjust the type of the symbols displayed in the standby display and the stationary display in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 while preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3, the variable display speed of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 is switched from the high speed to the low speed as shown in FIG. When the low-speed display is performed, the symbol is displayed at a variable display speed at which the type of the symbol can be identified or easily identified. In this case, the low-speed display is performed only in the upper symbol row Z1, and the high-speed display is continued in the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t4, the low-speed period of the upper symbol row Z1 ends as shown in FIG. 22D, so that the scroll display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 ends and the standby display is started. Further, at the timing of the t4, as shown in FIG. 22 (e), the variable display speed of the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 is switched from the high speed to the low speed. In this case, low-speed display is performed only in the lower symbol row Z3, high-speed display is continued in the middle symbol row Z2, and standby display is continued in the upper symbol row Z1.

  Thereafter, as shown in a timing diagram (e) of timing t5, the low-speed period of the lower symbol row Z3 ends, so that the scroll display of the symbols ends in the lower symbol row Z3 and the standby display is started. Further, at the timing of the time t5, as shown in FIG. 22 (f), the variable display speed of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is switched from the high speed to the low speed. In this case, the low-speed display is performed only in the middle symbol row Z2, and the standby display is continued in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t6, the low-speed period of the middle symbol row Z2 ends as shown in FIG. 22 (f), so that the scroll display of the symbols ends in the middle symbol row Z2 and the standby display is started. In this case, the standby display is performed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and then the still display is performed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

  At the time of symbol variation display in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, an execution target table stored in advance in the memory module 74 is read, and the type of symbol to be displayed on the display surface P is determined by the display CPU 72 according to the execution target table. At the same time, various parameters such as the layout position of the symbol to be displayed are determined. Here, at the start of each game round, the type of symbols stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, and at the end of each game round, the type of symbols stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 are: It can be different for each game. For example, the variation display of the symbol may be started from the stop display mode as shown in FIG. 23A, or the variation display of the symbol may be started from the stop display mode as shown in FIG. There is also. Further, for example, the game round may end in a stop display mode as shown in FIG. 23 (a), or the game round may end in a stop display mode as shown in FIG. 23 (b). In this case, if the execution target table is prepared in advance in accordance with each pattern, it is necessary to prepare the execution target table corresponding to each of the possible forms of the stop display at the start of the variable display of the game times. In addition to this, it is necessary to prepare an execution target table corresponding to each of the possible display modes at the end of the game round. Then, the types of execution target tables are extremely increased, and the storage capacity required for storing the execution target tables in advance increases.

  On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, a common execution target table is used regardless of the stop display mode at the start of the fluctuation display of the game times, and the common execution target table is used regardless of the stop display mode at the end of the game times. It is configured to use the execution target table. The common execution target table will be described.

  The execution target table is provided corresponding to each of the acceleration period, the high speed period, and the low speed period. In this case, the execution target table is provided for the acceleration period so as to be common to all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. On the other hand, the high-speed period and the low-speed period are not provided in common between the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and an execution target table is provided corresponding to each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. It should be noted that the execution target table determines whether or not a reach effect is generated for the acceleration period of all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the high-speed period of all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the low-speed period of the upper symbol column Z1, and the low-speed period of the lower symbol column Z3. It is used regardless of the above, but is used only when the reach effect does not occur during the low-speed period of the middle symbol row Z2. When a reach effect occurs, a common execution target table is not used for the low-speed period of the middle symbol row Z2, but a dedicated execution target table corresponding to each reach effect is used.

  The execution target table is stored in the memory module 74 in advance. More specifically, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 24A, the memory module 74 includes an acceleration target in which an execution target table for controlling the variable display of the symbols in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 during the acceleration period is stored in advance. A period storage area 101, a first high-speed period storage area 102 in which an execution target table for controlling the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol sequence Z1 in the high-speed period is stored in advance, and an upper symbol sequence Z1 in the low-speed period. A first low-speed period storage area 103 in which an execution target table for controlling the symbol variation display is stored in advance, and an execution target table for controlling the symbol variation display of the middle symbol row Z2 in the high-speed period are stored in advance. The stored second high-speed period storage area 104 and an execution target table for controlling the variable display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 during the low-speed period are stored in advance. (2) a low-speed period storage area 105, a third high-speed period storage area 106 in which an execution target table for controlling the variable display of the symbols in the lower symbol sequence Z3 during the high-speed period is stored in advance, and a lower symbol sequence during the low-speed period. And a third low-speed period storage area 107 in which an execution target table for controlling the variable display of the symbol Z3 is stored in advance.

  The acceleration period, the high-speed period, and the low-speed period are not constant in relation to the fluctuation display time of the game times, and there are a plurality of types such that the length of each period exists. In this case, there is only one kind of acceleration period execution target table stored in the acceleration period storage area 101, and the acceleration period that can be controlled by the acceleration period execution target table is the variation display time of the game times. The period is longer than the longest acceleration period among a plurality of types of acceleration periods determined in relation to the above. This makes it possible to use the execution target table for one type of acceleration period, regardless of which type of acceleration period is selected in relation to the fluctuation display time of the game times.

  Each of the first high-speed period storage area 102, the second high-speed period storage area 104, and the third high-speed period storage area 106 stores only one type of high-speed period execution target table. The high-speed period that can be controlled by the first high-speed period execution target table stored in the first high-speed period storage area 102 includes a plurality of types of the upper symbol sequence Z1 determined in relation to the fluctuation display time of the game times. The period is longer than the longest high-speed period in the high-speed period. In addition, the high-speed period that can be controlled by the second high-speed period execution target table stored in the second high-speed period storage area 104 includes a plurality of middle symbol columns Z2 determined in relation to the fluctuation display time of the game times. The period is longer than the longest high-speed period among the types of high-speed periods. In addition, the high-speed period that can be controlled by the third high-speed period execution target table stored in the third high-speed period storage area 106 includes a plurality of lower symbol columns Z3 defined by the relationship with the fluctuation display time of the game times. The period is longer than the longest high-speed period among the types of high-speed periods. Accordingly, even if any type of high-speed period is selected in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in relation to the fluctuation display time of the game times, execution of one type of high-speed period for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is performed. The target table can be used.

  Each of the first low-speed period storage area 103, the second low-speed period storage area 105, and the third low-speed period storage area 107 stores a plurality of types of execution target tables for the low-speed period. That is, in the first low-speed period storage area 103, a plurality of types of execution target tables for the first low-speed period are stored in one-to-one correspondence with the types of the low-speed period in the upper symbol row Z1, and the second low-speed period is stored. A plurality of types of execution target tables for the second low-speed period are stored in the period storage area 105 so as to correspond one-to-one with the types of the low-speed period of the middle symbol row Z2. Stores a plurality of types of execution target tables for the third low-speed period so as to correspond one-to-one with the types of low-speed periods in the lower symbol row Z3. Since the execution target table for the low-speed period is prepared for each type of the low-speed period in this manner, it is possible to respond to each low-speed period by controlling the variable display of the symbol using the execution target table for the low-speed period. It is possible to execute the standby display of the symbol and the stationary display of the symbol at the same timing.

  FIG. 25A is an explanatory diagram for explaining an acceleration period execution target table T10 stored in advance in the acceleration period storage area 101, and FIG. 25B is a first high speed period storage area 102. FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first high-speed period execution target table T11 stored in advance in the first low-speed period storage area 103. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for describing a target table T12. Note that the execution target table for the second high-speed period and the execution target table for the third high-speed period have the maximum value of the pointer information different from that of the execution target table T11 for the first high-speed period. This is the same as the execution target table T11 for the high-speed period. Further, an execution target table of a type different from the first low speed period execution target table T12 stored in the first low speed period storage area 103, an execution target table for the second low speed period, and a third low speed period execution target table. The execution target table is the same as the execution target table T12 for the first low-speed period, although the maximum value of the pointer information is different from the execution target table T12 for the first low-speed period.

  As shown in FIGS. 25A, 25B, and 26, pointer information corresponding to the update timing of one frame of image is set in each of the execution target tables T10 to T12. A display symbol adjustment area and task content information are set in correspondence with the information.

  Information for specifying the type of the symbol to be displayed is set in the display symbol adjustment area. Specifically, information corresponding to one symbol in the corresponding symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is set in the display symbol adjustment area. Here, three symbols are simultaneously displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the information set in the display symbol adjustment area is the type of the symbol present at the top in the symbol moving direction. Corresponding to the information. Also, as already described, the total number of symbols arranged in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is different, and specifically, the upper symbol column Z1 and the lower symbol column Z3 have a total of 18 symbols including the main symbol and the sub symbol. While the symbols are arranged, the middle symbol row Z2 is arranged with 20 symbols including the main symbol and the sub symbol. Therefore, when the execution target table is used to control the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the display symbol adjustment area corresponds to any one of “1” to “18”. When information to be executed is set and the execution target table is used to control the variable display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2, the display symbol adjustment area corresponds to any one of “1” to “20”. Information is set.

  For example, when “1” is set in the display symbol adjustment area corresponding to the predetermined pointer information in the execution target table for controlling the variable display of the symbol in the upper symbol row Z1, the predetermined pointer information is set. , The main symbol “1”, the sub-design between “1” and “9”, and the main symbol “9” are displayed. When “2” is set in the display symbol adjustment area, the sub-design between “1” and “9” and the main design of “9” in the frame corresponding to the predetermined pointer information , And sub-designs between “9” and “8” are to be displayed.

  In the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols are scroll-displayed as described above, but the types of symbols to be scroll-displayed are the same over a plurality of frames. Therefore, the same symbol information is set in the display symbol adjustment area over a plurality of pieces of continuous pointer information. By changing the information set in the display symbol adjustment area as the pointer information value increases, the type of the symbol to be displayed in the corresponding symbol row Z1 to Z3 is changed.

  The information on the contents of the task includes the coordinate information indicating the layout position of the symbol to be used in each frame (that is, the drawing position in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be written in the frame buffer 82) and the size of the symbol to be used. Is set, such as scale information indicating the parameter. In this case, in the coordinate information, information for determining the arrangement positions of the three symbols to be displayed in the corresponding frame is set. Therefore, it is possible to specify the coordinate information corresponding to each of the three symbols to be displayed specified from the information on the display symbol adjustment area from the information on the contents of the task. For example, if “1” is set in the display symbol adjustment area of a plurality of continuous pointer information in the execution target table applied to the upper symbol column Z1, information on the contents of the task corresponding to the plurality of pointer information In the corresponding symbol row, the arrangement positions of the main symbol “1”, the sub symbol between “1” and “9”, and the main symbol “9” gradually change in the scroll display direction. Such coordinate information is set.

  In the configuration in which a plurality of symbols corresponding to the information set in the display symbol adjustment area as described above are to be displayed, and the parameter information of the plurality of symbols is set in the information of the task content, the display symbol adjustment area Is an area that can be rewritten under the control of the display CPU 72 after the execution target table is read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73. This rewriting is performed according to the type of the symbol to be displayed in the corresponding symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 at the timing when the use of the corresponding execution target table is started. Further, by performing the scroll display of the symbols, the types of the three symbols to be displayed in the corresponding symbol columns Z1 to Z3 change over time. The switching timing of the three types of symbols to be displayed is predetermined in each of the execution target tables T10 to T12. Therefore, when rewriting the display symbol adjustment area, the pointer information corresponding to the next switching timing from the first pointer information is included in one pointer group, and is included between one switching timing and the next switching timing. When the pointer information is one pointer group, the same symbol information is set in the display symbol adjustment area corresponding to each pointer information included in one pointer group, and different symbol information is set between different pointer groups. Information is set.

  The information for specifying the type of the symbol to be displayed is set in the display symbol adjustment area in each of the execution target tables T10 to T12 as described above. As shown in FIG. 24B, the work RAM 73 is provided with a first adjustment counter 111, a second adjustment counter 112, and a third adjustment counter 113 as areas to be specified. I have. The first adjustment counter 111 corresponds to the upper symbol row Z1, the second adjustment counter 112 corresponds to the middle symbol row Z2, and the third adjustment counter 113 corresponds to the lower symbol row Z3. .

  In each of the adjustment counters 111 to 113, information on the type of the symbol present at the head when the symbol moves from right to left in the corresponding symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is set. The display CPU 72 changes the values of the adjustment counters 111 to 113 corresponding to the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 each time the symbol existing at the head of each symbol array Z1 to Z3 is changed to the next symbol. Update to the information of the later symbol type. Thus, the information set in each of the adjustment counters 111 to 113 always corresponds to the type of the symbol present at the head of the corresponding symbol row Z1 to Z3. The display CPU 72 displays information corresponding to the symbol type information set in the adjustment counters 111 to 113 in the predetermined execution target table when starting the control of the variable display of the symbol by the predetermined execution target table. Set in the symbol adjustment area.

  When starting the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1, if the first symbol in the upper symbol row Z1 is the main symbol of “3” as shown in FIG. 23A, the value of the first adjustment counter 111 is set. Becomes “5”. Here, the relationship between the value set in each of the adjustment counters 111 to 113 and the type of the first symbol will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. As described above, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 have a total of 18 symbols including the main symbol and the sub symbol, while the middle symbol row Z2 has the main symbol and the sub symbol. Since a total of 20 symbols are arranged, the number of types of values that can be taken by the corresponding adjustment counters 111 to 113 differs.

  In the case of the first adjustment counter 111 and the third adjustment counter 113, as shown in FIG. 27A, values of “1” to “18” can be taken, and each value is an upper symbol column Z1 and a lower symbol. One to one corresponds to a total of 18 symbols in each of the columns Z3. In this case, the odd number corresponds to the main symbol, and the even number corresponds to the sub symbol. In the upper symbol row Z1, the main symbols are arranged in descending order with respect to the scroll direction from right to left, while in the lower symbol row Z3, the main symbols are arranged in the scroll direction from right to left. Although the values are arranged in ascending order, the relationship between the value that can be taken by the first adjustment counter 111 and the third adjustment counter 113 and the type of the first symbol is determined by the first adjustment counter 111 and the third adjustment counter 113. And are the same.

  In the case of the second adjustment counter 112, as shown in FIG. 27 (b), it is possible to take a value of "1" to "20", and each value corresponds to a total of 20 symbols in the middle symbol row Z2. 1 corresponds. In this case, the relationship between the value of “1” to “18” and the type of the first symbol is the same as in the case of the first adjustment counter 111 and the third adjustment counter 113. The value of “19” corresponds to the main symbol of “4” additionally arranged between the main symbol of “9” and the main symbol of “1”, and the value of “20” corresponds to the It corresponds to the sub-design between the main design of "4" and the main design of "1".

  The setting mode of the information on the adjustment area of the display symbol will be described by taking as an example a case where the mode of the variable display of the symbol during the acceleration period, the high speed period and the low speed period in the upper symbol row Z1 is set. FIG. 28A is an explanatory diagram for describing an execution target table T10 for an acceleration period, and FIG. 28B is an explanatory diagram for describing an execution target table T11 for a first high-speed period. FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution target table T12 for the first low-speed period. In addition, the setting mode of the information for the adjustment area of the display symbol of the execution target table corresponding to each of the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 is as follows. The symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 are different in that the arrangement of the symbols is in ascending order, but the other points are different from the setting mode of the information for the adjustment area of the display symbol of the execution target table corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1. Are the same.

  When the effect for the game round is started in the state shown in FIG. 23A, the value of the first adjustment counter 111 is “5”. In the upper symbol row Z1, the symbols are arranged such that the main symbols are descending in the scroll direction from right to left. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 28A, the display symbol adjustment area in the acceleration period execution target table T10 read from the acceleration period storage area 101 and corresponding to the upper symbol column Z1 is provided as shown in FIG. For the first pointer group, “5” corresponding to the current leading symbol is set, and in this case, the symbol to be controlled is a main symbol of “3” and a symbol between “3” and “2”. And the main symbol of “2”. For the next-order pointer group, “4” corresponding to the next-order symbol is set for the current first symbol, and for the next-order pointer group, the next-order symbol group is set. The symbol “3” corresponding to the symbol in the next order is set for the symbol of “2”, and “2” corresponding to the symbol in the next order for the symbol in the next order is set for the pointer group in the next order. Is set. That is, the numerical value is set to the adjustment area of the display symbol in such a manner that the numbers are arranged in descending order toward the rear pointer group.

  When the control of the acceleration period of the upper symbol row Z1 by the acceleration period execution target table T10 in which the adjustment area of the display symbol is set as described above is completed, the value of the first adjustment counter 111 becomes “1”. ing. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 28 (b), in the adjustment area of the display symbol in the execution table T11 for the first high-speed period read out from the storage area 102 for the first high-speed period, as shown in FIG. In this case, “1” corresponding to the current first symbol is set, and “18” corresponding to the next symbol in the current first symbol is set for the next pointer group. . In other words, in the upper symbol row Z1, 18 symbols are circulated while scrolling from right to left, so that the pointer group in which “1” is set in the display symbol adjustment area is in the following order. “18” is set in the display symbol adjustment area of the existing pointer group. For the subsequent pointer groups, values are set in the adjustment area of the display symbol so that the pointer numbers are consecutive and in descending numerical order.

  Here, as described above, the high-speed period which can be controlled by the execution target table T11 for the first high-speed period is the longest of a plurality of types of high-speed periods of the upper symbol row Z1 determined in relation to the fluctuation display time of the game times. The period is longer than the high-speed period. In this case, when the timing for using the execution target table T11 for the first high-speed period comes, regardless of the current high-speed period, all of the adjustment areas of the display symbols in the execution target table T11 for the first high-speed period are used. , The control by the execution target table T11 for the first high-speed period ends when the control by the pointer group corresponding to the end timing of the current high-speed period ends, and the first low-speed period Is switched to the control by the execution target table T12. In this case, when the control corresponding to the last pointer information in the pointer group corresponding to the end timing of the current high-speed period is completed, the control by the execution target table T11 for the first high-speed period ends.

  The same applies to the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period. That is, as described above, the acceleration period which can be controlled by the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period is the longest of the plurality of types of the acceleration periods of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 determined in relation to the variation display time of the game times. The period is longer than the acceleration period. In this case, when the timing of using the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period comes, the value is set for all the display symbol adjustment areas in the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period, regardless of the current acceleration period. However, when the control by the pointer group corresponding to the end timing of the current acceleration period is completed, the control by the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period ends, and the execution target table T11 for the first high speed period is completed. Is switched to the control by. In this case, when the control corresponding to the last pointer information in the pointer group corresponding to the end timing of the current acceleration period is completed, the control by the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period ends.

  In the case where the pointer group in which the display symbol adjustment area is set to “17” in FIG. 28B corresponds to the end timing of the current high-speed period, the value of the first adjustment counter 111 is set to “16”. Has become. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 29, in the adjustment area of the display symbol in the execution table T12 for the first low-speed period read from the storage area 103 for the first low-speed period, as shown in FIG. Is set to "16" corresponding to the first symbol of the symbol, and the values of the subsequent symbol groups are set in the display symbol adjustment area so as to be consecutive and in descending numerical order.

  As described above, the values of the adjustment areas of the display symbols in the execution target tables T10 to T12 are set using the values of the adjustment counters 111 to 113. Accordingly, even when the execution target tables T10 to T12 are configured to be used for a plurality of types of situations, the variable display of the symbols is controlled in a manner corresponding to the types of symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. It is possible to do.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for controlling the variable display of symbols while also using the execution target table will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a command corresponding process executed by the display CPU 72. The command corresponding process is executed in step S603 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18).

  If the command for starting the fluctuation has been received from the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 (step S901: YES), the execution period table for the acceleration period is read from the acceleration period storage area 101 to the work RAM 73 (step S902). In this case, the execution target tables for the acceleration period are read in association with the upper symbol column Z1, the middle symbol column Z2, and the lower symbol column Z3, respectively. Is read. However, the three execution target tables for the acceleration period are all the same type of table.

  After that, the high-speed period execution target tables are read out from the high-speed period storage areas 102, 104, and 106 into the work RAM 73 for each of the upper symbol line Z1, the middle symbol line Z2, and the lower symbol line Z3 (step S903). Specifically, the first high-speed period execution target table corresponding to the upper symbol sequence Z1 is read from the first high-speed period storage area 102, and the first high-speed period execution area table corresponding to the middle symbol sequence Z2 is read from the second high-speed period storage area 104. The execution target table for the second high-speed period is read, and the execution target table for the third high-speed period corresponding to the lower symbol row Z3 is read from the third high-speed period storage area 106.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a reach effect occurs in the current game time from the information on the fluctuation display time in the current game time included in the fluctuation start command (step S904). When the reach effect does not occur (step S904: NO), the execution target table for the low-speed period corresponding to the fluctuation display time of the current game time is set for each of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3. Data is read from the low-speed period storage areas 103, 105, and 107 to the work RAM 73 (step S905). As described above, a plurality of types of low-speed periods are set in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and the low-speed periods correspond to the variable display times of the game times. Therefore, in step S905, the execution target table for the low-speed period corresponding to the fluctuation display time of the current game time is read. Specifically, an execution target table for the first low-speed period corresponding to the current variable display time (ie, the low-speed period of the current upper symbol row Z1) is read from the first low-speed period storage area 103, and the second low-speed period The execution target table for the second low-speed period corresponding to the current fluctuation display time (that is, the low-speed period of the current middle symbol row Z2) is read from the storage area 105 for the current time, and the current fluctuation display is performed from the storage area 107 for the third low-speed period. The execution target table for the third low-speed period corresponding to the time (that is, the low-speed period of the current lower symbol row Z3) is read.

  When the reach effect occurs (step S904: YES), the first low-speed period storage unit stores the low-speed period execution target table corresponding to the current game time fluctuation display time for each of the upper symbol column Z1 and the lower symbol column Z3. Data is read from the area 103 and the third low-speed period storage area 107 to the work RAM 73 (step S906). Specifically, the first low speed period execution target table corresponding to the current variable display time (ie, the current low speed period of the upper symbol row Z1) is read from the first low speed period storage area 103, and the third low speed period The execution target table for the third low-speed period corresponding to the current variable display time (that is, the low-speed period of the current lower symbol row Z3) is read from the storage area 107 for the current time. After that, a dedicated execution target table corresponding to the current reach effect is read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 (step S907).

  When the processing of step S905 or step S907 is executed, the information corresponding to the values of the adjustment counters 111 to 113 is displayed in the adjustment area of the display symbol in the execution target table for each acceleration period read in step S902. A setting process is executed (step S908). In the setting process, the execution target table for the acceleration period read for controlling the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 is set to the first adjustment area of the display symbol corresponding to the first pointer group. The value of the adjustment counter 111 is set, and for the subsequent pointer groups, the value is set in the adjustment area of the display symbol so that the pointer group has a serial number and the numbers are in descending order. Also, regarding the execution target table for the acceleration period read for controlling the variable display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2, the second adjustment counter is provided for the adjustment area of the display symbol corresponding to the first pointer group. A value of 112 is set, and for the subsequent pointer groups, a value is set in the adjustment area of the display symbol so that the pointer group has a serial number and an ascending numerical order. In addition, as for the execution target table for the acceleration period read for controlling the variable display of the symbol in the lower symbol row Z3, the third adjustment counter is provided for the adjustment area of the display symbol corresponding to the first pointer group. The value of 113 is set, and for the subsequent pointer groups, the value is set in the adjustment area of the display symbol so that the pointer groups are serially numbered and in ascending numerical order.

  If a negative determination is made in step S901, or if the process of step S908 is performed, other processes are performed (step S909). In other processes, when a command different from the command for starting variation is received, a process corresponding to the received command is executed.

  Next, the normal fluctuation calculation processing executed by the display CPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The normal fluctuation calculation process is executed by the symbol calculation process of step S705 in the task process (FIG. 19) in a situation where the effect for the game round is being executed and the reach effect is not being executed. .

  First, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the first adjustment counter 111 (step S1001). The update timing of the first adjustment counter 111 is defined as the pointer information currently being referred to in the execution target table used for the upper symbol column Z1 is the pointer information of the last order in one pointer group. If it is. If it is the update timing of the first adjustment counter 111 (step S1001: YES), the value of the first adjustment counter 111 is decremented by 1 (step S1002). If the value of the first adjustment counter 111 after the subtraction by 1 is “0” (step S1003: YES), the maximum value “18” is set in the first adjustment counter 111 (step S1003). S1004).

  In step S1005, it is determined whether it is the update timing of the second adjustment counter 112 or the third adjustment counter 113. The update timing of the second adjustment counter 112 is defined as that the pointer information currently being referred to in the execution target table used for the middle symbol row Z2 is the pointer information of the last order in one pointer group. If it is. The update timing of the third adjustment counter 113 means that the pointer information currently referred to in the execution target table used for the lower symbol row Z3 is the pointer information of the last order in one pointer group. If it is.

  If it is the update timing of the second adjustment counter 112 or the third adjustment counter 113 (step S1005: YES), the value of the adjustment counters 112 and 113 to be updated this time is incremented by 1 (step S1006). In this case, in some cases, only one of the second adjustment counter 112 and the third adjustment counter 113 is to be updated, and both the second adjustment counter 112 and the third adjustment counter 113 are to be updated. In some cases. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the values of the update counters 112 and 113 to be updated after the addition of 1 have exceeded the maximum value (step S1007). In this case, the maximum value of the second adjustment counter 112 is “20”, and the maximum value of the third adjustment counter 113 is “18”. When the values of the adjustment counters 112 and 113 to be updated exceed the maximum value, the values of the adjustment counters 112 and 113 whose maximum values have been exceeded are set to the minimum value “1” (step S1008).

  In step S1009, it is determined whether or not there is a switching timing table among the execution target tables to be used in each of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3. . If the switching timing is the acceleration period, the current pointer information in the execution target table for the acceleration period is the last pointer of the pointer group corresponding to the end timing of the acceleration period corresponding to the fluctuation display time of the current game. This is the case when it is information. Since the acceleration period is constant in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the switching timing from the acceleration period execution target table to the high speed period execution target table occurs simultaneously in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. If the switching timing is a high-speed period, the current pointer information in the execution target table for the high-speed period is the end timing of the high-speed period corresponding to the current game time variable display time in the corresponding symbol columns Z1 to Z3. Corresponds to the last pointer information of the pointer group corresponding to. Since the high-speed period differs in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the switching timing from the high-speed period execution target table to the low-speed period execution target table is individually generated in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

  If it is the switching timing of the execution target table for any of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3 (step S1009: YES), the process of changing the execution target table to be used is executed (step S1010). ). In this case, the execution target table to be used is changed for all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 corresponding to the switching timing. In the change process, if the execution target table for the acceleration period is to be used, the execution target for the high-speed period that has already been read into the work RAM 73 in step S903 in the command corresponding process (FIG. 30). When the use target is changed to the table and the execution target table for the high-speed period is to be used, the table has already been read into the work RAM 73 in steps S905 to S907 in the command corresponding process (FIG. 30). Change the usage target in the execution target table.

  Thereafter, a setting process based on the values of the adjustment counters 111 to 113 corresponding to the execution target table is executed for the adjustment area of the display symbol in the execution target table newly determined as the use target. The contents of the setting process are the same as those described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. As a result, the content of the execution target table newly determined to be used is changed to a mode corresponding to the display content of the current symbol.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1009, or if the process in step S1011 is performed, a pointer update process is performed (step S1012). In the pointer update process, for each of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3, the pointer information to be referred to in the execution target table to be used is updated to the next pointer information. I do. However, the update process of the pointer information is not executed for the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in which the execution target tables to be used have been changed in the current processing cycle of the normal fluctuation calculation process.

  After that, the type of image data corresponding to the symbol to be displayed is grasped for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (step S1013). In grasping this, in the execution target table used in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the symbol columns Z1 to Z1 corresponding to the execution target table are determined from the values of the display symbol adjustment areas corresponding to the current pointer information. The type of the first symbol in Z3 is grasped, and the types of the following two types of symbols are grasped. In addition, the type of the symbol is grasped for all symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

  After that, various parameter information of all the symbols to be displayed this time is grasped from the contents of the task corresponding to the current pointer information in the execution target table used in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The parameter information includes the coordinates of the three symbols in the upper symbol row Z1, the coordinates of the three symbols in the middle symbol row Z2, and the coordinates of the three symbols in the lower symbol row Z3.

  When the calculation processing for normal fluctuation is performed as described above, the pattern grasped in step S1013 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605). . In the drawing list, parameter information to be applied to the symbols is set.

  As described above, the execution target table for controlling the variable display of symbols is shared in various situations, and therefore, the number of execution target tables stored in the memory module 74 in advance can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for storing the execution target table in the memory module 74 in advance. In addition, even if the execution target table is shared, the type of the symbol to be displayed is adjusted using the adjustment counters 111 to 113, so that the variable display of the symbol can be appropriately controlled. It becomes possible.

  There is only one type of execution target table for the acceleration period, and the acceleration period that can be controlled by the execution target table for the acceleration period is the longest of a plurality of types of acceleration periods determined in relation to the fluctuation display time of the game times. The period is longer than the acceleration period. Regardless of the type of acceleration period, the execution target table for the acceleration period is used, and the range of pointer information referred to in the execution target table is changed in relation to the type of the acceleration period to be executed. Is done. As a result, the number of execution target tables for the acceleration period can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for storing the execution target tables in the memory module 74 in advance can be reduced. In particular, one type of execution target table for the acceleration period is commonly used for all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. From this point as well, it is possible to reduce the number of execution target tables for the acceleration period.

  There is only one type of execution target table for the high-speed period prepared for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and the high-speed period controllable by the execution target table for each high-speed period corresponds to the corresponding symbol column Z1 to Z3. Z3 is a period longer than the longest high-speed period among a plurality of types of high-speed periods determined in relation to the fluctuation display time of the game times. Regarding one symbol row Z1 to Z3, the execution target table for one type of high-speed period is used regardless of the type of high-speed period, and the execution target table is related to the type of the high-speed period to be executed. The range of pointer information referred to in the table is changed. As a result, the number of execution target tables for the high-speed period can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for storing the execution target tables in the memory module 74 in advance can be reduced.

  Even in the configuration in which the number of execution target tables for the acceleration period and the number of execution target tables for the high-speed period are reduced as described above, the switching of the execution target table is performed in the last order in the pointer group to be referred to. At the timing when the control based on the pointer information is completed. Accordingly, in the execution target table newly used, control can be started from the first-order pointer information in one pointer group, so that the execution target table can be appropriately switched.

  In each execution target table, a display symbol adjustment area is set in one-to-one correspondence with the task content in each pointer information. Then, by adjusting the information set in the adjustment area of the display symbol, the type of the symbol to which the content of each task is applied is changed. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the type of the symbol to which the information of the task content is applied at each update timing only by referring to each execution target table.

  In addition, when the use of the execution target table is started, symbol type information is set for each of the display symbol adjustment areas included in the execution target table. This eliminates the need to execute processing for changing the information of the adjustment area of the display symbol for the execution target table during the execution of the control using the execution target table. It is possible to simplify the processing configuration.

<Another form related to shared use of execution target table>
-It is good also as a structure which does not provide the adjustment area of the display symbol in the execution target table. In this case, the execution target table is configured to have at least the information of the trigger for switching the value of the corresponding adjustment counters 111 to 113 and the information of the task, so that the type of the symbol to be displayed can be adjusted. It is possible to grasp from the counters 111 to 113. According to this configuration, it is not necessary to set the adjustment area of the display symbol in the execution target table, so that the data capacity of the execution target table can be suppressed.

  When all types of individual images are to be controlled in the control period using one execution target table, the type of individual image to be applied to the execution target table is always constant, The order of the individual images to be applied may be different for each game. Therefore, in this case, although the type of the individual image to be applied to the execution target table is not adjusted, the order of the individual images to be applied to the execution target table is adjusted.

  The configuration in which the execution target table is also used as described above may be applied to a configuration in which the specific variable display is performed using only one type of individual image among a plurality of types of individual images. In this case, in the execution target table, information for determining the operation content of the individual image to be subjected to the specific variation display is set in time series, and the type of the individual image to which the information is applied is adjusted. The Rukoto.

  A configuration in which the execution target table for the acceleration period is provided for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 instead of the configuration in which the execution target table for the acceleration period is provided in common for all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. It may be. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the execution target table for the high-speed period is provided so as to be commonly used for all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

  Switching between the execution target table for the acceleration period and the execution target table for the high-speed period is not limited to the configuration in which the control is performed at the timing when the control based on the last-order pointer information in the pointer group to be referred to is completed. Alternatively, it may be a timing at which the control based on other pointer information is completed. However, the timing at which the switching occurs is preferably set as the timing at which the control by the pointer information in a predetermined order in the pointer group is completed, regardless of the acceleration period or the high-speed period.

<Structure for performing a loop display effect>
Next, a configuration for performing a loop display effect will be described.

  FIGS. 32A and 32B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the loop display effect. In the loop display effect, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), a loop display character G4 is displayed behind symbols G1 to G3 that enable notification of the content corresponding to the result of the determination of success or failure in MPU 62 of main controller 50. At the same time, a loop display background G5 is displayed behind the loop display character G4. In the loop display effect, the types of the symbols G1 to G3 are different types from those in the case of FIG. Is a different aspect. More specifically, three cubic base symbol images G6 to G8 are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, and numerical symbols G1 to G3 are displayed in front of the respective base symbol images G6 to G8. You. Then, at the time of symbol change display, the base symbol images G6 to G8 rotate in the vertical direction about a rotation axis extending in the horizontal direction so as to pass through the center of the base symbol images G6 to G8. The symbols G1 to G3 displayed on the front of the symbol images G6 to G8 are changed. The timing of changing between the symbol display mode shown in FIG. 4B and the symbol display mode shown in FIG. 32A is arbitrary. For example, there are a plurality of types of display modes and the first display mode. In the above, the display mode of the symbol shown in FIG. 4 (b) and the display mode of the symbol shown in FIG. 32 (a) in the second display mode may be adopted.

  In the loop display effect, the loop display character G4 is displayed so as to repeat a series of operations. Specifically, in a situation where the base symbol images G6 to G8 are not rotated and displayed, as shown in FIG. The loop display character G4 is displayed so as to perform the operation and repeat the stationary operation (the display content is also referred to as a stationary display). As the stationary operation, for example, an operation in which the loop display character G4 moves up and down with the arms folded can be considered. On the other hand, in a situation where the rotation display is performed in any of the base symbol images G6 to G8, as shown in FIG. A loop display character G4 is displayed so as to perform the moving operation over and repeat the moving operation (the display content is also referred to as a moving display). As the movement operation, for example, an operation in which the loop display character G4 is running in a predetermined direction can be considered.

  In the loop display effect, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), the background G5 for loop display does not cause scrolling of the background when the character G4 for loop display is performing a stationary operation, as shown in FIG. It is displayed so that the player can recognize that the background is being displayed. On the other hand, in a situation where the loop display character G4 is performing a moving operation, the loop display character G4 is displayed as if it is moving in a predetermined direction, as shown in FIG. Accordingly, the loop display background G5 is displayed as if the background image was scrolling in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction. In this case, the loop display background G5 is displayed so that a series of background images scroll over the background movement unit period, and the series of background images is repeatedly scrolled each time the background movement unit period elapses. Is displayed as follows.

  The flow of the loop display effect will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 33 (a) shows the execution period of the game times, and FIG. 33 (b) shows the flow of the periodic display of the loop display character G4 in the situation where the movement is being performed, and FIG. Shows the flow of the periodic display of the loop display character G4 in the situation where the stationary operation is being performed, and FIG. 33D shows the flow of the scroll display of the loop display background G5.

  As shown in FIG. 33 (a), at the timing of t1, the game times are started, so that the variable display of the symbols G1 to G3 is started. Further, at the timing of the time t1, as shown in FIGS. 33 (b) and 33 (c), the loop display character G4 starts the moving operation from the state where the stationary operation is being performed. As shown in FIG. 33 (d), the scroll display is started also in the loop display background G5.

  Thereafter, the movement during movement is repeated in the loop display character G4 and a scroll display of a series of background images is repeated in the loop display background G5 until a timing t6 when the current game round ends. More specifically, the loop display character G4 performs one execution of the moving operation in the moving unit period Tc1 at each of the timings t1 to t2, the timings t2 to t3, and the timings t3 to t4. Is performed. In this case, the next execution of the moving operation is started at the timing t2 at which one execution of the moving operation ends, and the next execution of the movement at the timing t3 at which the one execution of the moving operation ends. One execution is started, and the next execution of the moving operation is started at a timing t4 when the one execution of the moving operation ends. In addition, the display mode of the loop display character G4 at the start timing of each execution of the moving operation is the same, and the loop display character G4 at the timing when the same time has elapsed from the start timing of the execution of the moving operation. The display modes of G4 are the same.

  In the background G5 for loop display, one execution of scroll display of a series of background images is performed in the background movement unit period Tc2 from timing t1 to timing t5. In this case, the next one execution of the scroll display is started at the timing t5 when one execution of the scroll display of the series of background images ends. In addition, the display mode of the loop display background G5 at the start timing of each execution of the scroll display is the same, and the loop display background at the timing when the same time has elapsed from the start timing of the execution of the scroll display. The display modes of G5 are the same.

  In the above configuration, the moving unit period Tc1 is shorter than the background moving unit period Tc2. Therefore, even if one execution of the moving operation in the loop display character G4 and one execution of the scroll display of the series of background images in the loop display background G5 are started at the same time, the end timing of each execution is Will be different. Also, the number of times one execution of the moving operation is performed in one game may be different from the number of times one execution of scroll display of a series of background images is performed in one game.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t6, the timing of ending the game round is reached as shown in FIG. 33 (a), so that the loop display character G4 is moving as shown in FIGS. 33 (b) and 33 (c). The operation is switched from the operation state to the stationary operation state, and the loop display background G5 is stopped and displayed from the state in which a series of background images are scrolled as shown in FIG. Is switched to the state in which In this case, although the timing of t6 is a timing in the middle of one execution of the moving operation of the loop display character G4, the moving operation is ended at the midway timing and the stationary operation is started. Further, the timing of t6 is a timing in the middle of one execution in the scroll display of a series of background images in the loop display background G5. Be started.

  The stationary operation of the loop display character G4 is started at the timing of t6, and the stationary operation of the loop display character G4 is repeated until the timing of t10, at which the next game round is started. More specifically, the loop display character G4 performs one execution of the stationary operation in the stationary unit period Tc3 at each of the timings t6 to t7, the timings t7 to t8, and the timings t8 to t9. Is performed. In this case, the next execution of the stopped operation is started at a timing t7 when one execution of the stopped operation ends, and the next execution of the stopped operation is started at a timing t8 when the one execution of the stopped operation ends. One execution cycle is started, and the next execution cycle of the stopped operation is started at a timing t9 when the one execution cycle of the stopped operation ends. The display mode of the loop display character G4 at the start timing of each execution of the stationary operation is the same, and the loop display character G4 at the timing when the same time has elapsed from the start timing of the execution of the stationary operation. The display modes of G4 are the same. The stationary unit period Tc3 is shorter than the moving unit period Tc1. Therefore, when compared during the same execution period, the number of times of one execution of the stationary operation is greater than the number of times of one execution of the moving operation.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t10, a game round is newly started as shown in FIG. In this case, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), the timing of the time t10 is a timing when the loop display character G4 is in the middle of one execution of the stationary operation, but the loop display character G4 performs the stationary operation. The moving operation is started from the state where the moving is in progress. Then, the loop display character G4 repeatedly executes the moving operation as in the case of the timing from t1 to t6.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33D, when the previous game round ends at the timing of t6, the loop display background G5 is stopped and displayed with the content of the background image at that time, and the stopped display state is displayed. Are continued until the timing of t10. Therefore, at the timing of t10 when a new game round is started, the scroll display of the series of background images is restarted from the stopped display state. That is, the scroll display of the series of background images is temporarily stopped from the timing t6 to the timing t10, and the scroll display of the series of background images is continued at the timing t10 while the flow up to the timing t6 is taken over. It will be restarted.

  When the scroll display effect is performed as described above, the loop display character G4 and the loop display background G5 are both displayed behind the symbols G1 to G3, and during the execution of the game, the loop display character G4 and the loop are displayed. A series of displays over a predetermined period is repeated on both of the display backgrounds G5. However, while the game is not being executed, the stationary operation is repeated on the loop display character G4, whereas the loop display background is repeated. In G5, the scroll display of the series of background images is stopped and displayed. In this case, if a table for controlling the display of the loop display character G4 and the loop display background G5 is set as the same table, a table for a non-game time is prepared and a table for the non-game time is prepared. It becomes necessary to prepare several tables corresponding to all the timings at which the table can be stopped and displayed on the loop display background G5, or to fix the timing at which the table is stopped and displayed on the loop display background G5. If a table during a non-game time is prepared for several minutes corresponding to all the timings that can be stopped and displayed on the loop display background G5, the number of the tables increases and the storage capacity of the memory module 74 is reduced. If an attempt is made to fix the timing of the stop display on the display background G5, the display mode of the loop display background G5 during the non-game time is uniform regardless of the timing at which the game time ends.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a table for controlling the display of the loop display character G4 and a table for controlling the display of the loop display background G5 are separately prepared. Hereinafter, the contents of data stored in advance in the memory module 74 for executing the loop display effect will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 34A, a loop display image data group 121 is stored in advance in the memory module 74 as data for performing a loop display effect. The image data group 121 for loop display includes image data for displaying the base symbol images G6 to G8, image data for displaying the symbols G1 to G3 in the base symbol images G6 to G8, and a character G4 for loop display. Image data for displaying and image data for displaying the loop display background G5 are included. In this case, the image data for displaying the loop display character G4 includes a plurality of types of image data used when performing the stationary operation and a plurality of types of image data used when performing the moving operation. Data and is included. There are also a plurality of types of image data for displaying the loop display background G5.

  In addition to the image data group 121 for loop display, the memory module 74 stores in advance a character stationary table 122, a character moving table 123, and a background table 124. The character stationary table 122 is a table referred to for causing the loop display character G4 to repeatedly perform the stationary operation. The character movement table 123 is a table that is referred to for causing the loop display character G4 to repeatedly perform the moving operation. The background table 124 is a table referred to scroll a series of background images in a situation where the moving operation is being performed by the loop display character G4.

  FIG. 35 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the character stationary table 122, FIG. 35 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the character moving table 123, and FIG. 35 (c) is for the background. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for describing a table 124. As shown in FIGS. 35 (a) to 35 (c), in each of the tables 122 to 124, pointer information corresponding to the update timing of one frame of image is set. Task content information is set. In the information on the contents of the task, information for specifying the type of image data to be displayed in each corresponding frame is set, and the arrangement position of the image data set as the display target (that is, the frame buffer) Parameter information such as coordinate information indicating the writing target frame areas 82a and 82b at 82) and scale information indicating the size of image data set as the display target are set.

  More specifically, in the character stationary table 122, pointer information (“0” to “99”) for the number of frames corresponding to the stationary unit period Tc3 is set. The contents of the task corresponding to each piece of pointer information include image data of the loop display character G4 for causing the loop display character G4 to perform display at one timing of the stationary operation in the frame corresponding to the pointer information. Type and parameter information to be applied to the image data are set. When the drawing timing of the image for one frame is reached, the next pointer information becomes the current reference target with respect to the pointer information referred to at the previous drawing timing, and loops according to the contents of the task corresponding to the pointer information. By performing the display control of the display character G4, the stationary operation is performed on the loop display character G4. When the display control corresponding to the last pointer information of the character stationary table 122 is completed during the period in which the loop display character G4 performs the stationary operation, the pointer information to be referred to is the first pointer information of the character stationary table 122. To the pointer information. This makes it possible to repeatedly execute the stationary operation using the character stationary table 122 in which display control data corresponding to one execution of the stationary operation is set.

  In the character movement table 123, pointer information (“0” to “199”) for the number of frames corresponding to the moving unit period Tc1 is set. The contents of the task corresponding to each pointer information include the image data of the loop display character G4 for performing the display at one timing of the moving operation with the loop display character G4 in the frame corresponding to the pointer information. Type and parameter information to be applied to the image data are set. When the drawing timing of the image for one frame is reached, the next pointer information becomes the current reference target with respect to the pointer information referred to at the previous drawing timing, and loops according to the contents of the task corresponding to the pointer information. By performing the display control of the display character G4, the moving operation is performed on the loop display character G4. Further, when the display control corresponding to the last pointer information of the character movement table 123 is completed during the period in which the loop display character G4 performs the moving operation, the pointer information to be referred to becomes the first pointer information of the character movement table 123. Will be returned to the pointer information. This makes it possible to repeatedly execute the moving operation using the character moving table 123 in which the display control data corresponding to one execution of the moving operation is set.

  In the background table 124, pointer information (“0” to “599”) for the number of frames corresponding to the background movement unit period Tc2 is set. The content of the task corresponding to each pointer information includes the type of image data of the loop display background G5 for performing display at one timing of scroll display on the loop display background G5 in a frame corresponding to the pointer information. And parameter information to be applied to the image data. When the drawing timing of the image for one frame is reached, the next pointer information becomes the current reference target with respect to the pointer information referred to at the previous drawing timing, and loops according to the contents of the task corresponding to the pointer information. By performing the display control of the display background G5, a scroll display of a series of background images is performed in the loop display background G5. Further, when the display control corresponding to the last pointer information of the background table 124 is completed during the period in which the scroll display is performed on the loop display background G5, the pointer information to be referred to becomes the first pointer of the background table 124. You will return to the information. This makes it possible to repeatedly execute scroll display using the background table 124 in which display control data corresponding to one execution of scroll display is set.

  In a configuration in which tables 122 and 123 for controlling the display of the loop display character G4 and a table 124 for controlling the display of the loop display background G5 are separately provided, the stationary operation of the loop display character G4 is performed. In order to synchronize the start with the stop of the scroll display of the loop display background G5, and to synchronize the start of the moving operation of the loop display character G4 with the start of the scroll display of the loop display background G5, FIG. As shown in (), the work RAM 73 is provided with an interlocking flag 125. A state in which “1” is set in the linkage flag 125 corresponds to a situation where the moving operation is being performed in the loop display character G4, and a state in which “1” is set in the linkage flag 125. Is to perform scroll display of the loop display background G5. On the other hand, the state in which the interlocking flag is “0” corresponds to the state where the stationary operation is being performed in the loop display character G4, and the state in which the interlocking flag 125 is “0” indicates the loop display. The scroll display of the background G5 is stopped.

  As described above, since the tables 122 and 123 for controlling the display of the loop display character G4 and the table 124 for controlling the display of the loop display background G5 are separately prepared, the game round ends. When the timing comes, the updating of the pointer information in the background table 124 is stopped so that the loop display background G5 is stopped and displayed. By performing the display control described above, it is possible to cause the loop display character G4 to perform the stationary display. Therefore, the scroll display of the loop display background G5 can be ended at an arbitrary timing and the stop display can be started in accordance with the timing at which the game round ends. Moreover, since it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of types of tables during non-game times corresponding to the arbitrary timing, the number of tables for controlling the loop display effect is reduced, and the tables are stored in advance. Can be reduced in storage capacity.

  Note that there are four or more types of timings at which the scroll display of the loop display background G5 is stopped in relation to the timing at which the game round ends.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the loop display effect will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for a character loop executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation process for the character loop is performed in the calculation process for effect of step S704 in the task process (FIG. 19) in a situation where a loop display effect is to be executed.

  When it is determined that the timing of starting the game is based on the currently read execution target table (step S1101: YES), the character movement table 123 is read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 and set as the table to be used. (Step S1102). Thereafter, "1" is set to the link flag 125 of the work RAM 73 (step S1103), and the pointer information to be referred to in the character movement table 123 is cleared to "0" (step S1104). In this case, in step S1112, the image data of the loop display character G4 set in the content of the task corresponding to the first pointer information of the character movement table 123 is grasped as the image data to be used this time. In step S1113, parameter information to be applied to the image data to be used this time is derived using information set in the content of the task corresponding to the first pointer information in the character movement table 123. To understand.

  If it is determined that the timing of ending the game has been reached based on the currently read execution target table (step S1105: YES), the character stopping table 122 is read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 and set as the table to be used. (Step S1106). Thereafter, the link flag 125 of the work RAM 73 is cleared to "0" (step S1107), and the pointer information to be referred to in the character stationary table 122 is cleared to "0" (step S1108). In this case, in step S1112, the image data of the loop display character G4 set in the content of the task corresponding to the first pointer information of the character stationary table 122 is grasped as the image data to be used this time. In step S1113, parameter information to be applied to the image data to be used this time is derived and grasped using information set in the content of the task corresponding to the first pointer information in the character stationary table 122. I do.

  If this time is neither the start timing nor the end timing of the game round (step S1101 and step S1105: NO), the pointer information is updated for the table to be used among the character movement table 123 and the character stationary table 122 ( Step S1109). Specifically, an update process is performed so as to add 1 to the value of the pointer information. If the updated pointer information exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the table to be used (step S1110: YES), the pointer information is cleared to "0" to return to the initial value (step S1110). S1111). In this case, in step S1112, the image data of the loop display character G4 set in the content of the task corresponding to the current pointer information of the tables 122 and 123 to be used is set as the image data to be used this time. Figure out. Also, in step S1113, parameter information to be applied to the image data to be used this time by using the information set in the contents of the task corresponding to the current pointer information in the tables 122 and 123 to be used. Derive and understand.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for a background loop executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation processing for the background loop is performed in the calculation processing for the background in step S703 in the task processing (FIG. 19) in a situation where the loop display effect is to be executed.

  If “1” is set in the linkage flag 125 of the work RAM 73 (step S1201: YES), the pointer information to be referred to in the background table 124 is updated (step S1202). Specifically, an update process is performed so as to add 1 to the value of the pointer information. If the updated pointer information exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the background table 124 (step S1203: YES), the pointer information is cleared to "0" to return to the initial value (step S1204). Thereafter, the image data of the loop display background G5 set in the content of the task corresponding to the current pointer information in the background table 124 is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S1205). Also, using the information set in the content of the task corresponding to the current pointer information in the background table 124, the parameter information to be applied to the image data to be used this time is derived and grasped (step S1206). .

  If “1” is not set in the link flag (step S1201: NO), the image data of the loop display background G5 set in the task content corresponding to the current pointer information of the background table 124 is By grasping as the image data to be used, the image data of the loop display background G5 similar to the previous time is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S1207). Also, by grasping the parameter information set in the area for storing the parameter information applied to the image data in the work RAM 73 as it is as the parameter information applied to the image data to be used this time, the same as the previous time is obtained. The parameter information of the loop display background G5 is grasped as parameter information to be used this time (step S1208).

  When the arithmetic processing for the character loop and the arithmetic processing for the background loop have been performed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605) includes step S1112 and step S1205 or step S1205. The image data grasped in step S1207 is set as a drawing target. In the drawing list, parameter information applied to the image data is set.

  As described above, since the tables 122 and 123 for controlling the display of the loop display character G4 and the table 124 for controlling the display of the loop display background G5 are separately prepared, the game round ends. When the timing comes, the updating of the pointer information in the background table 124 is stopped so that the loop display background G5 is stopped and displayed. By performing the display control described above, it is possible to cause the loop display character G4 to perform the stationary display. Therefore, the scroll display of the loop display background G5 can be ended at an arbitrary timing and the stop display can be started in accordance with the timing at which the game round ends. Moreover, since it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of types of tables during non-game times corresponding to the arbitrary timing, the number of tables for controlling the loop display effect is reduced, and the tables are stored in advance. Can be reduced in storage capacity.

  Dedicated pointer information is set in the tables 122 and 123 for controlling the display of the loop display character G4, and dedicated pointer information is set in the table 124 for controlling the display of the loop display background G5. Thus, it is possible to continue updating the other pointer information or hold the other pointer information in predetermined information while keeping one of the tables 122, 123, and 124 unused. Become.

  As a table for controlling the display of the loop display character G4, a character stationary table 122 for causing the loop display character G4 to perform a stationary display, and a table for causing the loop display character G4 to perform a moving display. The character movement table 123 is provided separately. Thus, when switching the variable display mode of the loop display character G4, it is only necessary to switch the tables 122 and 123 to be used, and it is possible to suitably switch these variable display modes. Further, it is possible to set an arbitrary timing as the switching timing while suppressing the number of tables.

  The character display table 122 is repeatedly looped and used to cause the loop display character G4 to repeat the stationary display, and the character movement table 123 is repeatedly looped and used to move to the loop display character G4. Repeat the display. As a result, the data capacity of these tables 122 and 123 can be reduced.

  The scroll display of the loop display background G5 is repeated by repeatedly using the background table 124 in a loop. In this case, the number of image update timings required until the loop display background G5 makes one rotation is different from the number of image update timings required until the moving display of the loop display character G4 makes one rotation. In this configuration, a character movement table 123 for causing the loop display character G4 to perform a moving display and a background table 124 for performing a scroll display on the loop display background G5 are separately provided. Thus, it is possible to set only information corresponding to one round in each of the tables 123 and 124, and it is not necessary to set useless information exceeding one round.

  When the moving display is started in the loop display character G4 by using the character movement table 123, “1” is set in the interlocking flag 125, so that the loop display background G5 using the background table 124 is set. Is started, and when the moving display of the loop display character G4 is ended, the interlocking flag 125 is cleared to “0”, so that the scroll display of the loop display background G5 using the background table 124 is performed. Is terminated. As a result, in the execution target table for controlling the entire flow of the loop display effect, only the information of the start timing and the end timing of the moving display of the loop display character G4 need be set, and the loop display effect is not displayed. There is no need to set information on the start timing and end timing of the scroll display for the background G5. Therefore, it is possible to link the movement of the loop display character G4 and the loop display background G5 while suppressing the data amount set in advance in the data table.

<Another form of loop display effect>
-When the loop display character G4 is performing a stationary operation, the relative position of the building image with respect to the loop display character G4 in the loop display background G5 is not changed. The display mode such as the hue of the image and the presence / absence and display position of the cloud image in the sky may be changed. In this case, even if the scroll display is stopped in the loop display background G5, the display mode of the loop display background G5 is changed. Therefore, the display control of the loop display background G5 in this state is performed. Is preferably provided separately.

  The scroll display of the loop display background G5 may be continued regardless of whether the moving display is performed on the loop display character G4. Even in this case, by making the tables different for the loop display character G4 and the loop display background G5, it is possible to prepare a table corresponding to the operation of one round of each individual image G4, G5. Thus, there is no need to set useless information exceeding one round. This is the same even when the loop display character G4 continues the moving display and the loop display background G5 continues the scroll display.

  In a situation where the loop display character G4 continues to display during movement, the type of the loop display background G5 may be changed. Even in this configuration, by providing a table for controlling the loop display character G4 and a table for controlling the loop display background G5 separately, the switching of the loop display background G5 is performed when the loop display background G5 is switched. It is only necessary to switch the table for controlling the display background G5, and the table for controlling the loop display character G4 can be used as it is.

  -The link flag 125 is not provided, and in the execution target table for controlling the entire loop display effect, together with information on the switching timing between the stationary display and the moving display of the loop display character G4, The configuration may be such that information on the start timing and the stop timing of the scroll display in the loop display background G5 is set.

<Structure for performing a group display effect>
Next, a configuration for performing a group display effect will be described.

  FIGS. 38A and 38B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the group display effect. The group display effect is an effect in which many group display characters G11 are displayed as a group and move in the group display direction. The group display character G11 is displayed so that the player recognizes that a person having a face, a body, both hands, and both feet is represented. In addition, each group display character G11 is displayed so that the player recognizes it as the same or similar character although the operation contents such as limbs are different. The group display characters G11 are displayed as a group across the symbol display device 41 in one direction over a group display period (for example, 3 seconds). When comparing the case of FIG. 38 (a) and the case of FIG. 38 (b), the display position of the group display character G11 shown in FIG. 38 (a) is entirely left in FIG. 38 (b). It is shifted in the direction. In addition, each group display character G11 is displayed in a shape that is recognized by the player as moving in the direction in which the characters G11 move as a group.

  Note that the moving direction of the group display character G11 is not limited to the horizontal direction but may be a vertical direction. And the remaining group display character G11 may be displayed so as to move from the end opposite to the predetermined end of the symbol display device 41 toward the center.

  Group display moving image data 131 is used as image data for displaying the group display character G11 in the group display effect. The moving image data is image data that is compressed between frames so as to have a plurality of difference data based on one frame of still image data, and is coded by, for example, the MPEG2 method. When the moving image data is decoded, it is expanded into still image data for a plurality of frames.

  FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining moving image data 131 for group display. As shown in FIG. 39, in the moving image data 131 for group display, file data is set at the first address, and compressed data of each frame is set after that. The compressed data of each frame is accompanied by a frame header. The compressed data includes one frame of I picture data corresponding to the reference data, a plurality of frames of P picture data corresponding to the first difference data, and a plurality of frames of B picture data corresponding to the second difference data. And

  The I picture data is data that can be used to create one frame of still image data by itself when decoding. The P picture data is data that can generate one frame of still image data by performing forward prediction with reference to I picture data or P picture data one frame or a plurality of frames before in decoding. . B-picture data is decoded by performing bidirectional prediction with reference to I-picture data or P-picture data one frame or a plurality of frames earlier and I-picture data or P-picture data one frame or a plurality of frames later. Is data for which still image data for one frame can be created.

  In the compressed data of the moving image data 131 for group display, I picture data is set as data of the first frame. Also, B picture data is set as data of the second frame,..., M-1 frame. Also, P picture data is set as data of the m-th frame. Also, B picture data is set as data of the (m + 1) th frame,..., N−1th frame. Also, P picture data is set as the data of the n-th frame. Note that the arrangement pattern of the picture data is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary.

  By performing the decoding process on the group display moving image data 131, still image data for a plurality of update timings (hereinafter, also referred to as decoded image data) is created from the group display moving image data 131. The Rukoto. In this case, the period in which the group display moving image data 131 can use the decoded image data is longer than the image update period in the symbol display device 41 because of the relationship with the compression ratio of the image data.

  The relationship between the update cycle of the image and the cycle in which the still image data can be used will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 40 (a1) shows the update timing of the image in the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 40 (a2) shows the usable timing of the image data previously stored in the memory module 74 as still image data. The parentheses indicate the usable timing of the decoded image data based on the group display moving image data 131.

  The update cycle Td1 of the image in the symbol display device 41 is 20 msec as described above, and as shown in FIG. 40 (a1), the timing of t1, the timing of t2, the timing of t3, the timing of t4, and the timing of t5. , At the timing of t6 and at the timing of t7, the image on the symbol display device 41 is updated. Further, since the image data previously stored in the memory module 74 as the still image data can be used as it is, as shown in FIG. 40A2, at each of the timings t1 to t7, as shown in FIG. Can be used.

  On the other hand, the usable period Td2 of the decoded image data by the group display moving image data 131 is twice as long as the image update period Td1 in the symbol display device 41, as shown in FIG. Therefore, although the decoded image data can be used at the timing of t1, the timing of t3, the timing of t5, and the timing of t7, the new decoded image data is used at the timing of t2, the timing of t4, and the timing of t6. Can not be used.

  In this case, at each of the timing of t2, the timing of t4, and the timing of t6, the same decoded image data as the decoded image data used at the timing of t1, the timing of t3, and the timing of t5, which are the immediately preceding timings, respectively. It is also possible to use. However, simply trying to use the same decoded image data may cause image rattling, which makes it impossible to perform smooth moving image display. On the other hand, at the two consecutive update timings when the same decoded image data is used, the ranges to be drawn in the frame regions 82a and 82b to be drawn in the same decoded image data are made different. The occurrence of rattling of the image is reduced.

  FIGS. 40 (b) and 40 (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining how to make the ranges to be drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn different in the same decoded image data 132. FIG.

  When the drawing data is created in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn in the VDP 76, the data is written to all the unit areas of the frame areas 82a and 82b, but the resolution of each frame area 82a and 82b is 800 × 600. It is the number of dots. On the other hand, each decoded image data 132 obtained by executing the decoding process on the moving image data 131 for group display has a larger number of dots in the frame areas 82a and 82b at the initial magnification size after the decoding process. It is the number of pixels. The range that can be drawn by each of the decoded image data 132 at the initial magnification is larger than the frame areas 82a and 82b in both the horizontal dimension and the vertical dimension. Thereby, even if the same decoded image data 132 is configured to change the drawing range of the frame areas 82a and 82b in accordance with the moving direction of the group display character G11 at two consecutive update timings, the symbol display device 41 The group display character G11 can be displayed as a whole.

  The direction in which the group display characters G11 move as a group in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction in the range that can be rendered by the decoded image data 132 is not limited to this. The direction different from the direction in which the group display characters G11 move as a group in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is the same size or shorter size in the frame areas 82a and 82b. Some configuration may be used.

  At the preceding update timing of two consecutive update timings in which the same decoded image data 132 is used, the group display characters G11 move as a group in the decoded image data 132 as shown in FIG. The drawing range for the frame regions 82a and 82b is set to be closer to the end on the leading side in the direction in which the drawing is performed, that is, to the left end. On the other hand, at the rear update timing, as shown in FIG. 40 (c), the group display characters G11 in the decoded image data 132 are shifted to the original end in the direction in which the group display characters G11 move as a group, ie, the right end. Thus, the drawing range for the frame areas 82a and 82b is set. That is, at the update timing on the rear side with respect to the update timing on the front side, the drawing range of the decoded image data 132 in the frame areas 82a and 82b is opposite to the direction in which the group display characters G11 move as a group. Moving. As a result, the group display character G11 displayed at the predetermined position at the front update timing is displayed at a position shifted leftward from the predetermined position at the rear update timing. Therefore, even if the same decoded image data 132 is used at two consecutive update timings, the group display character G11 moves in a direction in which the group display characters G11 move as a group between the two update timings. Such a display can be performed. Note that, in the decoded image data 132, a range outside the drawing range for the frame areas 82a and 82b is excluded from the drawing target.

  Here, when the same decoded image data 132 is used at two consecutive update timings, the movement amount of the group display character G11 at the rear update timing with respect to the group display character G11 at the front update timing is predetermined. The amount of movement. On the other hand, in the decoded image data 132 corresponding to the next use timing with respect to the group display character G11 at the rear update timing, the movement amount of the group display character G11 in the front update timing is also the predetermined movement amount. It is the same.

  That is, the first decoded image data 132 at one use timing and the second decoded image data 132 at the next use timing are the two update timings displayed using the decoded image data 132 at one use timing. Between the movement amount of the group display character G11 and the update timing on the rear side displayed using the first decoded image data 132 and the update timing on the front side displayed using the second decoded image data 132 The moving amount of the group display character G11 is set to be the same at a predetermined moving amount. More specifically, in both the case where the first decoded image data 132 is used and the case where the second decoded image data 132 is used, when the comparison is performed at the display position of the predetermined group display character G11 to be displayed, From the display position of the predetermined group display character G11 at the front update timing when the first decoded image data 132 is used, the predetermined group display character at the front update timing when the second decoded image data 132 is used. The amount of movement to the display position of G11 is from the display position of the predetermined group display character G11 at the preceding update timing when the first decoded image data 132 is used, to the position after the first decoded image data 132 is used. Display position of the predetermined group display character G11 at the side update timing It is twice the amount of movement of up to. In addition, at least the group display characters G11 move as a group in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction in a range that can be drawn by the decoded image data 132 of the initial magnification so as to enable the setting of such a movement amount. The dimension in the direction (specifically, the dimension in the horizontal direction) is set to be at least larger than the dimension in the direction in the drawing range of the frame areas 82a and 82b by the predetermined moving amount. With such a configuration, the amount of movement of the group display character G11 between one update timing and the next update timing can be constant, and the movement of the group display character G11 can be performed smoothly. Becomes

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the group display effect will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for group display effect executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation processing for group display effect is performed in the calculation processing for effect of step S704 in the task processing (FIG. 19) in a situation where the group display effect is to be executed.

  If it is time to execute the decoding process on the group display moving image data 131 (step S1301: YES), the address of the group display moving image data 131 in the memory module 74 is grasped (step S1302) and the group is displayed. The address of the work RAM 73 for expanding the moving image data 131 for display as the decoded image data 132 is grasped (step S1303), and decode designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 72 (step S1304). Further, the value of the same use flag provided in the work RAM 73 is cleared to "0" (step S1305). The same use flag is a flag used by the display CPU 72 to specify whether or not to use the same decoded image data 132 as the previous update timing at one update timing, and the value of the same use flag is “0”. In some cases, the use of new decoded image data 132 is specified, and when the value of the same use flag is “1”, use of the same decoded image data 132 as the previous update timing is specified. .

  When the processing of steps S1302 to S1305 is performed, the information of the address of the moving image data 131 for group display is set in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605). At the same time, information on the address of the development destination of the moving image data 131 for group display is set, and decode designation information is further set. When receiving the drawing list, the moving picture decoder 93 of the VDP 76 executes the decoding process shown in the flowchart of FIG. More specifically, the address of the group display moving image data 131 is grasped from the information specified in the drawing list (step S1401), and the group display moving image data is determined from the information specified in the drawing list. The address of an area where the image 131 is expanded as the decoded image data 132 is grasped (step S1402). Then, the moving image data 131 for group display is read from the address of the memory module 74 grasped in step S1401, and the moving image data 131 for group display is decoded. Then, each decoded image data 132 resulting from the decoding is written to each area of the address grasped in step S1402 (step S1403).

  Returning to the description of the calculation processing for group display effect (FIG. 41), if a negative determination is made in step S1301 or if the processing in step S1305 is performed, whether the value of the same use flag in the work RAM 73 is “0”? It is determined whether or not it is (step S1306). If the value of the same use flag is “0” (step S1306: YES), it means that the update timing this time uses the new decoded image data 132 as the target. In this case, first, the address of the work RAM 73 where the decoded image data 132 corresponding to the current use order among the plurality of decoded image data 132 already decoded is grasped (step S1307).

  Then, the “A, A” coordinates are grasped as the coordinate information (step S1308). Here, the coordinate information is information for determining where the center pixel in the image data to be used is to be arranged with respect to the frame regions 82a and 82b to be drawn. When the coordinates are “A, B” coordinates, the setting position of the decoded image data 132 with respect to the frame regions 82 a and 82 b is the position shown in FIG. Is set. The value of A and the value of B are the same regardless of the type of decoded image data 132. Thereafter, after the parameter information other than the coordinate information is updated and grasped (step S1309), “1” is set to the same use flag in the work RAM 73 (step S1310). As a result, in the next update timing, the same decoded image data 132 as the current update timing is used.

  If “1” is set to the same use flag (step S1306: NO), this means that this time is the update timing using the same decoded image data 132 as the previous update timing. In this case, the address of the work RAM 73 in which the same decoded image data 132 as the previous time is expanded is grasped (step S1311).

  After that, “A-1, B” coordinates are grasped as the coordinate information (step S1312). In the case of “A-1, B” coordinates, the setting position of the decoded image data 132 with respect to the frame regions 82 a and 82 b is the position shown in FIG. Is set. Thereafter, after grasping the parameter information other than the coordinate information (step S1313), the same use flag in the work RAM 73 is cleared to "0" (step S1314). As a result, the new decoded image data 132 is used at the next update timing.

  When the processing of step S1307 to step S1310 or step S1311 to step S1314 is performed, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605) includes the decoded image data 132 to be used this time. Is set, and the parameter information to be applied to the decoded image data 132 including the coordinate information is set. Upon receiving the drawing list, the VDP 76 executes a group display setting process as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S804 of the drawing process (FIG. 21). FIG. 42B is a flowchart showing a setting process for group display.

  In the setting process for group display, first, information on the address where the decoded image data 132 to be used this time is stored is grasped from the drawing list (step S1501). The coordinate information applied to the decoded image data 132 to be used this time is grasped from the drawing list (step S1502), and other parameter information applied to the decoded image data 132 is grasped from the drawing list (step S1503). ).

  By executing the setting processing for group display as described above, in the subsequent writing processing (step S805), the current decoding is performed with the parameters applied to the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. The image data 132 is drawn. In this case, if the coordinate information is “A, B”, the range shown in FIG. 40B is drawn, and if the coordinate information is “A-1, B”, the range shown in FIG. 40C is drawn. You. Then, a group display effect is executed by outputting an image signal to the symbol display device 41 based on the drawing data.

  As described above, even if the cycle in which the decoded image data 132 based on the moving image data 131 for group display can be used is twice as long as the image update cycle in the symbol display device 41, the same decoded image data 132 is used. In the two consecutive update timings using the same decoded image data 132, the ranges to be drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b are different. As a result, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of rattling of the image.

  In two consecutive update timings in which the same decoded image data 132 is used, the drawing range of the decoded image data 132 at the front update timing and the drawing range of the decoded image data 132 at the rear update timing are one. Parts are duplicated. This makes it possible to cause a slight image change between two consecutive update timings while using the same decoded image data 132.

  In two consecutive update timings in which the same decoded image data 132 is used, the group display image at the rear update timing is different from the group display image at the front update timing in each group display character G11. Is shifted in the same decoded image data 132 in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn so that the position is shifted to the front side in the moving direction. Thus, even if the same decoded image data 132 is used at two consecutive update timings, it is possible to give continuity to the movement of the group display character G11.

  The direction in which at least the group display character G11 moves as a group in the horizontal and vertical directions within the range that can be rendered by the decoded image data 132 of the initial magnification is set wider than the direction in the frame areas 82a and 82b. ing. Thereby, even if the same decoded image data 132 is configured to change the drawing range of the frame areas 82a and 82b in accordance with the moving direction of the group display character G11 at two consecutive update timings, the symbol display device 41 The group display character G11 can be displayed as a whole.

  The first decoded image data 132 at one use timing and the second decoded image data 132 at the next use timing correspond to two update timings displayed using the decoded image data 132 at one use timing. Group display between the amount of movement of the group display character G11, the rear update timing displayed using the first decoded image data 132, and the front update timing displayed using the second decoded image data 132 The moving amount of the character G11 is set to be the same. Accordingly, the amount of movement of the group display character G11 between one update timing and the next update timing can be constant, and the movement of the group display character G11 can be performed smoothly.

  An image displayed by using the same decoded image data 132 at two consecutive update timings is an image in which many group display characters G11 move in the same direction. This makes it less noticeable that the same decoded image data 132 is used at two consecutive update timings.

<Another form of group display effect>
The size (specifically, the size in the horizontal direction) of at least the group display character G11 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction in the range that can be drawn by the decoded image data 132 of the initial magnification moves as a group. The configuration is not limited to a configuration in which the size in the drawing direction of the frame areas 82a and 82b is set to be at least larger by a predetermined moving amount than the dimension in the specific direction, and the decoded image data 132 after decoding is enlarged from the size of the initial magnification. Thus, at least the dimension in the specific direction may be set to be larger than the dimension in the specific direction in the drawing range of the frame areas 82a and 82b by at least a predetermined moving amount. In this case, although it is necessary to perform the size enlargement process on the decoded image data 132, the display position of the group display character G11 is moved by a predetermined distance between two consecutive update timings using the same decoded image data 132. It can be changed by an amount.

  The moving direction of the group display character G11 is not limited to the horizontal direction but may be the vertical direction. In this case, at least the vertical dimension in the range that can be drawn by the decoded image data 132 at the initial magnification or the decoded image data 132 after the enlargement processing from the size of the initial magnification is the vertical dimension in the drawing range of the frame areas 82a and 82b. Needs to be set at least larger by a predetermined moving amount.

  The group display character G11 is not limited to a person, and may be another animal such as a cat, a fish, and a dog, or may be an image of an object other than an animal.

  A configuration in which the same image data is used at a plurality of successive update timings and the drawing range in the frame areas 82a and 82b is different at each of these update timings is such that a plurality of the same group display characters G11 are the same. The present invention may be applied to an image other than an image that moves in the entire direction. For example, the above configuration may be applied to a case where a moving image is displayed in which a large single image exceeding the size of the liquid crystal display unit 41a of the symbol display device 41 moves in a predetermined direction.

  A configuration in which the same image data is used at a plurality of successive update timings and the drawing range in the frame areas 82a and 82b is made different at each of the update timings is obtained by decoding the moving image data 131. The present invention may be applied to image data other than the image data 132. For example, the above configuration may be applied to still image data stored in the memory module 74 in advance.

<Structure for performing an effective period display effect>
Next, a configuration for performing an effective period display effect will be described.

  FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the validity period display effect. The effective period display effect is an operation corresponding effect that changes the effect content between the case where the operation device 48 is operated and the case where the operation device is not operated during the effective period in which the operation of the operation device 48 is activated. When it is performed, it is an effect of displaying the validity period on the symbol display device 41.

  In the validity period display effect, an operation promotion image G21 for allowing the player to recognize that the operation device 48 for operation is to be operated on the symbol display device 41 is displayed, and the operation device 48 for effect. A valid period image G22 for allowing the player to recognize the remaining period in which the operation is valid is displayed. As the operation promotion image G21, specifically, an image representing the operation device for effect 48 is displayed, and an image for recognizing that the operation device for effect effect 48 is being operated is displayed. The specific display content is arbitrary as long as the player can recognize that the situation is that the device 48 should be operated.

  As the validity period image G22, a frame image G23, a band image G24, and a blinking image G25 are displayed. The frame image G23 is an image for displaying the frame portion of the validity period image G22, and is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular frame shape. The band image G24 is displayed so as to extend rightward with the left end of the frame portion as a base end in the frame portion of the frame image G23, and the effective period display effect starts as shown in FIG. In this case, the image is displayed so as to fill the entire frame portion by the frame image G23, and as the remaining valid period decreases, the leading end position which is the right end position as shown in FIG. The image is gradually moved toward the left end, and is displayed so that the area filled in the frame by the frame image G23 becomes narrow. The blinking image G25 is displayed so as to be added to the leading end position of the band image G24, and is displayed so as to move in accordance with the leading end position when the leading end position of the band image G24 gradually moves to the left end. In addition, the blinking image G25 is displayed as if the whole blinks.

  Here, in the case where the blinking display is performed while the blinking image G25 moves in accordance with the movement of the band image G24, the data for controlling the display of the movement of the band image G24 and the blinking display of the blinking image G25 are controlled. Is set collectively by one piece of animation data or the like, if one of the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is changed, the other is also changed in conjunction therewith. Would. A case where the event occurs will be described with reference to a time chart of FIG. FIG. 44A shows how the moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24 changes, and FIG. 44B shows how the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 changes.

  When the validity period display effect is started, the movement display of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 44A, and blinks as shown in FIG. 44B. The blinking display of the image G25 is started. In this case, the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is the first speed, and the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is the first blinking period Te1. Then, the movement display of the band image G24 at the first speed and the blinking display of the blinking image G25 at the first blinking period Te1 are performed from the timing t1 to the timing t5.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t5, the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is changed to the second speed higher than the first speed as shown in FIG. The change of the speed is performed by referring to data in a predetermined order among the reference data set in chronological order in the data for display control of the movement of the band image G24, and then performing data control in a specific order thereafter. Is performed by shortening the time required until display control is performed with reference to FIG. Specifically, when the pointer information set by the serial number and the information of the contents of the task are set so as to correspond to the pointer information on a one-to-one basis, as the data for controlling the display, The display control of the band image G24 is performed by referring to the information of the task content corresponding to the order pointer information, and then the information of the task content corresponding to the specific order pointer information that is an order later than the predetermined order. , The moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24 is changed by changing the number of times the image update timing occurs until the display control of the band image G24 is performed. In this case, if the data for controlling the display of the band image G24 and the data for controlling the display of the blinking image G25 are collectively set in the display control data, the movement of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is performed. In order to change the speed, display control is performed by referring to information on the content of the task corresponding to the pointer information in the predetermined order, and then the task corresponding to the pointer information in the specific order that is an order subsequent to the predetermined order is performed. If the number of times the image update timing occurs until the display control is performed with reference to the content information is changed, the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 will also be changed accordingly.

  That is, when the moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24 is changed from the first speed to the second speed at the timing of t5 in FIG. 44A, the blinking period of the blinking image G25 as shown in FIG. Is also changed from the first blinking cycle Te1 to the second blinking cycle Te2. The same applies to the case where the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is changed. When the data for each display control is set collectively, the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is changed. The moving speed is also changed.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, data for controlling the display of the band image G24 and data for controlling the display of the blinking image G25 are not provided collectively. It is provided separately. Hereinafter, the contents of data stored in advance in the memory module 74 for executing the validity period display effect will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 45, the memory module 74 stores frame display image data 141 for displaying a frame image G23 and band display image data for displaying a band image G24 as data for performing a validity period display effect. Image data 142, lighting image data 143 for displaying a blinking image G25 in a lighting state, and light-off image data 144 for displaying a blinking image G25 in a light-off state are stored in advance. By drawing the frame display image data 141 in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn by the VDP 76, the frame image G23 can be displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  The band display image data 142 is set to a size that can fill the entire frame portion of the frame image G23 at the initial magnification, and the left end portion of the band image G24 matches the left end of the frame portion of the frame image G23. By setting the coordinate information for the frame areas 82a and 82b of the band display image data 142 at the initial magnification, the band image G24 is displayed so as to fill the entire frame portion of the frame image G23. Then, while gradually reducing the horizontal size of the band display image data 142 from the initial magnification, the band display image of the size is set so that the left end portion of the band image G24 matches the left end of the frame portion of the frame image G23. By setting the coordinate information for the frame areas 82a and 82b of the data 142, an image in which the leading end of the band image G24 gradually moves toward the left end is displayed.

  Both the lighting image data 143 and the turning-off image data 144 are image data for displaying the blinking image G25, and the images displayed by the lighting image data 143 and the turning-off image data 144 are the same at the initial magnification. Size and shape. However, the lighting image data 143 displays a relatively bright blinking image G25, and the light-off image data 144 displays a relatively dark blinking image G25. Only one of the light-on image data 143 and the light-off image data 144 is used at each image update timing. Coordinate information for the frame areas 82a and 82b is set so as to be superimposed and displayed from the near side. The period in which the lighting image data 143 is used and the period in which the turning-off image data 144 is used are alternately repeated, so that the display of the blinking image G25 in the lighting state and the blinking image G25 in the unlit state are repeated. The display is alternately repeated. This makes it possible to display the blinking image G25 as if the light were blinking.

  In addition to the various image data 141 to 144, the band display table 145 and the blinking display table 146 are stored in the memory module 74 in advance. The band display table 145 is data for executing display control of the band image G24. Specifically, the horizontal size information of the band image data 142 and the position information of the leading end of the band image G24 are determined. Data. The blinking display table 146 is data for executing display control of the blinking image G25, and specifically, image data to be used for the blinking image G25 among the lighting image data 143 and the turning-off image data 144 is determined. Data. The band display table 145 and the blinking display table 146 will be described in detail.

  FIG. 46A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the band display table 145. As shown in FIG. 46 (a), in the band display table 145, pointer information is set so as to be a serial number, and the horizontal size of the band display image data 142 in correspondence with each pointer information. A combination of the information and the position information of the leading end of the band image G24 is set. By reducing the size of the band display image data 142 by the magnification of the size information corresponding to the pointer information to be referred, the horizontal display range of the band image G24 is reduced. The band display image data 142 is drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b so that the left end of the band image G24 overlaps the left end of the frame of the frame image G23, so that the leading end of the band image G24 gradually becomes the left end. Will be displayed. Further, the tip position information corresponding to the pointer information to be referred to is the tip portion of the band image G24 when the band display image data 142 is drawn at a magnification of the size information corresponding to the pointer information. Corresponds to the position. Then, the image data to be used among the lighting image data 143 and the extinguishing image data 144 is drawn so as to be at a position corresponding to the tip position information, and thus overlaps the tip portion of the band image G24 from the near side. Thus, the blinking image G25 is displayed.

  When the display control of the band image G24 is performed so that the leading end portion of the band image G24 moves at the first speed, one band image is updated a plurality of times (for example, five times) over the update timing of the band-side specific number of times. The same size information and tip position information corresponding to the pointer information are referred to. Then, at the next image update timing with respect to the update timing of the band-side specific number of images, the pointer information is updated to the next-order pointer information, and the size information and the tip position information corresponding to the pointer information are updated. It is referenced over the number of times the image is updated. As described above, the pointer information is updated each time the update timing of the band-side specific number of images elapses, so that the band image G24 is displayed so that the leading end portion moves at the first speed, and the leading end portion is displayed. A blinking image G25 is displayed so as to overlap from the near side.

  On the other hand, when the display control of the band image G24 is performed such that the leading end portion of the band image G24 moves at the second speed higher than the first speed, the band-side predetermined number of times that is smaller than the band-side specific number ( For example, the same size information and tip position information corresponding to one piece of pointer information are referred to over the (two times) image update timing. The pointer information is updated to the next-order pointer information at the next image update timing with respect to the band-side predetermined number of image update timings, and the size information and the tip position information corresponding to the pointer information are updated to the band-side predetermined time. It is referenced over the number of times the image is updated. As described above, the pointer information is updated every time the update timing of the band-side predetermined number of images elapses, so that the band image G24 is displayed such that the leading end moves at the second speed higher than the first speed. And a blinking image G25 is displayed so as to overlap the front end portion from the near side.

  FIG. 46B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the blinking display table 146. As shown in FIG. 46B, pointer information is set in the blinking display table 146 so as to be a serial number, and the lighting image data 143 and the turning-off image data 144 correspond to each pointer information. Image data to be used is set. The image data 143 and 144 set as the use target in the pointer information to be referred to are the tip position information corresponding to the pointer information to be referred to in the band display table 145 at the update timing of the image. By being drawn at the position, the blinking image G25 in a state corresponding to the image data 143 and 144 to be used is superimposed and displayed on the front end portion of the band image G24 from the near side.

  In the blinking display table 146, lighting image data 143 is set as image data to be used for pointer information “0” to “9”, and pointer information “10” to “19” is set for pointer information “10” to “19”. In addition, the light-off image data 144 is set as the image data to be used. When the display control using the blinking display table 146 is performed, the pointer information to be referred to is incremented by one every time the pointer information is updated, and the value of the pointer information after the addition is the maximum value. When it exceeds 19, the value of the pointer information of the reference target is cleared to "0". That is, while the validity period display effect is being performed, the pointer information to be referred to in the blinking display table 146 starts from “0” and reaches “19”, and the reference period is one cycle. Is repeated a plurality of times. As a result, the data amount of the blinking display table 146 can be reduced.

  When the display control of the blinking image G25 is performed so that the blinking period of the blinking image G25 becomes the first blinking period Te1, one (eg, two) blinking-side specific times is updated over the update timing of the image on the blinking side. The same use target image data 143 and 144 corresponding to the pointer information is referred to. Then, the pointer information is updated to the next-order pointer information at the next image update timing with respect to the update timing of the image on the blinking side specific number of times, and the same use target image data 143 and 144 corresponding to the pointer information is updated. Is referred to over the update timing of the image on the blinking side specific number of times. As described above, the pointer information is updated every time the update timing of the image of the blinking side specific number of times elapses, so that the first blinking image G25 displayed so as to overlap the leading end portion of the band image G24 from the near side. The blinking display is performed at the blinking cycle Te1.

  On the other hand, when the display control of the blinking image G25 is performed so that the blinking period of the blinking image G25 becomes the second blinking period Te2, the blinking side predetermined number of times (for example, one time) which is smaller than the blinking side specific number of times. Over the image update timing, the same use target image data 143 and 144 corresponding to one piece of pointer information is referred to. Then, the pointer information is updated to the next-order pointer information at the next image update timing with respect to the update timing of the predetermined number of images on the blinking side, and the same use target image data 143 and 144 corresponding to the pointer information is updated. Are referenced over a predetermined number of times of updating the image on the blinking side. As described above, the pointer information is updated every time the update timing of the predetermined number of images on the blinking side elapses, so that the second blinking image G25 displayed so as to overlap the leading end of the band image G24 from the near side. The blinking display is performed at the blinking cycle Te2.

  The manner in which the effective period display effect is executed using both the band display table 145 and the blinking display table 146 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIGS. 47 (a1) and 47 (a2) show the state of the moving speed of the leading end portion in the band image G24, and FIGS. 47 (b1) and 47 (b2) show the states of the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25.

  First, a case where the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is changed in a situation where the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is constant will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 (a1) and 47 (b1).

  When the effective period display effect is started, the movement display of the leading end of the band image G24 is started at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. 47 (a1) and blinks as shown in FIG. 47 (b1). The blinking display of the image G25 is started. In this case, the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is the first speed, and the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is the first blinking period Te1. Then, the movement display of the band image G24 at the first speed and the blinking display of the blinking image G25 at the first blinking period Te1 are performed from the timing t11 to the timing t15.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t15, the number of occurrences of the image update timing required until the pointer information is updated in the band display table 145 is changed to the band-side predetermined number which is smaller than the band-side specific number. Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (a1), the moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24 is changed to the second speed higher than the first speed. On the other hand, the number of times of updating of the image required until the pointer information is updated in the blinking display table 146 is maintained at the blinking side specific number up to that point, as shown in FIG. 47 (b1). The blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is maintained at the first blinking cycle Te1.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 47 (a2) and 47 (b2), a description will be given of a case where the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is changed under the condition that the moving speed of the leading end portion in the band image G24 is constant.

  When the valid period display effect is started, the movement display of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is started at the timing of t21 as shown in FIG. 47 (a2), and blinks as shown in FIG. 47 (b2). The blinking display of the image G25 is started. In this case, the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is the first speed, and the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is the first blinking period Te1. Then, the movement display of the band image G24 at the first speed and the blinking display of the blinking image G25 at the first blinking period Te1 are performed from the timing t21 to the timing t25.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t25, the number of occurrences of the image update timing required until the pointer information is updated in the blinking display table 146 is changed to the predetermined number of times of blinking, which is smaller than the number of times of blinking side specified. As a result, the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is changed to the second blinking cycle Te2 shorter than the first blinking cycle Te1, as shown in FIG. 47 (b2). On the other hand, the number of occurrences of the image update timing required until the pointer information is updated in the band display table 145 is maintained at the band-side specific number up to that point, as shown in FIG. 47 (a2). The moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24 is maintained at the first speed.

  As described above, the band display table 145 is provided as data for controlling the display of the band image G24, and the blinking display table 146 is used as the data for controlling the display of the blinking image G25. By being provided, it is possible to change one of the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 without changing one of them. Accordingly, it is possible to independently change the moving speed of the band image G24 and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25, and it is possible to suitably realize the diversification of the display mode of the effective period display effect. .

  Here, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display contents of the band image G24 and the blinking image G25 are associated with the degree of expectation that the operation corresponding special effect will be executed when the operation device 48 is operated during the valid period. Have been. Specifically, the first display content indicates that the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is maintained at the first speed until the end and the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is maintained at the first blinking period Te1 until the end. The case where the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is changed to the second speed on the way and the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is maintained at the first blinking period Te1 until the end is the second display content and the case of the band image G24. In the case where the moving speed of the leading end portion is maintained at the first speed until the end and the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is changed to the second blinking period Te2 on the way, the third display content is used. It is set so that the degree of expectation is higher in the first display content than in the first display content, and is higher in the third display content than in the second display content. Thereby, by confirming the display contents of the band image G24 and the blinking image G25, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation that the operation corresponding special effect is executed when the operation device for operation 48 is operated. In addition, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the validity period display effect.

  In addition, when the operation corresponding special effect is executed when the operation device for operation 48 is operated, the operation corresponding special effect is not executed when the operation device for operation 48 is operated. The probability of occurrence of the special operation corresponding to the operation is set such that the degree of expectation of the jackpot result in the corresponding game times is higher than in the case. In this case, as described above, the display contents of the band image G24 and the blinking image G25 are associated with the execution expectation of the special operation corresponding to the operation. It will be. From this point as well, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the validity period display effect.

  In addition, when the operation device for effect 48 is operated during the effective period, any one of a plurality of types of operation-response effects including the first operation-response effect and the second operation-response effect may be executed. , The display content of the band image G24 and the blinking image G25 may be associated with the expected degree of execution of the predetermined operation corresponding effect.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the validity period display effect will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for displaying a validity period performed by the display CPU 72. The calculation processing for displaying the validity period is performed in the calculation processing for rendering in step S704 in the task processing (FIG. 19) in a situation where the validity period display effect is to be performed.

  If it is the start timing of the validity period display effect (step S1601: YES), the band display table 145 and the blinking display table 146 are read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 (step S1602). Then, as a process of setting the moving speed of the band image G24, the updating period of the pointer information in the band displaying table 145 is set to the updating period corresponding to the first speed (step S1603), and the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is set. As a process, the updating cycle of the pointer information in the blinking display table 146 is set to the updating cycle corresponding to the first blinking cycle Te1 (step S1604).

  After that, of the lighting image data 143 and the turning-off image data 144, the image data to be used, which is set in the blinking display table 146 in correspondence with the first pointer information, is used to display the blinking image G25 this time. While grasping as image data (step S1613), frame display image data 141 and band display image data 142 are grasped as image data to be used this time (step S1614). Thereafter, the size information set corresponding to the first pointer information in the band display table 145 is grasped as size information to be applied to the band display image data 142 (step S1615), and the band display table 145 is obtained. In step S1616, the tip position information set corresponding to the first pointer information is grasped as the position information for drawing the image data to be used this time out of the lighting image data 143 and the turning-off image data 144 (step S1616). Further, other parameter information is grasped (step S1617).

  When the calculation processing for displaying the validity period is performed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605) includes the lighting image data 143 and the turning-off image data 144 in the drawing list. The image data to be used, which is set in correspondence with the first pointer information in the blinking display table 146, and the frame display image data 141 and the band display image data 142 are set as drawing targets. The parameter information obtained in steps S1615 to S1617 is set in the drawing list.

  If it is not the start timing of the validity period display effect (step S1601: NO), it is determined whether it is the update timing of the pointer information on the band image G24 side (step S1605). When the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is set to the first speed, and when the number of times the image update timing has occurred since the pointer information of the band display table 145 was last updated is the band-side specific number. It is determined that it is time to update the pointer information of the band image G24, and if the moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24 is set to the second speed, the pointer information of the band display table 145 is updated last time. When the number of times of updating the image from the image is the band side predetermined number, it is determined that it is the updating timing of the pointer information on the band image G24 side. When it is the update timing of the pointer information on the band image G24 side (step S1605: YES), the pointer information is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be referred to in the band display table 145 is incremented by 1 (step S1606). ).

  If it is not the start timing of the validity period display effect (step S1601: NO), it is determined whether it is the update timing of the pointer information on the blinking image G25 side (step S1607). When the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is set to the first blinking period Te1, when the number of occurrences of the image update timing since the previous update of the pointer information of the blinking display table 146 is the blinking side specific number, When it is determined that the timing of updating the pointer information of the blinking image G25 has been reached, and the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is set to the second blinking period Te2, the pointer information of the blinking display table 146 since the previous update was updated. When the number of occurrences of the update timing of the image is the predetermined number of times on the blinking side, it is determined that it is the update timing of the pointer information on the blinking image G25 side. When it is the update timing of the pointer information on the blinking image G25 side (step S1607: YES), the pointer information is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be referred to in the blinking display table 146 is incremented by 1 (step S1608). ).

  If it is not the start timing of the validity period display effect (step S1601: NO), it is determined whether or not it is the timing to change the moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24 (step S1609). Whether or not the moving speed is changed and when the moving speed is changed, the change timing is determined at the start of the current effective period display effect, and the display CPU 72 determines whether or not the change is the timing determined at the start. Is determined. Further, as a method of specifying the change timing, the number of occurrences of the update timing of the image serving as the change timing is determined at the start of the current effective period display effect, and the determined number of times of the update timing of the image is determined. In such a case, a method of specifying the above change timing may be considered. If it is the timing to change the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 (step S1609: YES), as a process of setting the moving speed of the band image G24, the update cycle of the pointer information in the band display table 145 is set to the second speed. A corresponding update cycle is set (step S1610).

  When it is not the start timing of the validity period display effect (step S1601: NO), it is determined whether or not it is the timing to change the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 (step S1611). The presence or absence of a change in the blinking cycle and the timing of the change when the blinking cycle is changed are determined at the start of the current validity period display effect, and the display CPU 72 determines whether or not it is the timing determined at the start. Is determined. Further, as a method of specifying the change timing, the number of occurrences of the update timing of the image serving as the change timing is determined at the start of the current effective period display effect, and the determined number of times of the update timing of the image is determined. In such a case, a method of specifying the above change timing may be considered. When it is the timing to change the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 (step S1611: YES), as the setting processing of the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25, the update cycle of the pointer information in the blinking display table 146 corresponds to the second blinking cycle Te2. (Step S1612).

  After that, of the image data for lighting 143 and the image data 144 for turning off, the image data of the use target set in the blinking display table 146 corresponding to the current pointer information of the reference target is displayed as the blinking image G25 this time. It is grasped as image data to be performed (step S1613). In this case, if the processing in step S1608 has not been executed in the current processing cycle, the image data corresponding to the pointer information referred to in the previous processing cycle is grasped, and in step S1608 in the current processing cycle. When the processing is being executed, the image data corresponding to the pointer information newly updated and referred to this time is grasped. In addition, the image data 141 for frame display and the image data 142 for band display are grasped as image data to be used this time (step S1614).

  Thereafter, the size information set in the band display table 145 in association with the current pointer information of the reference target is grasped as size information for applying to the band display image data 142 (step S1615), and the band display is performed. The tip position information set in the table for use 145 in association with the current pointer information of the reference target is used as the position information for drawing the image data to be used this time out of the lighting image data 143 and the turning-off image data 144. Figure out. In this case, if the process of step S1606 has not been executed in the current process, the size information and the tip position information corresponding to the pointer information referred to in the previous process are grasped, and the current process is executed. In step S1606, the size information and the tip position information corresponding to the pointer information newly updated and referred to this time are grasped. Further, other parameter information is grasped (step S1617).

  When the calculation processing for validity period display is performed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605) includes the lighting image data 143 and the turning-off image data 144 in the drawing list. The image data to be used, which is set in the blinking display table 146 in association with the current pointer information of the reference target, and the frame display image data 141 and the band display image data 142 are set as drawing targets. . The parameter information obtained in steps S1615 to S1617 is set in the drawing list.

  As described above, the band display table 145 is provided as data for controlling the display of the band image G24, and the blinking table 146 is provided as data for controlling the display of the blinking image G25. Accordingly, it is possible to change one of the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 without changing one of them. Accordingly, it is possible to independently change the moving speed of the band image G24 and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25, and it is possible to suitably realize the diversification of the display mode of the effective period display effect. .

  In particular, when the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is changed, only the update period of the pointer information in the band display table 145 is changed, so that the same band displaying speed is used regardless of the moving speed. Table 145 is used. Similarly, when the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is changed, only the updating cycle of the pointer information in the blinking display table 146 is changed, so that the same blinking display table 146 is used regardless of the blinking cycle. used. For example, in a configuration in which data for display control of the display content of the band image G24 and data for display control of the display content of the blinking image G25 are collectively set in one table, If one of the moving speed and the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is to be changed without affecting the other, it is necessary to separately prepare a table corresponding to the moving speed and the blinking period of the blinking image G25. It is necessary for several kinds. Then, the storage capacity of the memory module 74 required to store the table in advance increases. On the other hand, the same band display table 145 is used regardless of the moving speed, and the same blinking display table 146 is used regardless of the blinking cycle. It is possible to realize a variety of display modes of the effective period display effect while suppressing an increase in the storage capacity of the storage device 74.

  In the band display table 145, tip position information corresponding to information of a position for setting image data to be used among the lighting image data 143 and the turning-off image data 144 is set. Thereby, information for arranging the blinking image G25 at the position of the leading end of the band image G24 is set in association with the information that determines the display mode of the band image G24. Therefore, in a configuration in which the band display table 145 and the blinking display table 146 are separately provided, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for adjusting the relative position between the band image G24 and the blinking image G25. .

<Another form related to the effective period display effect>
The pointer information of the blinking display table 146 is only “0” and “1”, one of the “0” and “1” corresponds to the image data for lighting 143 and the other is the image data for lighting out. 144. In this case, the blink cycle of the blink image G25 is set to one of the first blink cycle Te1 and the second blink cycle Te2 by adjusting the update cycle of the pointer information between “0” and “1”. It becomes possible. According to this configuration, the data amount of the blinking display table 146 can be further reduced.

  When the moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24 is the first speed, 1 is added to the pointer information of the reference target in the band display table 145 at each one image update timing, and the leading end of the band image G24. When the moving speed is the second speed, two or more values may be added to the pointer information of the reference target in the band display table 145 at each one image update timing. In other words, the value added to the pointer information of the reference target in the band display table 145 may be different at each time of updating the image at the first speed and the second speed. Even with this configuration, it is possible to change the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 between the first speed and the second speed while using the same band display table 145.

  If the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is the first blinking period Te1, 1 is added to the pointer information of the reference target in the blinking display table 146 every time the image is updated, and the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is In the case of the second blinking period Te2, two or more values may be added to the pointer information of the reference target in the blinking display table 146 every time the image is updated once. That is, the value added to the pointer information to be referred to in the blinking display table 146 may be different at each time of updating the image between the first blinking period Te1 and the second blinking period Te2. Even with this configuration, it is possible to change the blinking period of the blinking image G25 between the first blinking period Te1 and the second blinking period Te2 while using the same blinking display table 146.

  The image data for displaying the blinking image G25 is not limited to two types, and may be three or more types. The blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is not limited to two types, but may be three or more. There may be. Further, the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is not limited to two types, and may be three or more types.

  -Instead of the configuration in which the blinking display table 146 is used to determine the type of image data used to display the blinking image G25, the blinking image G25 is displayed without using the table by processing on a program. The configuration may be such that the type of image data to be used is determined.

  -In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the size of the band image G24 changes over time, at least one of the shape and the color of the band image G24 may change over time. Further, in addition to or instead of the configuration in which the type of image data for displaying the blinking image G25 changes over time, at least one of the size, shape, and color of the blinking image G25 changes over time. May be changed.

<Configuration for performing a number display effect>
Next, a configuration for performing a number display effect will be described.

  FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the number display effect. The number display effect is an effect in which, in the opening and closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode, the number of game balls obtained by the player from the start of the opening and closing execution mode (hereinafter, referred to as “acquired number”) is displayed on the symbol display device 41. . The acquired number is the difference between the total number of game balls paid out to the player from the start of the opening and closing execution mode and the total number of game balls fired in the game area PA from the start of the opening and closing execution mode. That is. In addition, the display of the acquired number by the number display effect is started when the opening period is started in the opening and closing execution mode, and when a payout of game balls to the player occurs in the opening and closing execution mode and the launch of the game balls. Is performed, the displayed content is changed accordingly. 49, in a situation where the display effect for the open / close execution mode is being executed on the symbol display device 41, the number display image G31 is displayed on the edge side of the symbol display device 41. By checking the number display image G31, the player can grasp the number of game balls acquired in the open / close execution mode.

  FIG. 50 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration for performing a number display effect.

  The MPU 52 of the main control device 50 is electrically connected to the winning detection sensors 151 to 154, the shot ball detection sensor 155, and the return ball detection sensor 156. The prize detection sensors 151 to 154 are sensors for detecting the occurrence of a prize which triggers the payout of a game ball, and include a general prize port 31, a special power prize device 32, a first operation port 33, and a second operation port 34. A plurality of types are provided in one-to-one correspondence. The MPU 52 of the main control device 50 receives detection signals from each of the plurality of types of winning detection sensors 151 to 154. When the MPU 52 receives a signal corresponding to the occurrence of a game ball in the corresponding ball entry section from any of the winning detection sensors 151 to 154, the MPU 52 displays the number of game balls corresponding to the winning. A prize ball command for instructing payout is transmitted to the payout control device 55.

  The payout control device 55 includes a payout control board 158 on which the MPU 159a is mounted. The MPU 159a includes a ROM 159b storing various control programs executed by the MPU 159a and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 159b. A certain RAM 159c, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built in. The payout device 56 is electrically connected to the MPU 159a of the payout control device 55. When the prize ball command is received from the main control device 50, the MPU 159a drives the payout motor 56a provided in the payout device 56. By starting the output of the signal, the payout of the game ball is started. Then, the MPU 159a determines that the payout number of the game balls measured based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor 56b provided in the payout device 56 becomes a number corresponding to the information of the number set in the prize ball command. Then, the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 56a is stopped to stop paying out the game balls. Further, every time one payout ball is detected by the payout detection sensor 56b, the MPU 159a of the payout control device 55 outputs a payout completion signal indicating to the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 that the payout of one playball has been completed. Send

  The shooting ball detection sensor 155 is provided in a game ball shooting mechanism 161 for shooting game balls toward the game area PA when the shooting operation device 28 is operated. FIG. 51 is a front view of the inner frame 13 showing the lower region of the inner frame 13 in an enlarged manner. The game ball firing mechanism 161 is provided below the game board 24 on the front surface of the inner frame 13. The game ball launching mechanism 161 is a firing rail 162 extending toward the guide rail formed on the game board 24 and an electric actuator for firing the game ball supplied from the upper plate 46a onto the launch rail 162 toward the guide rail. A solenoid 163 and a holding member 164 for holding one game ball B1 supplied on the firing rail 162 at a position where the solenoid 163 can launch the game ball B1 are provided. When the firing operation device 28 is operated, a drive signal is supplied to the solenoid 163 each time a predetermined firing cycle (for example, 60 msec) is reached, and the solenoid 163 launches a game ball.

  In the game ball launching mechanism 161, the launch ball detection sensor 155 is provided so as to detect a game ball that passes through the most downstream position of the launch rail 162. That is, the launch ball detection sensor 155 is provided so as to detect a game ball launched from the most downstream portion of the launch rail 162 toward the guide rail, and the game ball detected by the launch ball detection sensor 155 is the launch rail. 162 does not flow back.

  The launching ball detection sensor 155 is an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and outputs a HI level signal as a launching ball detection signal when the game ball B1 is in the detection range. When B1 does not exist in the detection range, a LOW level signal is output as a launching ball non-detection signal. Therefore, it is possible to specify the number of game balls that have been fired toward the guide rail by passing through the most downstream position of the firing rail 162 by the shooting ball detection sensor 155. Note that the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed. In addition, the shooting ball detection sensor 155 is not limited to an optical sensor, and may be a sensor of another detection method.

  The return ball detection sensor 156 is provided in a return ball collection unit 165 that collects game balls that are fired from the most downstream portion of the firing rail 162 toward the guide rail but have flowed back through the guide rail without reaching the game area PA. Have been. The return ball recovery portion 165 is formed in a region formed by laterally separating the guide rail and the firing rail 162 on the front surface of the inner frame 13, and exists between the two rails. The return ball recovery section 165 is formed as a space having a predetermined depth dimension, and is formed such that the space is opened upward. The return ball collection unit 165 is communicated with the lower plate 47a, and the game balls B1 collected by the return ball collection unit 165 are discharged to the lower plate 47a by its own weight.

  The return ball detection sensor 156 in the return ball collection unit 165 is provided so as to detect a game ball passing through the most downstream position of the return ball collection unit 165. That is, the return ball detection sensor 156 is provided to detect a game ball flowing down from the most downstream portion of the return ball collection unit 165 toward the lower plate 47a.

  The return ball detection sensor 156 is an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and outputs a HI level signal as a return ball detection signal when a game ball is present in the detection range. In a situation where the signal does not exist in the detection range, a low level signal is output as a return ball non-detection signal. Therefore, it is possible to specify the number of game balls collected by the return ball collection unit 165 by the return ball detection sensor 156. Note that the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed. Further, the return ball detection sensor 156 is not limited to an optical sensor, and may be a sensor of another detection method.

  Returning to the description referring to FIG. 50, the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 determines whether the result of receiving the payout completion signal from the MPU 159a of the payout control device 55, the result of receiving the firing ball detection signal from the firing ball detection sensor 155, and the return ball A command corresponding to each of the reception results of the return ball detection signal from the detection sensor 156 is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 62. In detail about these commands, the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 measures the number of times the payout completion signal is received, and when the payout completion signal is received ten times, the payout of ten game balls is completed. Is transmitted to the sound-light-side MPU 62. Also, the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 transmits the prize ball completion command last time when the next payment completion signal is not received even after the reception standby period (for example, 2 sec) has elapsed since the previous reception of the payout completion signal. Even if the number of times the payout completion signal has been received after that has not reached 10, the prize ball completion command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 62. In the prize ball completion command, information indicating the number of payout completion signals received since the previous transmission of the prize ball completion command is set. In addition, when the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 receives the fired ball detection signal from the fired ball detection sensor 155, the MPU 52 transmits a firing execution command indicating that one game ball has been fired to the sound-light side MPU 62. When a return ball detection signal is received from the return ball detection sensor 156, a return ball generation command indicating that one return ball has been generated is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 62.

  The sound-light-side MPU 62 is for enabling the display of the number of acquired balls every time the prize-ball completion command, the launch execution command, and the return sphere generation command are received from the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 in the open / close execution mode. Perform measurement processing. Then, a measurement command corresponding to the result of the measurement processing is transmitted to the display CPU 72 of the display control device 70 when the transmission timing of the measurement command comes. The display CPU 72 causes the symbol display device 41 to display the number display image G31 in a state in which the content of the received measurement command is reflected.

  Hereinafter, the processing content executed by the sound light side MPU 62 and the display CPU 72 for performing the number display effect will be described. First, a description will be given of the processing performed by the sound-light-side MPU 62.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a counting process executed by the sound-light-side MPU 62. The counting process is executed in the table setting process of step S301 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

  When the prize ball completion command is received in the open / close execution mode (steps S1701 and S1702: YES), the measurement counter 166 provided in the sound-light side RAM 64 is set to the prize ball completion command received this time. The value corresponding to the number of completed payouts of the game balls is added (step S1703). The measurement counter 166 is a counter used to measure the number of acquisitions that have occurred from the transmission timing of one measurement command to the transmission timing of the next measurement command in the open / close execution mode. For example, when a prize ball completion command indicating that the payout of ten game balls has been completed is received, the value of “10” is added to the counter 166 for measurement, and the payout of three game balls is completed. Is received, the value of “3” is added to the counter 166 for measurement.

  When the firing execution command is received in the open / close execution mode (steps S1701 and S1704: YES), “1” is subtracted from the measurement counter 166 (step S1705). The measurement counter 166 is configured to be able to measure both a positive value and a negative value. For example, when the value of the measurement counter 166 is “5”, the measurement is performed when a firing execution command is received. The value of the counter 166 becomes “4”, and the value of the counter 166 becomes “−1” when the firing execution command is received when the value of the counter 166 is “0”. When the return ball generation command is received in the open / close execution mode (step S1701 and step S1706: YES), “1” is added to the value of the measurement counter 166 (step S1707).

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a measurement command output setting process executed by the sound-light-side MPU 62. The counting process is executed in the command selection process of step S302 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

  In the output setting process of the measurement command, it is first determined whether or not it is the output timing of the measurement command (step S1801). The output timing of the measurement command occurs when the command output cycle elapses in the open / close execution mode. The command output period is set as a period longer than the update period of the number display image G31. More specifically, the command output period is longer than a period obtained by doubling the update period of the number display image G31, The period is set as a period shorter than the tripled period. The update cycle of the number display image G31 is set as a cycle longer than 20 msec, which is the update cycle of the image for one frame, and is set to, for example, 300 msec. However, the update timing of the number display image G31 generated by the elapse of the update cycle of the number display image G31 corresponds to the update timing of the image for one frame.

  If it is the output timing of the measurement command (step S1801: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the measurement counter 166 is “0” or more, so that the value of the measurement counter 166 corresponds to the increase in the acquired number. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (step S1802). If the value of the measurement counter 166 corresponds to the increase in the acquired number (step S1802: YES), the increase measurement command is read from the sound-light-side ROM 63, and the measurement counter is read in response to the read increase measurement command. Information corresponding to the current value of 166 is set (step S1803). Then, the measurement command for increase after the information setting is transmitted to the display CPU 72 (step S1804). As a result, the display CPU 72 specifies that the acquired number has increased, and specifies the increased number.

  When it is the output timing of the measurement command and the value of the measurement counter 166 is less than “0” (step S1801: YES, step S1802: NO), the value of the measurement counter 166 corresponds to the decrease in the number of acquisitions. Means you are. In this case, a decrease measurement command is read from the sound light side ROM 63, and information corresponding to the current value of the measurement counter 166 is set for the read decrease measurement command (step S1805). Then, the measurement command for decrease after the information setting is transmitted to the display CPU 72 (step S1806). As a result, the display CPU 72 specifies that the acquired number has decreased, and specifies the number of the decrease.

  If the processing of step S1804 or S1806 has been executed, the value of the measurement counter 166 is cleared to “0” (step S1807). As a result, the information on the acquired number set as the target of the measurement command is deleted from the measurement counter 166.

  Next, the contents of processing executed by the display CPU 72 will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the processing corresponding to the measurement command executed by the display CPU 72. The measurement command corresponding process is executed in the command corresponding process of step S603 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18).

  When the increase measurement command is received from the sound-light-side MPU 62 (step S1901: YES), the reflection counter 167 provided in the work RAM 73 stores the increase number of the acquisition number set in the increase measurement command received this time. A value corresponding to the number is added (step S1902). The reflection counter 167 is a counter for specifying, by the display CPU 72, the number of increments and decrements to be reflected in the future display of the acquired number currently displayed as the number display image G31. If the decrease measurement command has been received from the sound-light side MPU 62 (step S1903: YES), the value of the reflection counter 167 corresponds to the decrease in the acquired number set in the decrease measurement command received this time. The value is subtracted (step S1904).

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a calculation display calculation process executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation processing for measurement display is executed in the effect calculation processing of step S704 in the task processing (FIG. 19).

  When it is the update timing of the number display image G31 (step S2001: YES), if the value of the reflection counter 167 is less than 0 (step S2002: YES), the subtraction process of the total counter 168 provided in the work RAM 73 is performed. Execute (Step S2003). The total counter 168 is a counter that determines the value of the acquired number to be displayed as the number display image G31, and the value stored in the total counter 168 is displayed as the number display image G31. Therefore, when the value of the total counter 168 fluctuates, the content of the number display image G31 fluctuates accordingly. In the subtraction process of the total counter 168, the value of the decrease in the acquired number set in the current reflection counter 167 is subtracted from the current value of the total counter 168. That is, when the value of the reflection counter 167 is a value corresponding to the decrease in the number of acquisitions, all the values of the decrease in the number of acquisitions set in the reflection counter 167 are used for the total regardless of the value. This is reflected in the value of the counter 168. Accordingly, when the acquired number decreases, all of the decrease is collectively reflected in the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31. Thereafter, the value of the reflection counter 167 is cleared to "0" (step S2004).

  If it is the update timing of the number display image G31 and the value of the reflection counter 167 is “0” or more (step S2001: YES, step S2002: NO), it is determined whether the value of the reflection counter 167 is 1 or more. Is determined (step S2005). When the value of the reflection counter 167 is not 1 or more (step S2005: NO), it means that the value of the reflection counter 167 is “0”. In this case, the total counter 168 does not increase or decrease at the current update timing of the number display image G31. Therefore, the display content of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is maintained as it is.

  If the value of the reflection counter 167 is equal to or greater than 1 (step S2005: YES), it is determined whether the value of the reflection counter 167 is equal to or greater than the first reference value (step S2006). Here, when increasing the acquired number displayed in the number display image G31, the value to be added to the acquired number in one update timing of the number display image G31 is limited to a predetermined limit value. As a result, when the acquired number increases, the period in which the display of the acquired number is increased in the number display image G31 can be easily continued for a long time, and the acquired number increases in the open / close execution mode. It is easier to give the player the impression of being.

  At one update timing of the number display image G31, a plurality of types of values to be added to the acquired number are set, and specifically, as the value to be added, the first addition target value “5” is set. , The second addition target value “3” smaller than the first addition target value, and the third addition target value “1” smaller than the second addition target value are set. When the value of the reflection counter 167 is larger than the value of “12” set in advance as the first reference value, “5” is selected as a value to be added, and the value of the reflection counter 167 becomes When the value is larger than the value of “5” set in advance as the second reference value that is smaller than the first reference value, “3” is selected as the value to be added, and the value of the reflection counter 167 is set. Is smaller than or equal to the value "5", "1" is selected as the value to be added. Thus, it is possible to suppress an extremely large value of the increase in the number of acquisitions waiting in the reflection counter 167 without being reflected in the display of the number of acquisitions in the number display image G31. At the same time, it is possible to diversify the manner of increasing the acquired number in the number display image G31.

  Incidentally, when the payout motor 56a is operating at a normal speed, the payout device 56 pays out one game ball every 24 msec. The firing cycle of the game ball is 60 msec. On the other hand, the output cycle of the measurement command by the sound light side MPU 62 is about 720 msec. Then, the value of “18” is set as the maximum value of the increase in the number of acquisitions included in the measurement command for increase, so that the situation where the value of the reflection counter 167 becomes larger than the first reference value is as follows. Can occur.

  More specifically, when the value of the reflection counter 167 is larger than the first reference value (step S2006: YES), the first addition target value is added to the total counter 168 (step S2007). ), The first addition target value is subtracted from the reflection counter 167 (step S2008). Thus, the value of the acquired number displayed as the number display image G31 increases by the first addition target value, and the value of the increase of the acquisition number waiting in the reflection counter 167 becomes the first addition target value. Decrease.

  When the value of the reflection counter 167 is equal to or smaller than the first reference value and larger than the second reference value (step S2006: NO, step S2009: YES), the second addition target value is added to the total counter 168 ( In step S2010, the second addition target value is subtracted from the reflection counter 167 (step S2011). As a result, the value of the acquired number displayed as the number display image G31 increases by the second addition target value, and the value of the increase of the acquisition number waiting in the reflection counter 167 becomes the second addition target value. Decrease.

  When the value of the reflection counter 167 is equal to or smaller than the second reference value (step S2009: NO), the third addition target value is added to the total counter 168 (step S2012), and the reflection counter 167 outputs the third addition target value. The value is subtracted (step S2013). As a result, the value of the acquired number displayed as the number display image G31 increases by the third addition target value, and the value of the increase of the acquisition number waiting in the reflection counter 167 becomes the third addition target value. Decrease.

  When the processing in step S2004 is performed, when a negative determination is made in step S2005, when the processing in step S2008 is performed, when the processing in step S2011 is performed, or when the processing in step S2013 is performed, the total counter Image data corresponding to the value of 168 is grasped as image data to be used this time (step S2014). Then, parameter information applied to the image data is grasped (step S2015). As a result, in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605), image data for displaying the image corresponding to the current value of the total counter 168 as the number display image G31 is drawn. Set as target. In the drawing list, parameter information applied to the image data is set.

  Next, the manner in which the number display effect is executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 56A shows the transmission timing of the measurement command from the sound-light-side MPU 62, FIG. 56B shows how the value of the reflection counter 167 fluctuates, and FIG. 56C shows the number display image G31. Indicates the update timing.

  At the timing of t1, a measurement command is transmitted from the sound-light-side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 as shown in FIG. In this case, the measurement command is an increase measurement command in which “17” is set as the increase in the acquired number. Therefore, at the timing of the t1, the value of the reflection counter 167 is set to "17" as shown in FIG. However, since the timing of t1 is not the update timing of the number display image G31, the value set in the reflection counter 167 is not reflected on the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31.

  Then, at the timing of t2, the update timing of the number display image G31 is reached as shown in FIG. In this case, since the value of the reflection counter 167 is “17” which is a value larger than the first reference value, as shown in FIG. Is subtracted. Then, the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is updated to a value obtained by adding the first addition target value to the previous value.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3 and the timing of t4, the update timing of the number display image G31 is reached as shown in FIG. 56 (c). In these cases, since the value of the reflection counter 167 is equal to or less than the first reference value and larger than the second reference value, as shown in FIG. “3” which is a value to be added by 2 is subtracted. Then, the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is updated to a value obtained by adding the second addition target value to the previous value.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t5, a measurement command is transmitted from the sound-light-side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 as shown in FIG. In this case, the measurement command is a decrease measurement command in which “3” is set as the decrease in the acquired number. Therefore, at the timing of t5, the value of the reflection counter 167 is updated to “3” by subtracting “3” from “6” as shown in FIG. 56 (b).

  Thereafter, at each of the timing of t6 and the timing of t7, the update timing of the number display image G31 is reached as shown in FIG. 56 (c). In these cases, since the value of the reflection counter 167 is equal to or smaller than the second reference value, the third addition target value “1” is subtracted from the value of the reflection counter 167 as shown in FIG. Then, the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is updated to a value obtained by adding the third addition target value to the previous value.

  Thereafter, at the timing t8, a measurement command is transmitted from the sound-light-side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 as shown in FIG. In this case, the measurement command is an increase measurement command in which “5” is set as the increase in the acquired number. Therefore, at the timing of t8, the value of the reflection counter 167 is incremented by 5 from "1" and updated to "6" as shown in FIG. 56 (b).

  Thereafter, at the timing of t9, the update timing of the number display image G31 is reached as shown in FIG. In this case, the value of the reflection counter 167 is again a value larger than the second reference value, and as shown in FIG. Is subtracted. Then, the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is updated to a value obtained by adding the second addition target value to the previous value.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t10, the timing of t12, and the timing of t13, the update timing of the number display image G31 is reached as shown in FIG. 56 (c). In these cases, since the value of the reflection counter 167 is equal to or smaller than the second reference value, the third addition target value “1” is subtracted from the value of the reflection counter 167 as shown in FIG. Then, the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is updated to a value obtained by adding the third addition target value to the previous value. Although the measurement command is transmitted at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. 56 (a), since the measurement command is set to “0” as information on the increase or decrease of the acquired number, the reflection counter is used. The value of 167 has not been changed.

  Thereafter, at time t14, the update timing of the number display image G31 is reached as shown in FIG. 56 (c). However, since the value of the reflection counter 167 is "0" as shown in FIG. 56 (b), The value of the reflection counter 167 is maintained as it is, and the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is also maintained as it is.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t15, a measurement command is transmitted from the sound-light-side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 as shown in FIG. In this case, the measurement command is a decrease measurement command in which “5” is set as the decrease in the acquired number. Therefore, at the timing of the time t15, the value of the reflection counter 167 is updated by subtracting 5 from “0” as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t16, the update timing of the number display image G31 is reached as shown in FIG. In this case, the value of the reflection counter 167 is a negative value corresponding to a decrease in the acquired number. When the value of the reflection counter 167 is a negative value corresponding to a decrease in the number of acquisitions, the value is reflected in the display of the number of acquisitions at a time regardless of the value. Therefore, the value of the reflection counter 167 is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG.

  As described above, the acquired number of game balls since the opening / closing execution mode was started as a number display effect is displayed while fluctuating according to the increase or decrease of the actual acquired number. Also, the player can grasp the number of game balls obtained up to that point. In this case, when increasing the acquired number displayed in the number display image G31, the value to be added to the acquired number in one update timing of the number display image G31 is limited to a predetermined limit value. As a result, when the acquired number increases, the period in which the display of the acquired number is increased in the number display image G31 can be easily continued for a long time, and the acquired number increases in the open / close execution mode. It is easier to give the player the impression of being.

  A plurality of types of values to be added to the acquired number in one update timing of the number display image G31 are set. Then, as the value of the reflection counter 167 increases, the value to be added to the acquired number at one update timing of the number display image G31 increases, and as the value of the reflection counter 167 decreases, the value of the number display image G31 decreases. At the update timing, the value to be added to the acquired number becomes a small value. Thus, it is possible to suppress an extremely large value of the increase in the number of acquisitions waiting in the reflection counter 167 without being reflected in the display of the number of acquisitions in the number display image G31. At the same time, it is possible to diversify the manner of increasing the acquired number in the number display image G31.

  Even if the value of the reflection counter 167 becomes equal to or less than the first reference value and the second addition target value is added to the display of the acquired number of the number display image G31, the value of the reflection counter 167 is thereafter changed to a value. When the value becomes larger than the first reference value, the state returns to the state where the first addition target value is added to the display of the acquired number of the number display image G31. This makes it possible to update the display of the acquired number in a manner appropriate for the situation at each update timing of the number display image G31.

  If the value of the reflection counter 167 is a negative value corresponding to the decrease in the number of acquisitions, the value of the decrease is collectively obtained at once in the number display image G31 regardless of the value of the reflection counter 167. It is reflected in the display of the number. As a result, it is possible to prevent a period in which the display of the acquired number is updated so as to be reduced from continuing for a long time. Further, when the value of the reflection counter 167 becomes a negative value, the value of the reflection counter 167 can be cleared to “0” at one update timing of the number display image G31, and thereafter, the reflection is performed. It is possible to make the value of the counter 167 easily become a positive value. Therefore, it is possible to generate many opportunities to be updated so that the display of the acquired number is increased.

<Another form of number display effect>
When the prize ball command is transmitted to the MPU 159a of the payout control device 55 instead of the configuration in which the prize ball completion command is transmitted from the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 to the sound light side MPU 62, the same prize ball command is transmitted. It may be configured to transmit to the side MPU 62. In this case, the number of game balls that are not actually paid out but are scheduled to be paid out is added to the display of the acquired number.

  The configuration is such that the number of launched game balls detected by the launched ball detection sensor 155 and the number of returned game balls detected by the returned ball detection sensor 156 are reflected in the display of the acquired number. One or both may not be reflected in the display of the acquired number.

  -The number display effect is configured to be started when the opening period is started in the open / close execution mode, but instead is started when the opening period ends and the first round game start is started. It may be configured.

  -Although the number display effect is configured to end when one open / close execution mode ends, if the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode, the number display effect is performed in the high frequency support mode. When the open / close execution mode occurs more than once without interposing the low frequency support mode, the number of game balls acquired since the first open / close execution mode is started is continuously displayed. It may be. In addition, when the jackpot occurrence lottery mode becomes the high probability mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode, the number display effect is continued in the high probability mode, and the opening and closing execution mode is generated a plurality of times without interposing the low probability mode. In this case, the acquired number of game balls since the first opening / closing execution mode is started may be continuously displayed.

  -It is possible to specify whether or not the shooting operation is being performed on the firing operation device 28, and according to whether or not the firing operation is being performed on the firing operation device 28, the number display image G31 The value to be added to the acquired number may be changed at one update timing. For example, even if the values for which the number of acquisitions is to be added are the same, one update of the number display image G31 is performed in the situation where the firing operation is performed than in the state where the firing operation is not performed. A configuration may be adopted in which the value to be added to the acquired number at the timing becomes a large value or easily becomes a large value, or a configuration that becomes a small value or easily becomes a small value. In addition, as a configuration that can specify whether or not a situation in which a firing operation is being performed on the firing operation device 28, a touch sensor that detects that a player is touching the firing operation device 28 May be provided to specify that the shooting operation is being performed when the touch sensor is ON. In addition to or instead of the configuration, the amount of rotation operation of the firing operation device 28 may be determined. A configuration in which a firing operation is performed when the detection result of the variable resistor corresponds to a result that the rotation operation amount is equal to or more than a predetermined amount is provided. It may be.

<Another form of number display effect>
The target to which the number display effect is applied is not limited to the effect for displaying the acquired number of game balls in the opening and closing execution mode, and is arbitrary. For example, in the case where the number of remaining continuation games in the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player such as the RT game, the AT game, or the ART game in the slot machine can increase in the middle of the advantageous gaming state, the remaining continuation is displayed as a number display effect. It is good also as a structure which performs the increase display effect which shows a mode that the number of games increases. The calculation processing for increase display executed by the display CPU 72 to perform the increase display effect will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  When an opportunity to increase the number of remaining continuous games in the advantageous game state occurs, an increase display effect is started. If it is the start timing of the increase display effect (step S2101: YES), a division process of the target increase value is executed (step S2102). In the division processing of the target increase value, the target increase value determined as the number of games to be increased to the remaining number of continuous games in the advantageous gaming state is divided by a predetermined division value “100”. Multiple types of target increase values are set, and all of these multiple types of target increase values are set so that the value of the quotient when divided by the divided value is 8 or less, and when divided by the divided value Are set to be different from each other. Specifically, “50”, “100”, and “250” are set as the target increase values. When the target increase value is “50”, the result of division by the division value is that the quotient is “0” and the remainder is “50”, and when the target increase value is “100”, the result is divided by the division value. As a result, the quotient is “1” and the remainder is “0”, and when the target increase value is “250”, the result of division by the division value is “2” and the remainder is “50”.

  When the division process of the target increase value is performed, a value obtained by adding “1” to the quotient value derived by the division process is stored in the work RAM 73 as a unit increase value (step S2103). The unit increase value is a value that increases the display of the remaining number of continuous games displayed on the symbol display device 41 as the increase display effect at one update timing of the display. As described above, the quotient of the result of the division by the division value differs depending on the type of the target increase value, so that the unit increase value also differs depending on the type of the target increase value.

  Thereafter, a setting process of a unit increase counter provided in the work RAM 73 is executed (step S2104). The unit increase counter is a counter for specifying, by the display CPU 72, the number of times the display by the increase display effect is updated in the present increase display effect. In step S2104, the current target increase value is divided by the unit increase value derived in step S2103. Then, the value of the quotient calculated by the division is set in a unit increase counter. For example, when the target increase value is “250”, the unit increase value is “3”. When the target increase value is divided by this unit increase value, the quotient is “83” and the remainder is “1”. In this case, “83” is set in the unit increase counter. If the result of dividing the target increase value by the unit increase value indicates that the remainder is 1 or more, the remainder is stored in the work RAM 73 as a remaining numerical value (step S2105).

  When the process of step S2105 is executed or when it is the update display effect update timing (step S2106: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the unit increase counter of the work RAM 73 is 1 or more (step S2107). If the value of the unit increment counter is 1 or more (step S2107: YES), the unit increment value calculated in step S2103 is added to the current value of the total counter provided in the work RAM 73 (step S2108). ). The total counter is a counter that determines the value when the remaining number of continuous games is displayed as the game number image, and the value stored in the total counter is displayed as the game number image. When the increase display effect is started, the remaining number of continuous games at that time is set in the total counter.

  In step S2108, the unit increase value is added to the current value of the total counter, so that the value of the game number image increases by the unit increase value from the current value. Thereafter, the value of the unit increase counter is decremented by 1 (step S2109).

  If the value of the unit increase counter is “0” (step S2107: NO), the remaining value is added to the total counter, provided that the remaining value is stored in the work RAM 73 (step S2110: YES) (step S2110: YES). Step S2111). Thereby, the value of the game number image increases from the current value by the remaining numerical value.

  When the processing in step S2109 is performed, when a negative determination is made in step S2110, or when the processing in step S2111 is performed, the image data corresponding to the value of the total counter is grasped as the image data to be used this time. (Step S2112). Then, parameter information applied to the image data is grasped (step S2113). As a result, in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605), image data for displaying an image corresponding to the current value of the total counter as a game number image is set as a drawing target. Is set. In the drawing list, parameter information applied to the image data is set.

  According to the above configuration, when an effect is executed in which the number of remaining continuous games in the advantageous gaming state increases, the target increase value is added to the number of continuous games because the unit increase value varies according to the target increase value. In this case, it is possible to diversify the manner of increasing the number of games at each update timing of the number-of-games image.

  Further, even when the mode of increasing the number of continuous games is diversified as described above, the processing configuration for determining the unit increase value, the processing configuration for setting the value of the unit increase counter, and the game number image The processing configuration for updating is constant regardless of the type of target increase value. This makes it possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects while simplifying the processing configuration.

  Further, since the unit increase value is set according to the target increase value, it is possible to make the player predict the target increase value by checking the unit increase value. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the update mode of the game number image, and as a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the increased display effect.

  Note that a configuration may be employed in which a plurality of types of division values for executing the division processing of the target increase value (step S2102) are prepared, and the division processing is executed using the division value determined by lottery. In this case, it is possible to diversify the mode of increase in the number of games at each update timing of the game number image when the target increase value is added to the number of continuous games even if the target increase value is the same.

<Structure for performing a pseudo-movie effect>
Next, a configuration for performing a pseudo moving image effect will be described.

  The pseudo moving image effect is an effect in which moving image display is performed on the symbol display device 41 over a pseudo moving image effect period. In the pseudo moving image production period, a specific update count (for example, 600 times) in which at least a part of the image displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed is updated multiple times. At each update timing of an image in the pseudo moving image effect period, one piece of still image data 171 to 173 to be used at the update timing is drawn over the entire frame regions 82a and 82b to be drawn. The image based on the single still image data 171 to 173 is displayed over the entire symbol display device 41. In this case, the number of still image data 171 to 173 to be used in the pseudo moving image effect period is smaller than the specific update count.

  More specifically, as shown in an explanatory diagram of FIG. 58, the memory module 74 stores first character image data 171 and effect image data 172 as still image data 171 to 173 for executing a pseudo moving image effect. , And the second character image data 173 are stored in advance. As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 59 (a), the first character image data 171 includes a first pseudo moving image character G42 representing a person and a first pseudo moving image character G42 as a first character image G41. The symbol display device 41 includes a second pseudo moving image character G43 representing a person different from the above, and a pseudo moving image background G44 displayed behind the first pseudo moving image character G42 and the second pseudo moving image character G43. Is image data to be displayed on the whole of the image data. The first character image G41 is an image captured by an imaging device such as a camera.

  As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 59B, the effect image data 172 displays, as the effect image G45, a light beam image G47 representing a state in which light is irradiated from the light source to the surroundings in front of the effect background G46. Is image data for displaying an image to be displayed on the entire design display device 41. The effect image G45 is an image for enhancing a visual effect, and in addition to the ray image G47, an image representing a blast, an image representing water droplets, and an aura representing the area around the character as if it is emitting light. Examples include images. The effect image G45 is an image created using software for creating an image.

  As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 59C, the second character image data 173 includes a first pseudo moving image character G42 and a second pseudo moving image character G42, as in the case of the first character image G41. 2 This is image data for displaying a pseudo moving image character G43 and a pseudo moving image background G44 on the entire design display device 41. The second character image G48 is an image captured by an imaging device such as a camera.

  However, the display mode of the first pseudo moving image character G42 and the second pseudo moving image character G43 based on the second character image data 173 is the first pseudo moving image character G42 and the second pseudo moving image based on the first character image data 171. Display mode of the display character G43. Specifically, the shape of the hand region representing the hand, which is a partial region of the first pseudo moving image character G42, the orientation of the body region representing the body, the relative position of the hand region with respect to the body region, and the like are represented by the first character. Image G41 and the second character image G48 are different. In addition, the shape of the hand region representing the hand, which is a partial region in the second pseudo moving image character G43, the orientation of the body region representing the body, the relative position of the hand region with respect to the body region, and the like are included in the first character image G41. And the second character image G48.

  Between the first character image G41 and the second character image G48, the display mode of the first pseudo moving image character G42 is not continuous, and similarly, the display mode of the second pseudo moving image character G43 is also continuous. There is no. The lack of continuity in the display mode of the first pseudo moving image character G42 means that the shape of the predetermined region such as the hand region of the first pseudo moving image character G42 in the second character image G48, and the predetermined region and the first pseudo This means that the relative position between the moving image character G42 and the other area is different from the mode at the update timing of the next image assumed from the display mode of the first character image G41. Similarly, that the display mode of the second pseudo moving image character G43 is not continuous means that the shape of the predetermined region such as the hand region of the second pseudo moving image character G43 in the second character image G48 and the predetermined region This means that the relative position between the image and the other area of the second pseudo moving image character G43 is different from the state at the update timing of the next image assumed from the display state of the first character image G41.

  A second display period for displaying the effect image G45 is set between a first display period for displaying the first character image G41 and a third display period for displaying the second character image G48. Thereby, each pseudo-moving image between the first character image G41 and the second character image G48 is displayed more than the case where the second character image G48 is displayed immediately after the first character image G41 is displayed. The discontinuity of the characters G42 and G43 becomes less noticeable. Then, the pseudo moving image characters G42, G43 are displayed in different display modes in the first display period and the third display period, respectively, while making the discontinuity of the pseudo moving image characters G42, G43 inconspicuous. Thus, while using the character image data 171 and 173 in which the number of character image data 171 and 173 is small with respect to the image update timing and the operation of each pseudo moving image character G42 and G43 is not continuous, It is possible for the player to recognize that the moving image characters G42 and G43 are being displayed.

  In the first display period in which the first character image G41 is displayed, the second display period in which the effect image G45 is displayed, and the third display period in which the second character image G48 is displayed, image update timing occurs a plurality of times. The display periods are the same period. In a configuration in which the image update timing occurs a plurality of times in each of the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period, one type of image data 171 to 173 to be used in each display period is already described. Only. However, in each of the display periods, the manner of drawing the image data 171 to 173 to be used on the frame areas 82a and 82b is changed at each update timing. Specifically, in each of the image data 171 to 173, the range to be drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn is sequentially changed. Hereinafter, the configuration will be described.

  FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a manner in which the ranges to be drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn in the respective image data 171 to 173 are different.

  When the drawing data is created in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn in the VDP 76, the data is written to all the unit areas of the frame areas 82a and 82b, but the resolution of each frame area 82a and 82b is 800 × 600. It is the number of dots. On the other hand, the first character image data 171, the effect image data 172, and the second character image data 173 have a larger number of dots than the frame areas 82 a and 82 b in the size stored in the memory module 74. It is the number of pixels. The range that can be drawn by the image data 171 to 173 at the initial magnification is larger than the frame areas 82a and 82b in both the horizontal dimension and the vertical dimension. This makes it possible to make the range to be drawn different for one type of image data 171 to 173 used in each display period. Further, even if the range to be drawn is different in the one type of image data 171 to 173 to be used as described above, the one type of image data 171 to 173 is used in the entire symbol display device 41. Can be displayed.

  The sizes of the first character image data 171, the effect image data 172, and the second character image data 173 stored in the memory module 74 are the same. The manner in which the range to be drawn in each of the image data 171 to 173 is different is the same in any of the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period. Specifically, at the start timing of each display period, the range of the image data 171 to 173 to be used, which is closer to a predetermined corner, is set as the range to be drawn. Then, at a subsequent image update timing, the changing mode of the drawing target range is changed so that the drawing target range gradually moves toward the corner opposite to the predetermined corner. Is set.

  As shown in FIG. 58, data for changing the range to be drawn is stored in the memory module 74 in advance as a pseudo moving image table 174. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the pseudo moving image table 174. As shown in FIG. 61, pointer information that is a serial number is set in the pseudo moving image table 174, and drawing range information that determines a range to be drawn in accordance with each pointer information is set. . The pointer information is set for the number of image update timings that occur in each display period. Thus, by referring to the pseudo moving image table 174 in each display period, it is possible to derive drawing range information corresponding to all update timings. Further, since the pseudo-moving image table 174 is also used in each display period, the pseudo-moving image table 174 is stored in advance in comparison with a configuration in which the pseudo-moving image table 174 is prepared in advance for each display period. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required for storage.

  FIG. 62 is a time chart showing how the pseudo moving image effect is executed. FIG. 62 (a) shows the first display period, FIG. 62 (b) shows the second display period, FIG. 62 (c) shows the third display period, and FIG. A state in which the range to be drawn of the target image data 171 to 173 is changed is shown.

  When the pseudo moving image effect starts at the timing of t1, the first display period starts as shown in FIG. Then, the first display period is continued from timing t1 to timing t2, and during that period, the range to be drawn in the first character image data 171 as shown in FIG. It is gradually changed while having a certain direction.

  At the timing of t2, the first display period ends as shown in FIG. 62A, and the second display period starts as shown in FIG. 62B. Then, the second display period continues from the timing t2 to the timing t3, during which the range to be drawn in the effect image data 172 is fixed in a certain direction as shown in FIG. It is gradually changed while having sex. The directionality and the shift amount of the drawing range between successive update timings are the same as in the first display period.

  At the timing of t3, the second display period ends as shown in FIG. 62 (b), and the third display period starts as shown in FIG. 62 (c). The third display period continues from the timing t3 to the timing t4. During that period, the range to be drawn in the second character image data 173 as shown in FIG. It is gradually changed while having a certain direction. The directionality and the shift amount of the drawing range between successive update timings are the same as those in the first display period and the second display period.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the pseudo moving image effect will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a pseudo moving image effect calculation process executed by the display CPU 72. Note that the calculation processing for the pseudo moving image effect is executed in the effect calculation processing of step S704 in the task processing (FIG. 19) in a situation where the pseudo moving image effect is to be executed.

  If it is the first display period (step S2201: YES), it is determined whether this time is the start timing of the first display period (step S2202). Note that the display CPU 72 reads out an execution target table for controlling the entire flow of the pseudo moving image effect from the memory module 74 when starting the pseudo moving image effect, and refers to the execution target table to determine which time this time. It is specified whether the display period is met and whether or not it is the start timing of each display period.

  If it is the start timing of the first display period (step S2202: YES), the pseudo moving image table 174 is read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 (step S2203). If a negative determination is made in step S2202, or if the process in step S2203 is performed, the first character image data 171 is grasped as image data to be used this time (step S2204). Also, the drawing range information set in the pseudo moving image table 174 in correspondence with the pointer information currently being referred to is grasped (step S2205). Thereafter, after grasping parameter information other than the drawing range information (step S2206), the pointer information of the reference target is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be referred to in the pseudo moving image table 174 is incremented by 1 (step S2206). S2207).

  In the case where the arithmetic processing for pseudo-moving image production is executed as described above, the first character image data 171 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605). Is done. In the drawing list, the parameter information grasped in steps S2205 and S2206 is set.

  If it is the second display period (step S2201: NO, step S2208: YES), it is determined whether this time is the start timing of the second display period (step S2209). If it is the start timing of the second display period (step S2209: YES), the value of the pointer information of the reference target in the pseudo moving image table 174 already read out to the work RAM 73 in the first display period is cleared to “0”. (Step S2210). As a result, the drawing range information set corresponding to the first pointer information in the pseudo moving image table 174 becomes a use target at the start timing of the second display period.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2209 or when the process in step S2210 is performed, the effect image data 172 is grasped as image data to be used this time (step S2211). In addition, the drawing range information set in the pseudo moving image table 174 in association with the current pointer information to be referred to is grasped (step S2212). Thereafter, after the parameter information other than the drawing range information is grasped (step S2213), the pointer information of the reference target is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be referred to in the pseudo moving image table 174 is incremented by 1 (step S2213). S2214).

  When the operation processing for pseudo-moving image production is executed as described above, the effect image data 172 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605). In the drawing list, parameter information grasped in steps S2212 and S2213 is set.

  If it is the third display period (step S2201 and step S2208: NO), it is determined whether or not this time is the start timing of the third display period (step S2215). If it is the start timing of the third display period (step S2215: YES), the value of the pointer information of the reference target in the pseudo moving image table 174 already read out to the work RAM 73 in the first display period is cleared to “0”. (Step S2216). As a result, the drawing range information set in association with the first pointer information in the pseudo moving image table 174 is used at the start timing of the third display period.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2215 or if the process in step S2216 is performed, the image data 173 for the second character is grasped as image data to be used this time (step S2217). In addition, the drawing range information set in the pseudo moving image table 174 in association with the current pointer information to be referred to is grasped (step S2218). Thereafter, after grasping the parameter information other than the drawing range information (step S2219), the pointer information of the reference target is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be referred to in the pseudo moving image table 174 is incremented by 1 (step S2219). S2220).

  In the case where the calculation processing for pseudo-moving image production is executed as described above, the image data 173 for the second character is set as a drawing target in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605). Is done. In the drawing list, parameter information grasped in steps S2218 and S2219 is set.

  Here, the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 are used individually in an effect different from the pseudo moving image effect. Specifically, the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 are used as display images of a round effect executed during different round games in the open / close execution mode that is the high-frequency winning mode. . FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for a round effect executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation processing for the round effect is performed in the effect calculation process of step S704 in the task process (FIG. 19) in a situation where the round effect is to be executed.

  If it is the execution period of the first round game (step S2301: YES), the first character image data 171 is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S2302), and the other image data is used as the image data to be used this time. It is grasped (step S2303). Thereafter, parameter information applied to the image data is grasped (step S2304). When the calculation processing for the round effect is thus performed, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605) is grasped by the first character image data 171 and step S2303. Image data is set as a drawing target. In the drawing list, parameter information grasped in step S2304 is set.

  If it is the execution period of the eighth round game (step S2305: YES), the image data 173 for the second character is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S2306), and the other image data is used as the image data to be used this time. (Step S2307). After that, parameter information applied to these image data is grasped (step S2308). When the calculation processing for the round effect is thus performed, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605) is based on the second character image data 173 and the step S2307. Image data is set as a drawing target. The parameter information obtained in step S2308 is set in the drawing list.

  If it is not the first round game or the eighth round game, other processing is executed (step S2309). In this case, the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 are not selected as image data to be used.

  As described above, the second display period for displaying the effect image G45 is set between the first display period for displaying the first character image G41 and the third display period for displaying the second character image G48. ing. Thereby, each pseudo-moving image between the first character image G41 and the second character image G48 is displayed more than the case where the second character image G48 is displayed immediately after the first character image G41 is displayed. The discontinuity of the characters G42 and G43 becomes less noticeable. Then, the pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 are displayed in different display modes during the first display period and the second display period, respectively, while making the discontinuity of the pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 inconspicuous. Thus, while using the character image data 171 and 173 in which the number of character image data 171 and 173 is small with respect to the image update timing and the operation of each pseudo moving image character G42 and G43 is not continuous, It is possible for the player to recognize that the moving image characters G42 and G43 are being displayed.

  In particular, the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 are image data prepared for displaying images for round effects in different round games, respectively. The continuity of the motion of each of the pseudo-moving characters G42 and G43 between the image G41 and the second character image G48 is not required. In this case, the display period of the first character image G41 and the display period of the second character image G48 are generated so as to sandwich the display period of the effect image G45 as described above, so that the image for the round effect is displayed. Using the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 prepared for display, a pseudo moving image effect can be executed.

  The drawing mode of the image data 171 to 173 to be used in the frame areas 82a and 82b in each display period of the pseudo moving image effect is changed at each update timing. This makes it possible to display a moving image while using one type of image data 171 to 173 in each display period.

  The pseudo moving image table 174 for changing the drawing mode of the image data 171 to 173 to be used in the frame regions 82a and 82b in each display period of the pseudo moving image effect is also used in each display period. This makes it possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects while suppressing the required storage capacity of the memory module 74.

<Another form related to pseudo animation production>
The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which only two types of character image data 171 and 173 for displaying the pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 are present, but may be a configuration in which three or more types are present. For example, apart from the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173, each pseudo moving image character G42, G43 is displayed, and the first character image G41 and the second character image G48 are each pseudo image. The image data for the third character that changes the display mode of the moving-image characters G42 and G43 may be stored in the memory module 74 in advance. In this case, as the pseudo moving image effect period, the first display period in which the first character image data 171 is used, the second display period in which the effect image data 172 is used, and the second character image data 173. There is a third display period to be used, a fourth display period to use the effect image data 172 or an effect image data different therefrom, and a fifth display period to be used by the third character image data. Will be done.

  -Each display period of the pseudo-movie effect is not limited to a configuration in which the display periods are the same, and each display period may be a different period, but may be a configuration in which the display periods are substantially the same. At least one display period may be a period significantly different from other display periods. For example, the first display period and the second display period may be the same or substantially the same period, but the effect period may be a period longer or shorter than the first display period and the second display period. When the display periods are different from each other, the pseudo-moving image table 174 is created so as to correspond to all the update timings of the display period that is the longest of the display periods, so that the pseudo-moving image table 174 can be displayed in other display periods. The pseudo-moving image table 174 can also be used.

  If the drawing range information derived by the pseudo moving image table 174 has continuity between the start timing and the end timing, it is assumed that the pseudo moving image table 174 is used a plurality of times in one display period in the pseudo moving image effect. No discomfort occurs. In this case, it is not necessary to set data corresponding to the entire display period in the pseudo moving image table 174, and it is sufficient if only data corresponding to a part of the display period is set. is there.

  The first character image data 171, the effect image data 172, and the second character image data 173 are configured to be larger than the frame areas 82 a and 82 b in the size of the initial magnification stored in the memory module 74. There is no limitation, and the size of the initial magnification is the same as or smaller than the frame areas 82a and 82b, and is enlarged to be larger than the frame areas 82a and 82b after reading from the memory module 74. The configuration in which the processing is executed may be adopted. In this case, when the image for the round effect is used to display the image for the round effect, the image data for the first character 171 and the image data for the second character 173 are used at the size of the initial magnification, and the image for the pseudo moving image effect is generated. When used for display, the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 may be used in a size enlarged from the size of the initial magnification.

  A method for changing the drawing mode of the image data 171 to 173 to be used in the frame areas 82a and 82b at each update timing in each display period of the pseudo moving image effect is to be drawn in the image data 171 to 173. It is not limited to the method of making the range different. For example, a method may be used in which the range to be drawn in the image data 171 to 173 is gradually narrowed so that the image to be displayed is gradually enlarged. Alternatively, a method may be used in which the range to be drawn in the image data 171 to 173 is gradually widened so that the image to be displayed is gradually reduced as a result.

  The first character image data 171 is not limited to a configuration in which only the first character image data 171 is used in the first display period of the pseudo moving image effect, and the first character image data 171 is framed in the first display period. After drawing in the regions 82a and 82b, another image data may be drawn in a part of the frame regions 82a and 82b. Even in this case, the image G41 for the first character is displayed behind the other image data, and the effect image G45 is displayed between the image G41 for the first character and the image G48 for the second character. By displaying, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the moving image by each pseudo moving image character G42, G43 is displayed.

<Another form of pseudo animation production>
65 (a) to 65 (c) are also conceivable as modes of the pseudo moving image effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65 (a) and FIG. 65 (c), in the pseudo moving image effect, a pseudo moving image character G51 is displayed. First pseudo moving image image data and second pseudo moving image data are stored in the memory module 74 in advance as image data for displaying the pseudo moving image character G51, and the first pseudo moving image image data is used. As shown in FIG. 65 (a), the first pseudo moving image image G52 is displayed as a target, and the second pseudo moving image image data becomes a second target image as shown in FIG. 65 (c). The pseudo moving image G53 is displayed.

  In the first pseudo moving image image G52, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), a state before a predetermined portion G51a (specifically, both arms) of the pseudo moving image character G51 moves along a predetermined motion path is displayed. In the pseudo-moving image G53, a state after the predetermined portion G51a of the pseudo-moving character G51 has moved along a predetermined motion path is displayed as shown in FIG. 65 (c). However, the position of the predetermined portion G51a of the pseudo moving image character G51 between the first pseudo moving image G52 and the second pseudo moving image G53 is so far as to make it difficult for the player to recognize the continuity of movement. .

  On the other hand, between the display period of the first pseudo moving image G52 and the display period of the second pseudo moving image G53, the pseudo moving image effect image G54 is displayed as shown in FIG. . In the pseudo moving image effect image G54, many small individual images G54a such as bubbles are displayed. Further, the pseudo moving image effect image G54 is displayed over a predetermined period, and in the predetermined period, a large number of small individual images G54a move in the moving direction of the pseudo moving image character G51 along the predetermined motion path in the predetermined portion G51a. A moving image is displayed so as to move in the same direction as.

  With the above configuration, the position of the predetermined portion G51a of the pseudo moving image character G51 between the first pseudo moving image G52 and the second pseudo moving image G53 makes it difficult for the player to recognize the continuity of movement. Even if the configuration is far apart, the visual effect caused by the movement of the small individual image G54a in the pseudo moving image effect image G54 causes the visual effect between the first pseudo moving image G52 and the second pseudo moving image G53. It is possible for the player to recognize that the predetermined portion G51a has moved along the predetermined motion path. Thus, even when the number of pieces of pseudo moving image image data for displaying the pseudo moving image character G51 is small, the predetermined portion G51a between the first pseudo moving image G52 and the second pseudo moving image G53. It is possible to make the player recognize that the moving image display of the pseudo moving image character G51 is being performed while making the discontinuity of the position inconspicuous.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, an electrical configuration related to display control is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, differences from the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration according to the present embodiment.

  The configuration shown in FIG. 66 includes a main control device 50 as in the first embodiment. Further, the main control device 50 includes a payout control device 55 for controlling the payout device 56, and a power supply and a power supply for performing a function of supplying power to each device including the main control device 50 and for driving and controlling the game ball firing mechanism 58. The launch control device 57, the special figure unit 37 for displaying the result of the game round, and the general figure unit 38 for displaying the result of the open-pull lottery are electrically connected. In addition, an audio light emission control device 60 that controls driving of the display light emitting unit 44 and the speaker unit 45 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 50 is provided. A display control device 200 that controls the symbol display device 41 based on the display control device is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 66, the display control device 200 includes a display control board 206 on which a display CPU 201, a work RAM 202, a memory module 203, a VRAM 204, and a video display processor (VDP) 205 are mounted. .

  The display CPU 201 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 200, and reads, interprets, and executes a control program and the like. Specifically, the display CPU 201 is connected to an input port 207 mounted on the display control board 206 via a bus, and various commands transmitted from the audio light emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 201 through the input port 207. Is done.

  The display CPU 201 is connected to the work RAM 202, the memory module 203, and the VRAM 204 via a bus, and transfers various data stored in the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 based on a command received from the sound emission control device 60. Instructs transfer. The display CPU 201 is connected to the VDP 205 via a bus, and issues a drawing instruction for displaying a three-dimensional image (3D image) on the symbol display device 41 based on a command received from the audio light emission control device 60. Do. Hereinafter, the memory module 203, the work RAM 202, the VRAM 204, and the VDP 205 will be described.

  The memory module 203 stores control data including a control program and fixed value data in advance, and also stores various image data for displaying a three-dimensional image in advance. The memory module 203 includes a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require external power supply for storing and storing. Incidentally, the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 200 is executed well. When the pachinko machine 10 is used, the memory module 203 is used as a non-writing and read-only memory (ROM).

  The various types of image data stored in the memory module 203 include object data such as symbols and characters displayed on the symbol display device 41, texture data to be pasted on the object data, and the rearmost one-frame image. And image data for the back surface which constitutes the image of FIG.

  Here, the object data is a three-dimensional virtual object arranged in a world coordinate system which is a three-dimensional coordinate system corresponding to a virtual three-dimensional space, and is three-dimensional information constituted by a plurality of polygons. A polygon is a polygon plane defined by a plurality of vertices of three-dimensional coordinates. In order to apply, for example, a surface model to the object data, vertex coordinate information of each polygon is set with reference coordinates set in advance for each object data as the origin. That is, in each object data, the relative position (ie, direction and size) of each polygon is three-dimensionally defined in a self-contained local coordinate system.

  The texture data is an image to be pasted on each polygon of the object data. When the texture data is pasted on the object data, an image corresponding to the object data, for example, a display image including a design or a character is generated. The manner of holding the texture data is arbitrary, but includes at least a combination of, for example, bitmap format data and a color palette referred to when determining a display color at each pixel of the bitmap image.

  The rearmost image forms a two-dimensional image (2D image). The way of holding the image data for the back side is arbitrary, but for example, two-dimensional still image data is stored and held as compressed JPEG format data. Incidentally, when the back image data is arranged in the world coordinate system, plate-shaped object data (that is, plate polygon) is used.

  The work RAM 202 is a storage unit for temporarily storing control data read and transferred from the memory module 203 and temporarily storing flags and the like. The work RAM 202 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for storing and holding, and a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory in detail. However, the present invention is not limited to a DRAM, and another RAM such as an SRAM may be used. Although the storage capacity is 1 Gbit, the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 200 is performed well. The work RAM 202 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  Control data is transferred from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 201 to the memory module 203. Then, the display CPU 201 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 202 into an internal memory area (register group) as necessary, and executes various processes.

  The VRAM 204 is storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for outputting an image to the symbol display device 41. The VRAM 204 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for storing and holding data. In detail, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the present invention is not limited to the SDRAM, and another RAM such as a DRAM, an SRAM, or a dual port RAM may be used. Although the storage capacity is 2 Gbits, the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 200 is performed well. The VRAM 204 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  The VRAM 204 includes an expansion buffer 211, and image data is transferred from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 based on a data transfer instruction from the VDP 205 to the memory module 203. Further, the VRAM 204 is provided with a frame buffer 212 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 205.

  The VDP 205 is an image generation device that performs drawing on the symbol display device 41 by processing the data based on the drawing instruction from the display CPU 201 and specifically using the data stored in the expansion buffer 211. This is a kind of drawing circuit that operates an image processing device 41b incorporated to drive and control the liquid crystal display unit 41a in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP 205 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 205 is a microcomputer chip having firmware dedicated for drawing.

  Specifically, the VDP 205 includes a geometry calculation unit 221, a rendering unit 222, a register 223, and a display circuit 225. These circuits are connected to each other via a bus, and are also connected to an I / F 226 for the display CPU 201 and an I / F 227 for the VRAM 204.

  The I / F 226 for the display CPU 201 causes the register 223 to store a drawing list as drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 201. The geometry calculation unit 221 reads out various types of image data stored in the memory module 203 to the development buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 based on the drawing list stored in the register 223. In addition, the geometry calculation unit 221 places the object data specified as the placement target in the world coordinate system. Further, the geometry operation unit 221 executes various coordinate conversion processes when and after arranging the object data in the world coordinate system. Then, the object is finally clipped corresponding to the three-dimensional space corresponding to the screen coordinates of the display surface P.

  Based on the drawing list stored in the register 223, the rendering unit 222 adjusts the light source and pastes texture data on each clipped object data to determine the appearance of the object data. Also, the rendering unit 222 projects each object data onto a predetermined two-dimensional plane to create two-dimensional data, performs various adjustments based on depth information, and renders one frame of the two-dimensional data as frame data. It is created in the buffer 212. The rendering data for one frame is data necessary for displaying an image at one update timing in a configuration in which an image on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 is updated at a predetermined update timing. Say.

  It should be noted that all of the control programs for operating the geometry calculation unit 221 and the rendering unit 222 may be provided in the form of a drawing list. A memory in which the control programs are stored in advance is built in the VDP 205, and the control program and the drawing list are stored. The configuration may be such that the geometry calculation unit 221 and the rendering unit 222 execute processing according to the contents of the above. Further, the configuration may be such that the control program is read from the memory module 203 in advance. Further, the configuration may be such that the geometry calculation unit 221 and the rendering unit 222 execute processing only by the operation of the hardware circuit corresponding to the drawing list without using a program.

  Here, the frame buffer 212 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 212a and 212b. Specifically, a first frame area 212a and a second frame area 212b are provided. Each of these frame areas 212a and 212b is set to a capacity capable of storing one frame of drawing data. Specifically, each of the frame regions 212a and 212b includes a number of unit areas corresponding to dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display unit 41a (that is, the display surface P) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color is to be displayed. More specifically, a full-color method is adopted, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) in each dot. Correspondingly, in each unit area, one byte (8 bits) is allocated to each color of RGB. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the full-color system. For example, in a configuration in which only 256 colors can be displayed in each dot, the storage capacity required for storing color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

  Since the frame buffer 212 is provided with the first frame area 212a and the second frame area 212b, in a situation where drawing on the symbol display device 41 is executed using drawing data created in one frame area. Then, creation of drawing data to be used in the future for other frame areas is executed. That is, the frame buffer 212 employs the double buffer method.

  In the display circuit 225, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display unit 41a is generated based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 212a or the second frame area 212b, and the image signal is transmitted to the display circuit 225. It is output to the symbol display device 41 via the connected output port 208. More specifically, drawing data is transferred from the output target frame areas 212a and 212b to the display circuit 225. The transferred drawing data is converted into gradation data by adjusting the resolution by a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the symbol display device 41. Then, based on the gradation data, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the symbol display device 41 is generated and output. Note that the display circuit 225 also outputs a synchronization signal such as a horizontal synchronization signal or a vertical synchronization signal.

<Basic Processing in Display CPU 201>
Next, basic processing in the display CPU 201 will be described.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing in this embodiment. In the V interrupt processing, if this time is the start timing of the power supply to the display CPU 201 (step S2401: YES), all the texture data stored in advance in the memory module 203 is provided in the development buffer 211 of the VRAM 204. The data is read out to the texture area 211a (step S2402).

  If a negative determination is made in step S2401 or if the process in step S2402 is performed, a command analysis process is performed (step S2403). Specifically, the contents of the command stored in the command buffer of the work RAM 202 are analyzed. Here, when the display CPU 201 receives the strobe signal from the sound-light-side MPU 62, the display CPU 201 executes the command interrupt processing regardless of what processing is being executed at that time. In the command interrupt processing, the command received at the input port 207 is transferred to a command buffer provided in the work RAM 202.

  Thereafter, on condition that the result of the command analysis process corresponds to the result of receiving the new command (step S2404: YES), the command corresponding process is executed (step S2405). In the command corresponding process, an execution target table for executing a program corresponding to the received command is read from the memory module 203. The execution target table is an information group in which processing required to display an image for one frame at each update timing of an image when displaying a moving image corresponding to the received command on the symbol display device 41 is defined. is there.

  As the command that the display CPU 201 receives from the sound-light-side MPU 62, as in the first embodiment, a command at the start of fluctuation, a command at the start of a notice effect, a command at the start of normal reach, a command at the start of super reach, There are a command at the start of the fixed effect, a command at the start of the standby display, a command at the start of the fixed display, and the like. When these commands are received, the execution target table necessary for executing the effect for the game corresponding to each of the commands on the symbol display device 41 is read.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2404, or if the process in step S2405 is performed, task processing is performed (step S2406). In the task processing, a drawing instruction is issued to the VDP 205 in order to display an image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing by referring to the control data of the current processing time in the data table set as the use target. Set the various data required above. As the various data, specifically, address information of an area where image data to be controlled is stored in the memory module 203, address information of an area to which the image data to be controlled is transferred in the VRAM 204, and image data to be controlled are used. There are information on target frame areas 212a and 212b for which drawing data is to be created, and various information for creating a 3D image using a virtual three-dimensional space.

  After that, a drawing list output process is executed (step S2407). In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of the current process is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 205. In this case, in the drawing list, the image grasped in the immediately preceding task process is to be drawn, and the parameter information updated in the task process is also set. The VDP 205 creates drawing data in the frame areas 212a and 212b of the VRAM 204 according to the drawing list.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the task processing in step S2406.

  In the task processing, first, control start setting processing is executed (step S2501). In the control start setting process, the display CPU 201 executes a process for setting an individual image for newly starting control (calculation) in the current process. The individual image is defined as one 2D image defined by still image data such as back image data or one 3D image defined by a combination of object image data and texture image data. That is.

  More specifically, the control start setting process first determines whether or not there is an individual image to be control-started this time based on the currently set execution target table. If it exists, the work RAM 202 searches for an empty buffer area for performing various operations in controlling the individual image, and corresponds one-to-one with the individual image grasped as the control start target. To secure a free buffer area. Further, an initialization process is performed on all the secured free buffer areas, and a control start parameter corresponding to an individual image is set for the initialized free buffer areas.

  Thereafter, the control update target is grasped (step S2502). The control update target is an individual image for which the control start processing has been completed and which may be included in an image for one frame after the current processing.

  After that, a background calculation process is executed (step S2503). In the background calculation processing, the coordinates, rotation angle, scale, light information for adding light and darkness, and projection of the background image and the background character, which constitute the background image, in the world coordinate system are calculated. A process of calculating and deriving various parameters necessary for creating a drawing list such as camera information to be performed and Z test designation is executed.

  Thereafter, an effect calculation process is executed (step S2504). In the effect calculation process, a process of calculating and deriving the above-mentioned various parameters is performed for an individual image to be displayed in various effects such as reach display, notice display, and jackpot effect.

  Thereafter, a symbol calculation process is executed (step S2505). In the symbol calculation process, a process of calculating and deriving the above-described various parameters is performed on the image of the symbol to be subjected to the fluctuation display in each game time.

  By the way, in each process of steps S2503 to S2505, a process of updating the control start parameter set in step S2501 is executed. In each of the processes in steps S2503 to S2505, animation data set to change various parameters of an individual image according to a specific pattern each time image update timing is used. The animation data is determined according to the type of the individual image. The animation data is stored in the memory module 203 in advance, and is transferred to the work RAM 202 before the display CPU 201 needs to read the animation data.

  Thereafter, a process of grasping the placement target in the world coordinate system is executed (step S2506). In the process of grasping the placement target in the world coordinate system, the process of grasping the individual image set as the drawing target in the current drawing list among the individual images subject to the control update by the processes of steps S2503 to S2505 described above. Execute The determination is performed based on the currently set execution target table. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list.

  That is, since the number of individual images to be controlled by the display CPU 201 is set to be larger than the number of individual images to be controlled by the VDP 205, the adjustment is performed in step S2506. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the individual image to be controlled in the display CPU 201 may be the same as the individual image to be controlled in the VDP 205. In this case, the process of step S2506 is executed. Eliminates the need.

<Basic processing in VDP 205>
Next, a basic process executed by the VDP 205 will be described.

  In the VDP 205, processing for setting the value of the register 223 based on the command transmitted from the display CPU 201, processing for creating drawing data in the frame areas 212a and 212b of the frame buffer 212 based on the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 201, At least a process of outputting an image signal to the symbol display device 41 based on the drawing data created in the frame regions 212a and 212b is executed.

  Among the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 223 is executed each time a drawing list is received by a circuit (not shown) attached to the I / F 226 for the display CPU 201. The process of creating the drawing data is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 20 msec) in cooperation with the geometry calculation unit 221 and the rendering unit 222. The process of outputting an image signal is executed by the display circuit 225 at a predetermined image signal output start timing.

  Hereinafter, the process of creating the drawing data will be described in detail. Prior to the description of the processing, the contents of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 201 to the VDP 205 will be described. FIGS. 69A to 69C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

  Header information is set in the drawing list. In the header information, information of a target buffer, which is information indicating which of the first frame area 212a and the second frame area 212b is to be created for an image of one frame related to the drawing list, is set. I have. Also, various designation information is set in the header information.

  In the drawing list, in addition to the header information, a plurality of types of image data to be arranged in the world coordinate system at the time of creating the current drawing data are set, and further information on the drawing order of each image data, Parameter information of each image data is set. In detail, the drawing order information is set so as to be serial number information, and parameter information is set in one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information.

  In the drawing list of FIG. 69A, the back image data is set as the first drawing target, the background object A is set as the second, the background object B is set as the third, and so on. I have. In addition, the rendering image data is set as an order after the background image data. For example, the rendering object A is set as the mth, the rendering object B is set as the (m + 1) th,... I have. In addition, the image data for symbols is set as an order after the image data for effects, for example, the symbol object A is set as the n-th symbol, the symbol object B is set as the n + 1-th symbol, and so on. I have.

  Note that the order in which the image data is set in the drawing list is not limited to the above, and the order in which the image data is set may be the reverse of the above order, Direction image data or background image data may be set after the data, and design image data is set in order between predetermined effect image data and other effect image data. It may be.

  The parameter information P (1), P (2), P (3), ..., P (m), P (m + 1), ..., P (n), P (n + 1), ... , A plurality of types of parameter information are set. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), the parameter information P (1) of the back image data includes information on the address of the area where the back image data is stored in the memory module 203 and the back information. Information (X-value information, Y-value information, Z-value information) indicating the position in the world coordinate system when setting image data for use, and world coordinates when setting image data for the back surface Rotation angle information indicating the rotation angle in the system, scale information indicating the magnification when setting the world coordinate system with respect to the scale set as the initial state of the back image data, and scale information indicating the magnification for the back And information of a uniform α value indicating the entire transparent information (or transparent information) when image data is set.

  Here, the coordinate information is set individually for all vertices of the object data. The information of the coordinates is set for the object data, but is not set for the texture data. In the texture data, the coordinate value of each pixel is predetermined in association with each vertex of the object data. This coordinate value is a UV coordinate value different from the coordinate value in the world coordinate system, and is stored in the memory module 203 in a state where it is attached to a combination of the object data and the texture data. This UV coordinate value is referred to by the VDP 205 when performing texture mapping.

  The parameter information (P1) renders camera information including information on the coordinates and orientation of the virtual camera when projecting the back image data onto the virtual two-dimensional plane for drawing, and renders the back image data. And light information including information on the position and orientation of the virtual light source that determines the shadow in the case.

  In the parameter information (P1), information of Z test designation indicating whether or not the Z buffer method, which is a kind of a technique for erasing a hidden surface, is set. The Z-buffer method means that when many objects or two-dimensional images overlap in the depth direction (Z-axis direction) in the world coordinate system, each pixel (or each voxel, each pixel, each polygon) arranged on the Z-axis This is a depth adjustment processing method of sequentially referring to the distance from the viewpoint to the numerical information set for the pixel closest to the viewpoint in the corresponding unit area in the frame regions 212a and 212b.

  In addition to the Z-buffer method, a Z-sort method is set as a method for performing the above-described hidden surface removal. The Z sorting method is a processing method for depth adjustment in which, for each pixel arranged on the Z axis, numerical information set for each pixel is sequentially set in a corresponding unit area in the frame regions 212a and 212b. When applying the Z sorting method, the α value set for each pixel is referred to, and the corresponding α value is applied to the numerical information corresponding to the color information of each pixel arranged on the Z axis. In such a state, the addition processing of these numerical information and the arithmetic processing for fusion are executed. The description of the specific processing configuration of the hidden surface processing by Z sorting is omitted, but the processing is started when an effect image is displayed.

  In the parameter information (P1), α data designation information indicating whether or not α data is applied and an application target, and fog designation information indicating fog application availability and an application target are set.

  Here, the α value is transmission information of a corresponding pixel. As a method of setting the α value on the drawing list, there are a method of specifying the uniform α value and a method of specifying α data. The uniform α value is transmissive information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 201. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, the α data is transmission information applied to each pixel of two-dimensional still image data or texture data, and is stored in the memory module 203 in advance as image data. In the α data, transmission information can be made different for each pixel within the range of the same still image data or the same texture data. The α data has a larger data capacity than program data for setting a uniform α value.

  Since the uniform α value and α data are set as described above, the transparency of two-dimensional still image data and texture data is not controlled finely in pixel units but is controlled uniformly for all pixels. In a good situation, it is possible to reduce the required data capacity by being able to cope with a uniform α value, and it is also possible to finely control the transmittance in pixel units by applying the α data.

  The fog is information for adjusting the degree of brightness with respect to a position in a predetermined direction, specifically, the Z-axis direction in the world coordinate system. Fog is used to represent fog or inside a cave. Here, a single fog may be applied to the entire image of one frame. In this case, fog is applied to an image for one frame in a certain manner. Alternatively, a plurality of fogs may be applied to the entire image of one frame. In this case, another fog is set for the object located in the back side in the Z-axis direction in a situation where applying the same fog to the object as to the other object is too dark to have a texture. It is good to have composition. Thereby, it is possible to obtain the effect of setting the fog while keeping the texture from being impaired.

  In other parameters such as the parameter information P (2), as shown in FIG. 69 (c), of the various information of FIG. 69 (b), the information of the object and the texture Information is set. As these pieces of information, information on addresses of areas where objects and textures are stored in the memory module 203 is set.

  The drawing process in the VDP 205 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the following description, how the drawing data is created as the drawing process is performed will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, it is determined whether a new drawing list has been received from the display CPU 201 (step S2601). If a new drawing list has been received, a background setting process is executed (step S2602).

  In the setting process for the background, the image data for the back surface for displaying the background image and the object data for displaying the character among the image data specified in the current drawing list are grasped. Then, it is determined whether or not the image data and the object data are already arranged in the world coordinate system.

  If not, a free buffer area to be referenced for placement in the world coordinate system is searched for each image data, and if a free buffer area is secured, the area is initialized. Thereafter, the address at which the image data is stored in the memory module 203 is grasped and read out, and the coordinate values of the local coordinate system for the image data are set so as to be the coordinates, the rotation angle, and the scale designated in the drawing list. Is converted into a coordinate value in the world coordinate system, and is set in the buffer area secured above.

  When the parameters are arranged, the update processing of various parameters set in the already secured buffer area is executed. In the background setting process, a control end process of deleting background image data not specified in the current drawing list from among image data already arranged in the world coordinate system is executed.

  Then, the effect setting process is executed (step S2603). In the effect setting process, object data for displaying the effect image is grasped from the image data specified in the current drawing list. Then, it is determined whether or not the grasped object data is already arranged in the world coordinate system. If not arranged, a process for starting the arrangement is executed as in the case of the background setting process described above. If they are arranged, the process of updating various parameters is executed. In the effect setting process, a control end process of erasing effect image data not specified in the current drawing list among image data already arranged in the world coordinate system is executed.

  Thereafter, a setting process for symbols is executed (step S2604). In the setting process for the symbol, object data for displaying the symbol is grasped from the image data specified in the current drawing list. Then, it is determined whether or not the grasped object data is already arranged in the world coordinate system. If not arranged, a process for starting the arrangement is executed as in the case of the background setting process described above. If they are arranged, the process of updating various parameters is executed. In the symbol setting process, a control end process of deleting image data for a symbol not specified in the current drawing list from among image data already arranged in the world coordinate system is executed.

  By executing the processing of steps S2602 to S2604, as shown in FIG. 71, the object is designated as a placement target by the drawing list in the world coordinate system defined by the X axis, the Y axis, and the Z axis. The setting of the scene in which the image data PC1 for the rearmost image and the various object data PC2 to PC10 are arranged at the coordinates, the rotation angle, and the scale similarly designated by the drawing list is completed. FIG. 71 simply shows a state in which image data PC1 for the rearmost image and various object data PC2 to PC10 are arranged.

  Then, a conversion process to the camera coordinate system (camera space) is performed (step S2605). In the conversion process to the camera coordinate system, the coordinates and direction of the viewpoint are determined based on the information of the camera specified by the drawing list, and the world coordinate system is used as the origin, based on the coordinates and direction of the viewpoint. Convert to camera coordinate system (camera space). As a result, as shown in FIG. 71, the viewpoint PC11 represented by the camera shape is set, and the coordinate system corresponding to the viewpoint PC11 is set.

  Here, the camera information is set for each individual image (the image data PC1 for the rearmost image and the various object data PC2 to PC10), and a camera coordinate system actually exists for each individual image. . By setting the camera coordinate system for each individual image in this way, it is possible to switch viewpoints individually, and the degree of freedom in creating drawing data is increased. However, for convenience of description, FIG. 71 shows a state in which all individual images are set to a single viewpoint.

  After that, a conversion process to a view coordinate system (view space) is executed (step S2606). In the conversion process to the view coordinate system, each camera coordinate system is converted into a view coordinate system corresponding to the view (view angle) from the viewpoint. Thus, if each individual image is included in the field of view of the corresponding viewpoint, it is extracted, and the individual image close to the viewpoint is enlarged, and the individual image far from the viewpoint is reduced.

  Thereafter, a clipping process is performed (step S2607). In the clipping process, each individual image extracted in step S2606 is grasped using the corresponding viewpoint as a common origin. Then, in this state, each individual image extracted in step S2606 with reference to a space corresponding to the screen area PC12 (see FIG. 71) corresponding to the frame areas 212a and 212b to be drawn (ie, the symbol display device 41). Clipping.

  After that, a writing process is executed (step S2608). In the lighting process, the type, coordinates, and direction of the virtual light source are determined based on the information of the light specified by the drawing list, and the shadow, reflection, and the like are calculated for each object extracted by the clipping process based on the virtual light source. .

  After that, a color information setting process is executed (step S2609). In the color information setting process, the appearance of each object is determined by setting the color information for each object extracted by the clipping process on a pixel basis (that is, on a polygon basis) or on a vertex basis. In the color information setting process, basically, a texture mapping process of pasting corresponding texture data to each object data extracted by the clipping process is executed. Further, depending on the situation, processes such as bump mapping and transparency mapping are executed.

  Thereafter, in Steps S2610 and S2611, each individual image extracted in Step S2607 and further subjected to lighting processing and color information setting processing is projected onto a screen area PC12 that is a virtual two-dimensional plane (for example, perspective projection). And parallel projection) to create drawing data.

  Specifically, first, rendering data creation processing for the effect and the background is executed (step S2610). In the rendering data creation processing for the effect and the background, the image data for the rearmost image and the object data set as the background image are projected on the screen area PC12 while erasing the hidden surface, thereby performing the processing for the background. Create drawing data for Further, by rendering the object data set as the effect image on the screen area PC12 while erasing the hidden surface, drawing data for the effect is created.

  Here, the VRAM 204 is provided with a screen buffer 214 as shown in FIG. 66. In the screen buffer 214, drawing data for background and drawing data for rendering are collectively written. A buffer and a symbol buffer in which symbol drawing data is written are set. In the effect and background buffers and the symbol buffer, areas having the same number of dots as the number of pixels in the screen area PC12 are set. The drawing data for the background and the drawing data for the effect created in step S2610 are stored in the effect and background buffer in such a manner that the drawing data for the effect is overwritten in a part of the drawing data for the background. Written. Note that if no background image data is specified in the drawing list, no background drawing data is created.If no effect image data is specified in the drawing list, the effect No drawing data is created.

  Thereafter, a drawing data creation process for symbols is executed (step S2611). In the design drawing data creation process, the object data set as the design is projected onto the screen area PC12 while erasing the hidden surface, so that the design buffer in the screen buffer 214 is used for the design. Create drawing data. If no image data for a symbol is specified in the drawing list, no symbol drawing data is created.

  Thereafter, a drawing data synthesizing process is executed (step S2612). In the drawing data synthesizing process, the rendering data for the effect and the background, which are individually created in the screen buffer 214 by the processes of step S2610 and step S2611, and the drawing data for the design are synthesized, and the synthesized result is obtained. Writing is performed as one frame of drawing data in the frame areas 212a and 212b to be drawn.

  In this case, the writing order is defined so as to be arranged from the back side to the near side in the order of rendering data for effects and background → drawing data for symbols. Therefore, drawing data for effects and backgrounds are first written into the frame areas 212a and 212b to be drawn, and then drawing data for symbols is written. At this time, if a completely transparent α value is set for the pixel subjected to rendering, the image on the back side is used as it is, and if a semi-transparent α value is set, the α value is set. The fusion of the image on the back side and the image on the front side at the reference ratio is performed, and when the opaque α value is set, the image on the front side is overwritten on the image on the back side so that it is overwritten. , A blending operation is performed.

  Incidentally, each drawing data is defined so as to have an area for one frame, but a completely transparent α value is set for a blank portion of the design drawing data which has not been projected.

  The creation of the drawing data for one frame is performed so as to be completed within a period of 20 msec. In addition, an image signal is output from the display circuit 225 to the symbol display device 41 based on the created drawing data. However, since the double buffer method is employed as described above, the output of the image signal is output to the output. This is performed in parallel with the creation of the drawing data corresponding to the update timing one frame later than the corresponding frame. The display circuit 225 has a selector circuit that alternately switches between the frame areas 212a and 212b to be referred each time the output of the image signal for one frame is completed. The frame regions 212a and 212b to be drawn are regulated so as not to be output targets for outputting image signals.

  Steps S2602 to S2607 are processes executed by the geometry calculation unit 221. Steps S2608 to S2612 are processes executed by the rendering unit 222.

<Configuration for performing a time-response effect>
Next, a configuration for performing a time-based effect will be described.

  The time-based effect is an effect in which the pachinko machine 10 enters a time-based effect state for a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) every time a predetermined time comes. As the predetermined time, for example, a configuration in which the time is set to be one hour, such as 10:00, 11:00, 12:00,..., Can be considered. In addition, the time-dependent effect state is specifically, a time-corresponding background image is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the light-emitting mode of the display light emitting unit 44 and the music output mode from the speaker unit 45 are also time-corresponding. It becomes an aspect. In addition, when a time-response effect state occurs, a special response image can be displayed in a game time that results in a big hit, or the probability that a special response image is displayed in a game time that results in a big hit is time-dependent. It is higher than in the non-production state. By setting the pachinko machine 10 to be in a state corresponding to the time at a predetermined time, for example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed in a game hall, the plurality of pachinko machines 10 It is possible to simultaneously perform the time-response effects.

  As shown in FIG. 66, the sound emission control device 60 is provided with an RTC 65 so as to enable the execution of the time-based effect. The RTC 65 can output time information to the sound-light-side MPU 62. The RTC 65 has its own backup power supply, and can manage the passage of time even when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The sound-light-side MPU 62 can acquire time information from the RTC 65 as necessary, and thereby specify whether or not the time at the acquisition timing is a time corresponding to the start trigger of the time-related effect. Then, when the time information acquired from the RTC 65 is the time corresponding to the start opportunity of the time-based effect, the sound-side MPU 62 executes a process for starting the time-based effect.

  The manner in which the time-based effect is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. 72 (a) shows a normal period in which the time corresponding effect is not executed, FIG. 72 (b) shows a preparation period which is a part of the time corresponding effect execution period, and FIG. 72 (c) It shows a special period that is a part of the execution period of the time-based effect and is started after the preparation period. FIG. 73 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device 41 during the normal period, and FIG. 73 (b) is an explanation for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device 41 during the preparation period. FIG. 73 (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device 41 during the special period.

  As shown in FIG. 72 (a), at the timing of t1 in the normal period in which the time-based effect is not executed, the time information supplied from the RTC 65 to the MPU 62 becomes the time information corresponding to the start timing of the time-based effect. Thus, as shown in FIGS. 72A and 72B, the normal period ends at the timing of t1, and the preparation period starts. Thereby, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is changed from the display mode corresponding to the normal period as shown in FIG. 73 (a) to the display mode corresponding to the preparation period as shown in FIG. 73 (b). .

  In the display mode corresponding to the normal period and the display mode corresponding to the preparation period, the content of the rearmost image displayed in the background image is different and the type of the background individual image displayed in front of the rearmost image Are different. Specifically, while the number of background individual images G61a and G61b displayed in the display mode corresponding to the normal period is two, the individual images for background G62a to G62a displayed in the display mode corresponding to the preparation period are provided. G62d is four. Thereby, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is more flashy in the preparation period than in the normal period, and the player's attention to the symbol display device 41 can be increased. In the preparation period, the remaining time notification image G63 for notifying information corresponding to the remaining time until the start of the special period is displayed on the symbol display device 41. As the remaining time notification image G63, the remaining time until the start of the special period is displayed in a subtractive manner. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the start of the special period is approaching. In addition, although the display mode of the symbols is the same in the normal period and the preparation period, the display mode of the symbols may be changed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 72 (b) and 72 (c), the preparation period ends at the timing of t2, and the special period starts. Thereby, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is changed from the display mode corresponding to the preparation period as shown in FIG. 73 (b) to the display mode corresponding to the special period as shown in FIG. 73 (c). .

  In the display mode corresponding to the preparation period and the display mode corresponding to the special period, the content of the rearmost image displayed in the background image is different and the type of the background individual image displayed in front of the rearmost image Are different. Specifically, while the number of background individual images G62a to G62d displayed in the display mode corresponding to the preparation period is four, the individual images for background G64a to G64a displayed in the display mode corresponding to the special period are displayed. G64g is seven pieces. Thereby, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is more flashy in the special period than in the preparation period, and the player's attention to the symbol display device 41 can be increased. Further, in the special period, a special notification image G65 for notifying that it is the special period is displayed on the symbol display device 41. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the special period has been reached. Although the display mode of the symbols is the same in the preparation period and the special period, the display mode of the symbols may be changed.

  At a timing t3 when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the special period, the special period ends as shown in FIG. 72 (c), and returns to the normal period as shown in FIG. 72 (a). . After that, the time corresponding effect is executed at each of the timings t4 to t6 and the timings t7 to t9. In this case, the period from the start of the time-based effect in the predetermined execution time to the start of the time-based effect in the next execution time is constant at Tf1. In addition, the period from the start of the preparation period to the start of the special period in the execution times of each time-corresponding effect is also constant at Tf2. Thereby, the time-response effect can be simultaneously started in the plurality of pachinko machines 10, and the special period can be simultaneously started in the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

  As described above, the time-based effect is periodically executed using the time information of the RTC 65. However, when the time-based effect starts during the open / close execution mode, the open / close execution mode continues. During this period, the backmost image for the preparation period and the background individual images G62a to G62d for the preparation period are not displayed as background images of the symbol display device 41, and further, the background images of the symbol display device 41 are special. The rearmost image for the period and the individual images G64a to G64g for the background for the special period are not displayed. However, in the preparation period, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed so as to be superimposed on a part of the image for the opening and closing execution mode from the front, and in the special period, it is displayed on the part of the image for the opening and closing execution mode. , And the special notification image G65 is displayed. Thereby, by giving priority to the effect for the opening and closing execution mode, it is possible to appropriately increase the satisfaction of the player for the occurrence of the opening and closing execution mode, and to inform the player that the time corresponding effect is being executed. It becomes possible to make them recognize. Further, even during the opening / closing execution mode, the manager of the game hall can know that the execution period of the time-response effect is originally the time period. It is possible to perform the operation of checking whether or not the occurrence has occurred, regardless of whether the operation is in the open / close execution mode.

  On the other hand, the display mode of the display light-emitting unit 44 and the output mode of music from the speaker unit 45 are time-adapted from the start timing of the time-adapted effect even during the open / close execution mode. Thus, the display mode of the display light emitting section 44 and the output mode of music from the speaker section 45 can be aligned in a time-adaptive manner in the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

  When the opening / closing execution mode ends in a situation where the time-based effect is started during the opening / closing execution mode and is originally a period in which the time-based effect is being executed, the end timing corresponds to the preparation period. If there is, the display of the rearmost image for the preparation period and the background individual images G62a to G62d for the preparation period are started as background images of the symbol display device 41, and the display of the remaining time notification image G63 is continued. If the end timing of the opening / closing execution mode corresponds to the special period, the image of the rearmost image for the special period and the background individual images G64a to G64g for the special period are used as the background images of the symbol display device 41. The display is started and the display of the special notification image G65 is continued. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of executing the time-based effect in the original execution mode.

  The longest duration of the open / close execution mode is longer than the preparation period but shorter than the special period. Thus, if the start timing of the time-dependent effect is reached during the opening / closing execution mode, the opening / closing execution mode ends in the middle of the execution of the time-dependent effect. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of executing the time-based effect in the original execution mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the longest duration of the open / close execution mode is longer than the execution period of the time-based effect.

  If the start timing of the time-response effect is reached in the situation where the effect for game play is being executed, the time response in the situation where the effect for game play is not executed and the effect for the open / close execution mode is not executed The start mode of the time-based effect is different from that when the effect is started. Specifically, when the start timing of the time-based effect is reached in a situation where the effect for the game round is being executed, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 74, the background image, the effect image, and the design image The display mode of the effect for game round is continued. That is, the display of the backmost image for the preparation period and the background individual images G62a to G62d for the preparation period as the background images of the symbol display device 41 are not started. However, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed so as to be overlapped with a part of the background image displayed as the effect for the game round from the near side. Incidentally, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed so as not to overlap with the symbol so as not to lower the visibility of the symbol.

  The manner in which the time-based effect is executed in relation to the state of execution of the effect for the game round will be described below with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 75 (a) shows the start timing of the time-based effect, and FIG. 75 (b) shows the execution period of the demonstration display executed when neither the effect for the game play nor the effect for the open / close execution mode is executed. 75 (c) shows the execution period of the effect for the game round, FIG. 75 (d) shows the preparation period, and FIG. 75 (e) shows the image display as shown in FIG. 74 during the delay. FIG. 75 (f) shows a display period of an image for a preparation period in which an image as shown in FIG. 73 (b) is displayed as a background image, FIG. 75 (g) shows a special period, and FIG. (H) shows a light emission control period corresponding to time.

  First, a description will be given of a case where the start timing of the time-based effect is reached in a situation where the effect for the game round and the effect for the open / close execution mode are not being executed.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (b), at the timing of t1 in the execution period of the demonstration display, it becomes the start timing of the time corresponding effect as shown in FIG. 75 (a). In this case, at the timing of the time t1, the preparation period is started as shown in FIG. 75 (d), and the display of the image for the preparation period is started as shown in FIG. 75 (f). Further, at the timing of the time t1, the display light emitting section 44 starts emitting light in a time-corresponding manner as shown in FIG. 75 (h). Note that the speaker unit 45 also starts outputting music in a time-corresponding manner at the timing of t1.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t2 in the middle of the preparation period, the effect for the game round is started as shown in FIG. 75 (c). In this case, the variable display of the symbols is started while the background image for the preparation period is displayed. That is, the variable display of the symbols is started in a state where the display of the background image for the preparation period in a mode conforming to the display pattern up to that time is continued.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3 during the execution of the game effect, the preparation period ends as shown in FIG. 75 (d), and the special period starts as shown in FIG. 75 (g). In this case, the display of the background image for the special period is started in a state in which the variable display of the symbol in the mode according to the display pattern up to that time is continued. Then, as shown in FIG. 75 (g), when the execution period secured as a special period elapses at the timing t4 when the demonstration display is being executed as shown in FIG. 75 (b), as shown in FIG. The special period ends, and the time-based effect of the current execution time ends accordingly. At the timing of the t4, the light emission in the time corresponding mode in the display light emitting unit 44 is ended as shown in FIG. 75 (h). Note that the speaker unit 45 also stops outputting music in a time-corresponding manner at the timing of t4. Further, when the execution period secured as a special period has elapsed in a situation where the production for the game is being performed, the production for the game is ended and the production for the game is newly started. The special period ends when the demo display starts.

  Next, a description will be given of a case where it is the start timing of the time-based effect in a situation where the effect for the game round is being executed.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (c), at the timing of t5 in the execution period of the effect for the game round, it becomes the start timing of the time corresponding effect as shown in FIG. 75 (a). In this case, at the timing of the time t5, the preparation period is started as shown in FIG. 75D, but the display of the background image for the preparation period as shown in FIG. 73B is not started. 75 (e), the delaying period starts. In the delaying period, as described above, the remaining time notification image G63 is added while the image display of the effect for the game round based on the display pattern up to that time is continued.

  On the other hand, at the timing of t5, light emission in a time-corresponding manner is started in the display light emitting section 44 as shown in FIG. 75 (h). Note that the speaker unit 45 also starts outputting music in a time-corresponding manner at the timing of t5. Thus, the display mode of the display light emitting section 44 and the output mode of music from the speaker section 45 can be aligned in a time-adaptive manner in the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75 (c), at the timing of t6, the game effect for game which has been executed so far ends, and at the time of t7, a new game effect for game is started. At the timing t7, the delaying period ends as shown in FIG. 75 (e), and the display of the background image for the preparation period starts as shown in FIG. 75 (f). In other words, if it is the start timing of the time-based effect in the middle of the execution of the game effect, the background image for the preparation period is not displayed as a delay period until the effect for the game ends, and the When the effect for the game round is ended and the effect for the new game round is started, the display of the background image for the preparation period is started. In addition, when the effect for the game is ended and the effect for the new game is not started, the display of the background image for the preparation period is started when the demonstration display is started. By this, the display of the background image for the preparation period starts from the end of the effect for the game round until the start of the effect for the new game round or the period until the demonstration display is started. It can be used as a control period for performing Note that the demonstration display is started when 0.5 sec has elapsed without starting a new game play effect or opening / closing execution mode effect after the game play effect ends.

  Thereafter, at the timing t8 during the execution of the game effect, the preparation period ends as shown in FIG. 75 (d) and the special period starts as shown in FIG. 75 (g). In this case, the display of the background image for the special period is started in a state in which the variable display of the symbol in the mode according to the display pattern up to that time is continued. Then, at time t9 when the demonstration display is being executed as shown in FIG. 75 (b), the execution period secured as a special period elapses, and as shown in FIG. 75 (g). The special period ends, and the time-based effect of the current execution time ends accordingly. At the timing of the time t9, the light emission in the time-corresponding manner in the display light emitting unit 44 is ended as shown in FIG. Note that the speaker unit 45 also stops outputting music in a time-corresponding manner at the timing of t9.

  When it is the start timing of the time-dependent effect in the situation where the effect for the game round is being executed as described above, the display mode of the effect for the game round until then is continued for the background image, the effect image, and the design image. Meanwhile, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed so as to be overlapped with a part of the background image displayed as the effect for the game round from the near side. Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize that the time corresponding effect is being executed while maintaining the display of the image according to the content already determined as the effect for the game round.

  In particular, if it is attempted to start the display of the background image for the preparation period in a situation where the super-reach in which the character image for the reach is displayed as the effect for the game round is performed, the image is displayed on the symbol display device 41. There is a possibility that the number of types of image data used for the image processing becomes extremely large and the processing load becomes extremely high. On the other hand, when it is the start timing of the time-based effect in a situation where the effect for the game is being executed, the effect for the game is already determined simply by adding the remaining time notification image G63. The display of the image according to the contents of the image is maintained. This makes it possible to prevent the processing load from becoming extremely high as described above.

  Here, the continuation period Tf3 of the preparation period is constant, and the continuation period Tf3 is set as a time longer than the longest variable display time that can be selected in the effect for the game round. Thereby, even if the timing corresponding to the start of the time corresponding effect in the situation where the effect for the game time is being executed, regardless of the fluctuation display time of the effect for the game time and the start timing of the time corresponding effect, The effect for the game round during execution ends before the preparation period elapses. Therefore, before the special period starts, it is possible to secure a period in which the background image for the preparation period is displayed.

  When the special period is started by securing the period in which the background image for the preparation period is displayed, the background image for the special period as shown in FIG. Can be displayed. This makes it easier for the plurality of pachinko machines 10 to simultaneously start displaying the background image for the special period.

  Next, a data configuration for executing the time-based effect will be described.

  As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 76 (a), a data table 231 for a time-dependent effect is stored in the sound light ROM 63 in advance. The data table 231 for the time-dependent effect is a table that is referred to in order to control the execution of the time-dependent effect in the sound-light-side MPU 62. FIG. 76 (b) is an explanatory diagram for describing the data table 231 for a time-based effect.

  Pointer information corresponding to the update timing of the image for one frame is set in the data table 231 for the time-based effect, and various timing information, light emission data, and sound output data are associated with each pointer information. A combination has been set. The start timing of the preparation period, the transfer timing of the image data group 233 for the special period, the end timing of the preparation period, and the start timing of the special period are referred to by referring to information of various timings corresponding to the pointer information to be referred to. The return timing of the image data group for the normal effect and the end timing of the execution period secured as the special period can be specified by the sound-side MPU 62. In addition, by performing light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 using light emission data (PD (0), PD (1)...) Corresponding to the pointer information to be referred to, the display light emitting unit 44 It is possible to make the light emission mode correspond to the time, and to use the sound output data (SD (0), SD (1)...) Corresponding to the pointer information to be referred to, and By executing the sound output control, it is possible to make the output mode of the sound from the speaker unit 45 a time-dependent mode.

  As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 77, the memory module 203 of the display control device 200 includes an image data group 232 for a preparation period, an image data group 233 for a special period, a remaining time correspondence table 234, and a preparation period table 235. , A special notification correspondence table 236 and a special period table 237 are stored in advance. The image data group 232 for the preparation period includes image data for displaying the rearmost image for the preparation period, image data for displaying the individual images G62a to G62d for the background for the preparation period, and notification of the remaining time. The image data for displaying the image G63 is included. The special period image data group 233 includes image data for displaying the rearmost image for the special period, image data for displaying the background individual images G64a to G64g for the special period, and a special notification image. Image data for displaying G65 is included.

  The remaining time correspondence table 234 is data for controlling the display of the remaining time notification image G63 in the preparation period regardless of whether it is the delay period, and includes the pointer information corresponding to the update timing of the image for one frame. Correspondingly, parameter information applied to image data for displaying the remaining time notification image G63 is set. The preparation period table 235 is data for controlling the display of the background image for the preparation period in the preparation period which is not the delay period. The preparation period table 235 corresponds to each pointer information corresponding to the update timing of the image for one frame. Parameter information to be applied to image data for displaying a background image for a period is set. Since the remaining time correspondence table 234 and the preparation period table 235 are separately provided, the display control for the preparation period is performed in the delay period in which the background image for the preparation period is not displayed even in the preparation period. By referring only to the remaining time correspondence table 234, it is possible to display the remaining time notification image G63 in a situation where the background image for the preparation period is not displayed. On the other hand, in a preparation period other than the delay period, by referring to both the remaining time correspondence table 234 and the preparation period table 235, the remaining time is notified in a situation where the background image for the preparation period is displayed. The image G63 can be displayed.

  The special notification correspondence table 236 is data for controlling the display of the special notification image G65 in the special period regardless of whether the mode is the open / close execution mode or not, and includes the pointer information corresponding to the update timing of the image for one frame. Correspondingly, parameter information applied to image data for displaying the special notification image G65 is set. The special period table 237 is data for controlling the display of the background image for the special period in the special period which is not the opening / closing execution mode, and corresponds to each pointer information corresponding to the update timing of the image for one frame. Parameter information to be applied to image data for displaying a background image for a special period is set. Since the special notification correspondence table 236 and the special period table 237 are separately provided, even during the special period, the display control for the special period is performed during the period in which the background image for the special period is not displayed. By referring to only the special notification correspondence table 236, it is possible to display the special notification image G65 in a situation where the background image for the special period is not displayed. On the other hand, in a situation in which the special period is not in the open / close execution mode, the special announcement is performed in a situation where the background image for the special period is displayed by referring to both the special announcement correspondence table 236 and the special period table 237. The image G65 can be displayed.

  As described above, the special period ends when the execution period secured as the special period has elapsed, but when the effect for the game round is being executed or the effect for the open / close execution mode is executed. If the execution period secured as a special period elapses, the effect for the game during the execution or the effect for the open / close execution mode ends, and the effect for the game starts anew. When the demo display is newly started or when the demo display is newly started. Then, when the special period ends, the normal performance is restored. Correspondingly, the special period table 237 is set to correspond to a period longer than the longest period in which the special period can be continued. As a result, even if the end timing of the special period occurs irregularly, the special period can be continued until the end timing occurs.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the time corresponding effect will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the RTC-compatible processing executed by the sound-light-side MPU 62. The RTC processing is executed in the table setting processing in step S301 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9).

  If it is the start timing of the preparation period (step S2701: YES), a setting process for starting the preparation period is executed (step S2702). In the setting process for the preparation period start, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 79, first, the data table 231 for the time corresponding effect is read from the sound light side ROM 63 to the sound light side RAM 64 (step S2801). After that, a read instruction command for the preparation period data is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S2802).

  FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a command corresponding process executed by the display CPU 201. The command corresponding process is executed in step S2405 of the V interrupt process (FIG. 67). When the display CPU 201 receives the read command of the preparation period data (step S2901: YES), the display CPU 201 transfers the data other than the texture data in the preparation period image data group 232 from the memory module 203 to the development buffer 211 of the VRAM 204. It is transferred (step S2902). Note that the texture data in the image data group 232 for the preparation period is transferred from the memory module 203 to the texture area 211a provided in the development buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 when the supply of the operation power to the display CPU 201 is started. By executing the processing of step S2902, all of the image data group 232 for the preparation period is stored in the VRAM 204 at the start of the preparation period regardless of whether the delay period starts when the preparation period starts. The data is read out to the expansion buffer 211. This makes it possible to smoothly update the background image for the preparation period and update the remaining time notification image G63 in the preparation period.

  Returning to the description of the setting process for the preparation period start (FIG. 79), after executing the process of step S2802, it is determined whether or not the current situation is a delay target situation (step S2803). A situation in which an effect for a game round is being executed or a situation in which an effect for an open / close execution mode is being executed corresponds to the situation to be delayed. If it is a delay target situation (step S2803: YES), “1” is set to a flag during delay provided in the sound-light side RAM 64 (step S2804). The delaying flag is a flag for specifying the delay period by the sound light side MPU 62. Thereafter, a delay command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S2805).

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives the delay command (step S2903: YES), the display CPU 201 causes the remaining time correspondence table 234 to be transferred from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S2904). Thereby, the display of the remaining time notification image G63 is started in the symbol display device 41.

  Returning to the description of the setting process for starting the preparation period (FIG. 79), if the current state is not the delay target situation (step S2803: NO), “1” is set to the preparation display flag provided in the sound-side RAM 64. (Step S2806). The preparation display flag is a flag for the sound light side MPU 62 to specify that the background image for the preparation period is being displayed. After that, a display start command for preparation is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S2807).

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives the display start command for preparation (step S2905: YES), the display CPU 201 executes read processing for the preparation period (step S2906). In the readout processing for the preparation period, if the remaining time correspondence table 234 has already been read out to the work RAM 202, the preparation time period table 235 is read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 so that the remaining time correspondence table is stored in the work RAM 202. It is assumed that both the table 234 and the preparation period table 235 have been read. In the read processing for the preparation period, if the remaining time correspondence table 234 is not read out to the work RAM 202, both the remaining time correspondence table 234 and the preparation period table 235 are read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202. . By reading both the remaining time correspondence table 234 and the preparation period table 235 into the work RAM 202, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed in a state where the background image for the preparation period is displayed.

  Returning to the description of the RTC processing (FIG. 78), if the preparation period is in progress (step S2703: YES), the setting processing during the preparation period is executed (step S2704). In the setting process during the preparation period, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 81, neither the end timing of the preparation period nor the data transfer timing (step S3001 and step S3002: NO). If “1” is set (step S3003: YES), it is determined whether or not it is the delay release timing (step S3004). If a delay period occurs due to the start timing of the time-based production in the situation where the production for the game is being performed, the production for the game is completed and the production for the new game is completed. Is started or when the demonstration display is started, it is determined that it is the delay release timing. If a delay period occurs due to the start timing of the time-dependent effect in a situation where the effect for the opening and closing execution mode is being executed, the effect for the opening and closing execution mode ends and a new game is performed. It is determined that it is the timing to release the delay when the effect for re-use is started or when the demonstration display is started.

  If it is the delay release timing (step S3004: YES), the delay flag in the sound light RAM 64 is cleared to “0” (step S3005), and the preparation display flag in the sound light RAM 64 is set to “1” (step S3005). Step S3006). After that, a display start command for preparation is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3007). The processing content of the display CPU 201 when the display start command for preparation is received is as described above.

  In the setting process during the preparation period, when it is determined that it is the data transfer timing based on the data table 231 for the time-based effect (step S3002: YES), a command to read out the special period data is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3002). Step S3008). As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives the read command of the special period data (step S2907: YES), the display CPU 201 transfers data other than the texture data in the image data group 233 for the special period to the memory module. The data is transferred from the 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 (step S2908). Note that the texture data in the image data group 233 for the special period is transferred from the memory module 203 to the texture area 211a provided in the development buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 when the supply of the operation power to the display CPU 201 is started. By executing the processing of step S2908, all of the special period image data group 233 has been read out to the development buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 before the special period starts. This makes it possible to start displaying the background image and the special notification image G65 for the special period early at the start of the special period, and to update the background image and the special notification image G65 for the special period during the special period. It can be performed smoothly.

  Returning to the description of the setting process during the preparation period (FIG. 81), if it is determined that the preparation period ends at the time based on the data table 231 for the time-dependent effect (step S3001: YES), the sound-light-side RAM 64 is being delayed. The flag and the preparation display flag are cleared to "0" (step S3009), and "1" is set to a special period flag provided in the sound-light RAM 64 (step S3010). The special period flag is a flag for specifying the special period by the sound light side MPU 62. After that, a special period start command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3011).

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives the special period start command (step S2909: YES), the display CPU 201 causes the special notification correspondence table 236 and the special period table 237 to be transferred from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S2909). S2910). By reading the special notification correspondence table 236 into the work RAM 202, the display of the special notification image G65 is started in the symbol display device 41 regardless of whether the mode is the open / close execution mode. If the situation is not the open / close execution mode, the display of the background image for the special effect is started on the symbol display device 41.

  Returning to the description of the RTC-compatible process (FIG. 78), if the special period is being executed (step S2705: YES), the setting process during the special period is executed (step S2706). In the setting process during the special period, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 82, if it is not the end timing of the special period (step S3101: NO), it is determined whether or not it is the data return timing based on the data table 231 for the time-related effect. Is determined (step S3102). If it is determined that it is the data return timing (step S3102: YES), a normal period data read instruction command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3103).

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives the normal period data read instruction command (step S2911: YES), the display CPU 201 displays the background image for the normal effect in a situation where the time-based effect is not executed. The data other than the texture data in the image data group to be transferred is transferred from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 (step S2912).

  Returning to the description of the setting process during the special period (FIG. 82), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the execution period secured as the special period based on the data table 231 for the time-based effect (step S3101: YES), Proceed to step S3104. In step S3104, it is determined whether or not it is possible to return from the time corresponding effect to the normal effect. The resumable state is the end timing of the execution period when the demonstration display is performed at the end timing of the execution period secured as the special period, and the end timing of the execution period secured as the special period. In the case where the effect for the game round or the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is executed in, the effect for the game round or the effect for the opening / closing execution mode in the middle of the execution ends and the effect for the game round is newly started This is the timing when the demo display is started or when the demonstration display is started.

  If it is in the recoverable state (step S3104: YES), the light emission control and the sound output control for the special period are ended (step S3105). Thereby, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 in the state for the normal effect in the situation where the time-based effect is not executed, and the speaker unit 45 in the mode for the normal effect in the situation where the time-based effect is not executed. The sound output control is restarted. Thereafter, the special period flag in the RAM 64 is cleared to “0” (step S3106), and a special period end command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3107).

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives the special period end command (step S2913: YES), the display CPU 201 displays a background image for a normal effect in a situation where the time-based effect is not executed. Is transferred from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S2914). Thus, the display of the background image for the special period on the symbol display device 41 is terminated, and the display of the background image for the normal effect is restarted. In the command corresponding process, when another command is received, a process corresponding to the command is executed (step S2915).

  Next, a table setting process in the present embodiment executed by the sound-light-side MPU 62 will be described with reference to a flowchart of FIG. 83. The table setting process is performed in step S301 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). Be executed.

  When the change command and the type command have been received from the main MPU 52 (step S3201: YES), the game result storage process is executed (step S3202). Specifically, from the information included in the type command, it is determined which one of the results of the jackpot occurrence lottery and the distribution lottery determined by the main MPU 52 at the start of the current game round is specified. The written information is written to the sound-light-side RAM 64.

  Thereafter, when the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation command received this time from the main MPU 52 is the fluctuation display time corresponding to the occurrence of the reach effect (step S3203: YES), a lottery process for determining the type of the reach effect The selection processing of the lottery table to be used is executed. More specifically, when the preparation display flag of the sound-light side RAM 64 is set to “1” (step S3204: YES), the lottery table for the preparation period is stored in the sound-light ROM 63. Is read out to the sound light side RAM 64 (step S3205). If the special period flag of the sound light side RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S3206: YES), the special period lottery table is read from the sound light side ROM 63 to the sound light side RAM 64 (step S3207). . If “1” is not set to either the preparation display flag or the special period flag (step S3206: NO), the normal period lottery table is read from the sound light side ROM 63 to the sound light side RAM 64. Then, the reach effect lottery process is executed using the lottery table selected as the current use target among the lottery table for the preparation period, the lottery table for the special period, and the lottery table for the normal period (step S3209). In the reach effect lottery process, the value of the reach lottery counter at that time is obtained, and the obtained value is collated with the lottery table selected as the current use target. Then, a reach lottery result corresponding to the value acquired from the reach lottery counter is acquired as a result of the current reach effect lottery process.

  Here, a plurality of types of reach effects are set, and each reach effect has a different processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying a reach effect image on the symbol display device 41. The difference in the processing load occurs according to the type of image data and the size of the image data used to display the reach effect image. The reach effect includes a large-load effect in which the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the image for reach effect is the largest, and a medium-load effect in which the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the image for reach effect is smaller than the large-load effect. And a small-load effect in which the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the reach effect image is smaller than the medium-load effect. In this case, the lottery table for the normal period includes all of the large load effect, the medium load effect, and the small load effect as the types of reach effects to be selected. On the other hand, the lottery table for the preparation period does not include the large-load effect and the medium-load effect but includes the small-load effect as the types of reach effects to be selected. The special period lottery table does not include a large load effect but a medium load effect and a small load effect as the types of reach effects to be selected.

  Since the background image for the special period is displayed in the special period as described above, the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the image on the symbol display device 41 is larger than in the preparation period and the normal period. On the other hand, during the special period, the large-load production is not selected as the reach production. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a large load effect is displayed while displaying a background image for the special period in the special period, and a situation in which the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes extremely large. It can be prevented from occurring.

  When the special period is started, it is necessary to perform initial setting to the world coordinate system for all image data necessary to display the background image for the special period. Processing load increases accordingly. On the other hand, during the preparation period that occurs before the special period, the large load effect and the medium load effect are not selected as the reach effects. Thereby, even if the transition to the special period occurs in the situation where the effect for the game round started in the preparation period is being executed, the transition to the special period is performed during the execution of the large load production and the medium load production. Can be prevented from occurring. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes extremely large.

  As described above, the execution period of the preparation period is set as a time longer than the longest variable display time that can be selected as an effect for the game round. With this, even if a large-load effect or a medium-load effect can be executed as a reach effect in the effect for the game started during the normal period, the reach effect ends by the end timing of the preparation period. Then, as already described, the large load effect and the medium load effect are not selected in the effect for the game round started in the preparation period. This makes it possible to prevent the transition to the special period from occurring in a situation where the large load effect or the medium load effect is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes extremely large.

  Note that the special period lottery table includes a reach effect in which a special corresponding image is displayed as a reach effect that can be selected in a game round that results in a jackpot, and the normal period lottery table and the preparation period lottery table include The reach effect in which the special correspondence image is displayed is not included. This makes it possible to set an effect that occurs only during the special period.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3203, or if the process in step S3209 is performed, a stop symbol determination process is performed (step S3210). The details of the stop symbol determination process are the same as those in step S407 of the table setting process (FIG. 10) in the first embodiment.

  After that, a control pattern table setting process is executed (step S3211). In the setting process of the control pattern table, it corresponds to the combination of the presence or absence of the reach effect, the result of the reach effect lottery process (step S3209) when the reach effect occurs, and the result of the stop symbol determination process (step S3210). The control pattern table is read from the sound light side ROM 63 and stored in the sound light side RAM 64.

  Thereafter, a variable display time determination process is executed (step S3212). In this process, the information on the fluctuation display time of the current game is specified from the content of the fluctuation command currently received from the main MPU 52, and the information on the specified fluctuation display time is provided in the sound-light RAM 64. Set the variable time counter. The fluctuation time counter is a counter for specifying the timing for terminating the fluctuation display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 and starting the final display of the symbol in the current game time by the sound light side MPU 62. The value set in the fluctuating time counter is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is started by the sound light-side MPU 62, that is, every time 4 msec elapses.

  After that, a variation pattern command including information corresponding to the control pattern table selected in step S3211 is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3213). Thereby, the display CPU 201 starts the effect for the game round on the symbol display device 41 and advances the effect for the game round in a mode according to the effect content determined by the sound-light-side MPU 62. In this case, if it is determined that a reach effect is generated in the current game round, the reach effect selected in step S3209 is executed by the symbol display device 41. In the table setting process, other processes are executed in step S3214 in addition to the above processes. The other processing contents are the same as step S415 of the table setting processing (FIG. 10) in the first embodiment.

  As described above, when the time information of the RTC 65 is the time corresponding to the start opportunity of the time-based effect, the time-based effect is started. This makes it possible to execute a predetermined effect when the predetermined time is reached. Further, when a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed in the game hall, it is possible to simultaneously start a time-responsive effect on the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

  In this case, when the time-based effect is started, a preparation period occurs first, and when the preparation period has elapsed, the display content of the image on the symbol display device 41 becomes more flashy than the preparation period. A period occurs. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the special period is about to occur, and it is possible to gradually increase the expectation that the special period will occur. In the preparation period, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the remaining time until the start of the special period is displayed in the remaining time notification image G63 in a subtractive manner. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the start of the special period is approaching.

  When the timing for the time-dependent effect is reached in a situation where the effect for game play is being executed, the background image, the effect image, and the design image are displayed while continuing the display mode of the effect for game play until then. The remaining time notification image G63 is displayed so as to be superimposed on a part of the background image displayed as a repetitive effect from the near side. Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize that the time corresponding effect is being executed while maintaining the display of the image according to the content already determined as the effect for the game round.

  In particular, when the display of the background image for the preparation period is to be started in a situation where the super-reach in which the character image for the reach is displayed as the effect for the game round is performed, the image is displayed on the symbol display device 41. There is a possibility that the number of types of image data used for the image processing becomes extremely large and the processing load becomes extremely large. On the other hand, when it is the start timing of the time-based effect in a situation where the effect for the game is being executed, the effect for the game is already determined simply by adding the remaining time notification image G63. The display of the image according to the contents of the image is maintained. This makes it possible to prevent the processing load from becoming extremely large as described above.

  The continuation period of the preparation period is constant, and the continuation period is set as a time longer than the longest variable display time that can be selected in the effect for the game round. Thereby, even if the timing corresponding to the start of the time corresponding effect in the situation where the effect for the game time is being executed, regardless of the fluctuation display time of the effect for the game time and the start timing of the time corresponding effect, The effect for the game round during execution ends before the preparation period elapses. Therefore, before the special period starts, it is possible to secure a period in which the background image for the preparation period is displayed.

  By securing the period in which the background image for the preparation period is displayed, when the special period starts, it is possible to start displaying the background image for the special period from the start timing. Become. This makes it easier for the plurality of pachinko machines 10 to simultaneously start displaying the background image for the special period.

  Since the background image for the special period is displayed in the special period, the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the image on the symbol display device 41 is larger than in the preparation period and the normal period. On the other hand, during the special period, the large-load production is not selected as the reach production. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a large load effect is displayed while displaying a background image for the special period in the special period, and a situation in which the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes extremely large. It can be prevented from occurring.

  When the special period is started, it is necessary to perform initial setting to the world coordinate system for all image data necessary to display the background image for the special period. Processing load increases accordingly. On the other hand, during the preparation period that occurs before the special period, the large load effect and the medium load effect are not selected as the reach effects. Thereby, even if the transition to the special period occurs in the situation where the effect for the game round started in the preparation period is being executed, the transition to the special period is performed during the execution of the large load production and the medium load production. Can be prevented from occurring. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes extremely large.

  The execution period of the preparation period is set as a time longer than the longest variable display time that can be selected as an effect for the game round. With this, even if a large-load effect or a medium-load effect can be executed as a reach effect in the effect for the game started during the normal period, the reach effect ends by the end timing of the preparation period. Then, in the effect for the game round started during the preparation period, the large load effect and the medium load effect are not selected. This makes it possible to prevent the transition to the special period from occurring in a situation where the large load effect or the medium load effect is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes extremely large.

  The light emission in the display light emitting unit 44 in the time-corresponding manner and the sound output in the speaker unit 45 in the time-corresponding manner depend on whether or not the effect for the game is being executed when the start timing of the time-responsive effect is reached. Started regardless. Thereby, when the timing corresponding to the start of the time-related effect is reached in the situation where the effect for the game round is being executed, the background image for the preparation period on the symbol display device 41 is completed until the effect for the game round ends. Even if the background images of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 are not aligned due to the display delay, the light emission contents of the display light emitting section 44 and the sound output contents of the speaker section 45 are not included in the plurality of pachinko machines. It is possible to start them simultaneously in the machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the time-related effects have been started simultaneously by the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

<Another form of time-based production>
In the preparation period, in addition to or instead of the configuration in which the background image for the preparation period is displayed on the symbol display device 41, the display mode of the symbol that is variably displayed in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is a display for the preparation period. The configuration may be such that a predetermined character image is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the preparation period. In addition, in the special period, in addition to or instead of the configuration in which the background image for the special period is displayed on the symbol display device 41, the display mode of the symbol that is variably displayed in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is for the special period. The configuration may be a display mode, or a predetermined character image may be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the special period.

  -When the execution period secured as a special period has elapsed in the situation where the demonstration display is being performed on the symbol display device 41, a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the timing when the execution period has elapsed. The special period may be ended and the normal performance may be restored. In this case, the image data group for the normal effect can be returned to the development buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 using the predetermined time, and the image data group for the normal effect is set in the world coordinate system. Can be set for this purpose.

  ・ If the execution period secured as a special period elapses in the situation where the production for the game is being performed, even if the production for the open / close execution mode is performed following the production for the game, Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the special period ends when the effect for the game round ends. This makes it possible to prevent the special period from continuing for an extremely long time.

  The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the RTC 65 is used to specify the start timing of the time-dependent effect. The elapsed time may be measured, and the sound-light-side MPU 62 may identify the start timing of the time-dependent effect when the measured elapsed time becomes the time corresponding to the generation cycle of the time-dependent effect. .

  All of the texture data is not read out from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 when the supply of the operating power to the display CPU 201 is started, but when it is necessary to use the texture data, the texture data to be used is It may be configured to be read each time. In this case, in step S2902 of the command corresponding process (FIG. 80), all of the image data group 232 for the preparation period is read, in step S2908, all of the image data group 233 for the special period is read, and in step S2912, The entire image data group for displaying the background image for the normal effect is read.

  In the preparation period, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 84, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in the section display area G66 set in a part of the symbol display device 41, and the area other than the section display area G66. , A background image for the preparation period may be displayed. As a result, it is possible to emphasize and display the preparation period.

  -In the preparation period, a new start of the effect for the game round may be restricted, and the restricted state may be canceled when the special period is started. Thus, it is possible to prevent the special period from being started during the execution of the game effect.

  ・ If the start timing of the time-response effect is reached, and if neither the effect for the game round nor the effect for the open / close execution mode is being executed, the special period starts without passing through the preparation period, and the time response If the production timing or the opening / closing execution mode performance is being performed when the performance start timing is reached, the preparation period is in effect while those performances are being performed, and the performance that was in the process of being performed is A configuration in which the special period starts when the processing ends is also possible.

  At least one of the light emission control period corresponding to the time in the display light emitting unit 44 and the sound output control period corresponding to the time in the speaker unit 45 is after a predetermined second has elapsed from the start timing of the time corresponding effect in the symbol display device 41. It may be configured to be started. In this case, it is preferable that the control period to be started after elapse of the predetermined second is started before the special period is started in the symbol display device 41.

<Further time-related production>
In this alternative embodiment, when the timing for the time-based effect is started in a situation where the effect for the game round or the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is being executed, the effect or the opening / closing execution mode for the game round that is being executed. No image for the preparation period including the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed until the end of the production effect. Hereinafter, a description will be given of a processing configuration for causing the operation. Note that the description of the same configuration as the above embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing a setting process for starting a preparation period in the present modification.

  First, the data table 231 for the time corresponding effect is read from the ROM 63 to the RAM 64 (step S3301). Thereafter, a read instruction command for the preparation period data is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3302). Thus, similarly to the above embodiment, the display CPU 201 causes the data other than the texture data in the image data group 232 for the preparation period to be transferred from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204. Note that the texture data in the image data group 232 for the preparation period is transferred from the memory module 203 to the texture area 211a provided in the development buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 when the supply of the operation power to the display CPU 201 is started.

  After executing the processing of step S3302, it is determined whether or not the current situation is a delay target situation (step S3303). A situation in which an effect for a game round is being executed or a situation in which an effect for an open / close execution mode is being executed corresponds to the situation to be delayed. If it is a delay target situation (step S3303: YES), “1” is set to the delay flag provided in the sound-light RAM 64 (step S3304).

  If the current situation is not a delay target situation (step S3303: NO), “1” is set to the preparation display flag provided in the sound-light-side RAM 64 (step S3305). Thereafter, a continuation period for displaying the background image for the preparation period and the remaining time notification image G63 as the preparation display is calculated (step S3306). In this case, the preparation period is started at the start timing of the time-dependent effect, so the duration of the preparation display is the time from the start timing of the time-dependent effect to the start timing of the special period. Then, the information corresponding to the preparation display duration calculated in step S3306 is set to the preparation display start command read from the sound light side ROM 63 (step S3307), and the preparation display start command is sent to the display CPU 201. It is transmitted (step S3308).

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing a command corresponding process according to this modification. When receiving the preparation display start command (step S3401: YES), the display CPU 201 determines the remaining period of the preparation period from the preparation display start command (step S3402). Then, in the case where the count value is subtracted and displayed in the remaining time notification image G63 from a fixed start value (for example, “60”) to a fixed end value (for example, “0”) within the range of the remaining period of the preparation period. An update cycle of the count value is set (step S3403). Specifically, the display of the count value is started from a fixed start value, and while the count value update cycle and the count value subtraction value (specifically, “1”) in one update cycle are kept constant, An update cycle of the count value required to make the count value a fixed end value in the remaining period of the preparation period is calculated. Then, a preparation period table corresponding to the calculation result is read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S3404). Thus, the count value in the remaining time notification image G63 is updated according to the update cycle calculated in step S3403. In the command corresponding process, processes other than the above processes are also executed.

  FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing a setting process during a preparation period according to this modification.

  If neither the end timing of the preparation period nor the data transfer timing (step S3501 and step S3502: NO) and if the delay flag of the sound-light side RAM 64 is set to “1” (step S3503: YES), the delay occurs. It is determined whether it is the release timing (step S3504). If a delay period occurs due to the start timing of the time-based production in the situation where the production for the game is being performed, the production for the game is completed and the production for the new game is completed. Is started or when the demonstration display is started, it is determined that it is the delay release timing. If a delay period occurs due to the start timing of the time-dependent effect in a situation where the effect for the opening and closing execution mode is being executed, the effect for the opening and closing execution mode ends and a new game is performed. It is determined that it is the timing to release the delay when the effect for re-use is started or when the demonstration display is started.

  When it is the delay release timing (step S3504: YES), the delay flag in the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S3505), and the preparation display flag in the RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S3506). Thereafter, a continuation period for displaying the background image for the preparation period and the remaining time notification image G63 as the preparation display is calculated (step S3507). In this case, since the preparation period is started at a timing later than the start timing of the time-dependent effect, the remaining period up to the start timing of the special period is the continuation period of the preparation display. Then, the information corresponding to the preparation display duration calculated in step S3507 is set in the preparation display start command read from the sound light side ROM 63 (step S3508), and the preparation display start command is sent to the display CPU 201. It is transmitted (step S3509). As a result, the processing in steps S3402 to S3404 described above in the command corresponding processing (FIG. 86) in the display CPU 201 is executed, and as described above, the count in the remaining time notification image G63 in the remaining period of the preparation period is performed. The value is subtracted and displayed from the fixed start value to the fixed end value.

  The processing contents of steps S3510 to S3513 are the same as the processing contents of steps S3008 to S3011 in the setting processing during the preparation period (FIG. 81) in the above embodiment.

  As described above, when it is the start timing of the time-responsive effect in a situation where the effect for the game round or the effect for the opening and closing execution mode is being executed, the effect for the game round during the execution or the opening and closing execution mode The display of the images for the preparation period including the remaining time notification image G63 is not started until the end of the effect. Thereby, for example, in a situation where the expectation that the jackpot result will be achieved due to the execution of the predetermined reach effect is increased, the display of the image for the preparation period is suddenly started, and the display to the predetermined reach effect is performed. It is possible to prevent an event that the player's attention level decreases from occurring.

  Further, in the configuration in which the display of the image for the preparation period including the remaining time notification image G63 is not started until the effect for the game round in the middle of execution or the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is ended in this way, When the effect for the game round or the effect for the opening / closing execution mode ends and the display of the image for the preparation period is started, the count value of the remaining time notification image G63 in relation to the remaining duration of the preparation period is determined. An update cycle is set. Accordingly, even when the display of the image for the preparation period is started at a timing later than the start timing of the time-related effect, the display of the count value in the remaining time notification image G63 is fixed from the fixed start value. This can be performed until the end value is reached.

<Configuration for performing another preservation effect>
Next, a configuration for performing another storage effect will be described.

  The separate storage effect is to store drawing data created by projecting three-dimensional image data arranged in the world coordinate system onto a virtual two-dimensional plane as separate storage data, and thereafter storing the drawing data. Is set in the plate-shaped object data to place it in the world coordinate system, and the other saved data is projected together with other image data placed in the world coordinate system onto a virtual two-dimensional plane to create drawing data. The effect is to display an image by performing In addition, during the period in which an image is displayed using drawing data created based on arranging the separately stored data in the world coordinate system, when the separately stored data is created, the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane is used. The mask control for excluding the three-dimensional image data from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane is executed. The image data that is excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane in the mask control may not be arranged in the world coordinate system. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that it is further excluded from the projection target. By executing the drawing data creation using the separately stored data and the mask control in this manner, the processing load of the VDP 205 can be reduced even when the types of images to be displayed increase. Becomes

  FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the specific contents of the separate storage effect. FIGS. 88 (a1) and 88 (b1) show how three-dimensional image data is arranged in the world coordinate system. FIG. 88 (a2) and FIG. 88 (b2) show the contents of an image displayed using drawing data created by projecting it on a virtual two-dimensional plane.

  In the situation where the separate save effect has not been executed, as shown in FIG. 88 (a1), the rearmost image data 241 is arranged at the farthest position with respect to the viewpoint PC11, and the Image data 242 for one background individual image and image data 243 for the second background individual image are arranged, and further, image data 244 for effect characters is arranged on the near side. Note that the rearmost image data 241 is image data obtained by pasting the rearmost texture data to plate-shaped object data (that is, a plate polygon). The plate-shaped object data is object data having no thickness, and has a smaller data capacity and a smaller processing load for geometry calculation and rendering in the VDP 205 as compared with thick three-dimensional object data.

  In the state where the three-dimensional image data 241 to 244 are arranged as shown in FIG. 88 (a1), projection onto a virtual two-dimensional plane is performed to create drawing data, and as shown in FIG. 88 (a2). Such an image for one frame can be displayed on the symbol display device 41. In the image for one frame, the first background individual image G72 and the second background individual image G73 are displayed in front of the rearmost image G71, and the effect character image G74 is further displayed in front of this. Then, between the update timings of the plurality of images, the arrangement position and shape of the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, and the image data 244 for the effect character in the world coordinate system, etc. Is changed, it is possible to change the display position and shape of the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74 in the image for one frame.

  In the state where the three-dimensional image data 241 to 244 are arranged as shown in FIG. 88 (a1), the backmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data for the second background individual image By performing the projection process on the virtual two-dimensional plane while setting the image data 244 for the effected character as the projection target while the projection target 243 is the projection target, the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, It is possible to create two-dimensional drawing data that enables a still image of the second background individual image G73 to be displayed as the first separately stored data. The first saved data is pasted to the plate-shaped polygon data to be arranged as first saved image data 245 in the world coordinate system, and image data 244 for the effect character and an image for the additional individual image By arranging the data 246, the state shown in FIG. 88 (b1) is obtained. Then, in this state, the first separate saved image data 245, the image data 244 for effect characters, and the image data 246 for additional individual images are projected onto a virtual two-dimensional plane to create drawing data. This makes it possible to display an image for one frame on the symbol display device 41 as shown in FIG. 88 (b2). In the image for one frame, the first background individual image G72 and the second background individual image G73 are displayed in front of the rearmost image G71, and the effect character image G74 and the additional individual image G75 are further in front thereof. Is displayed.

  However, since the image data for displaying the first background individual image G72 and the second background individual image G73 is arranged as a still image in the world coordinate system using the first separate saved image data 245, a plurality of images are displayed. Between the update timings, the arrangement position, shape, and the like of the first background individual image G72 and the second background individual image G73 cannot be individually changed. On the other hand, the image data for displaying the effect character image G74 and the additional individual image G75 are individually arranged in the world coordinate system as the image data 244 for the effect character and the image data 246 for the additional individual image. It is possible to individually change the arrangement position, shape, and the like of the effect character image G74 and the additional individual image G75 between the image update timings.

  As described above, when the drawing data is created using the first separate saved image data 245, the first separate saved image data 245 is the rearmost one when the first separate saved data is created in the world coordinate system. , The image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are arranged on the nearer side than the positions where the image data 241 were arranged. Then, the space MS1 on the back side of the first separate saved image data 245 is excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane by the mask control. Accordingly, when drawing data is created using the first separate saved image data 245, a virtual two-dimensional image is displayed to display the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73. The number of image data to be projected on a plane is reduced, and the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying these images G71 to G73 is reduced. Therefore, even if the additional individual image G75 is newly added as a display target, it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load of the VDP 205.

  By executing the mask control, the rearmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane. Even in the situation, the work RAM 202 stores and holds parameter information such as coordinate information and scale information for the image data 241 to 243. Thus, when returning to a period in which an image is displayed by projecting the image data 241 to 243 onto a virtual two-dimensional plane, an area for updating the parameter information of the image data 241 to 243 is secured in the work RAM 202. It is not necessary to execute processing for performing the operation. In order to newly set the parameter information of the image data as an update target, an initial process such as a search process of a storage area of the work RAM 202 for storing and holding the parameter information and a process of clearing the storage area searched by the search process are performed. It is necessary to execute the setting processing, and the processing load of the initial setting processing is larger than the processing load for updating the parameter information. In such a situation, the parameter information of the image data 241 to 243 subjected to the mask control is stored and held in the work RAM 202, so that the processing load of the display CPU 201 when the mask control is released is extremely large. It is possible to prevent that from happening.

  Further, even when the image data 241 to 243 are excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane due to the execution of the mask control, the display CPU 201 sets the image data for the first background individual image. The updating process of the parameter information about the image data 243 for the second background individual image 242 and the second background individual image is continued. Thus, immediately after the period in which the image display using the first separate saved image data 245 is performed, the first background individual image G72 and the second background individual image G73 are changed from the state immediately before the start of the period. Instead of resuming the movement, the display state immediately before the start of the period is changed from the state where the change of the movement is continued for the duration of the period according to the display pattern up to that time, to the first background individual image. The movement of G72 and the second background individual image G73 can be restarted.

  Further, by performing the mask control, the rearmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane. Even in such a situation, a buffer area storing information referred to for arranging these image data 241 to 243 in the world coordinate system in the VRAM 204 is held. Thus, when returning to a period in which an image is displayed by projecting the image data 241 to 243 on a virtual two-dimensional plane, information referred to for arranging the image data 241 to 243 in the world coordinate system is obtained. There is no need to execute processing for securing a buffer area to store in the VRAM 204. In order to secure the buffer area, it is necessary to execute an initial setting process such as a process of searching for a storage region of the VRAM 204 and a process of clearing the storage region searched by the search process, but this is a target of mask control. By holding the buffer areas of the image data 241 to 243 as they are in the VRAM 204, it is possible to prevent the processing load of the VDP 205 from becoming extremely large when the mask control is released.

  Here, in a situation where the mask control is being performed, if it becomes necessary to create separate storage data using image data that has been excluded from the projection target due to the mask control, the image data is excluded from the projection target. Therefore, it is not possible to create separate storage data using the image data. A case where such an event occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 (a) to 89 (c). FIGS. 89 (a1) to 89 (c1) show how three-dimensional image data is arranged in the world coordinate system, and FIGS. 89 (a2) to 89 (c2) show projection on a virtual two-dimensional plane. 5 shows the contents of an image displayed using the drawing data created in step (1).

  As shown in FIG. 89 (a1), the rearmost image data 241 is arranged at the innermost position in the world coordinate system, and the image data 242 for the first background individual image and the image data 242 for the second background individual image The image data 243 is arranged on the virtual two-dimensional plane in a state where the image data 244 for the effect character is arranged on the near side, and the drawing data is created. An image for one frame as shown in (a2) can be displayed on the symbol display device 41. In this case, the drawing data created in the arrangement state of the respective image data 241 to 244 as shown in FIG. 89 (a1) is stored as the second separate storage data.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 89 (b1), the second saved data is pasted to the plate-shaped polygon data to be arranged as the second saved image data 247 in the world coordinate system, The effect image data 248 for displaying the effect image G76 is arranged before the saved image data 247. Then, by projecting the second saved image data 247 and the effect image data 248 onto a virtual two-dimensional plane to create drawing data, one frame as shown in FIG. Can be displayed on the symbol display device 41. Note that the effect image data 248 is data in which texture data for an effect image is pasted on plate-like polygon data. The effect image data 248 has a transparent or translucent α value set as a whole and is opaque. Is not set, the effect image data 248 is overwritten on the second separate saved image data 247 in a state where the transparentizing process or the semi-transparentizing process is performed.

  As described above, when the drawing data is created by using the second saved image data 247, the second saved image data 247 is the rearmost image when the second saved data is created in the world coordinate system. , The image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, and the image data 244 for the effect character are arranged closer to the front than the positions where the image data 241 was arranged. Then, the space MS2 on the back side of the second separate saved image data 247 is excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane by the mask control. Accordingly, when drawing data is created using the second separate saved image data 247, the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74 are displayed. Therefore, the number of image data to be projected on the virtual two-dimensional plane is reduced, and the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying these images G71 to G74 is reduced. Therefore, even if the effect image G76 is newly added as a display target, it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load of the VDP 205.

  However, immediately after the image display using the second separate saved image data 247 is performed, the first separate saved image data 245, the image data 244 for the effect character, and the additional individual image as shown in FIG. When it is necessary to display an image using the image data 246 for the image, the backmost image data 241 and the first background are displayed while the image is displayed using the second separate saved image data 247. Since the mask control is performed on the image data 242 for the individual image and the image data 243 for the second background individual image, the first separate saved image data 245 cannot be created. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 88 (c1), the first separate saved image data 245 cannot be arranged behind the image data 244 for the effect character and the image data 246 for the additional individual image in the world coordinate system. As shown in FIG. 88 (c2), the effect character image G74 and the additional individual image G75 are displayed in a state where the background image is not displayed. Further, for example, not only the image data 244 for the effect character and the image data 246 for the additional individual image in the world coordinate system, but also the image data 241 for the backmost, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the second background individual image When the image data 243 is arranged and all the image data 241 to 244 and 246 are projected onto a virtual two-dimensional plane to create drawing data, the processing load of the VDP 205 increases. As a case where such a situation occurs, in the present pachinko machine 10, an operation corresponding effect in which an image is displayed using the second separate saved image data 247 when the effect operation device 48 is operated occurs. In such a configuration, there is a case where it is necessary to display an image using the first separate saved image data 245 immediately after the operation corresponding effect ends.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to display the image using the first separate saved image data 245 immediately after the image using the second separate saved image data 247 is displayed. It has a configuration. Hereinafter, the manner in which the separate storage effect is performed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a time chart showing a state in which another storage effect is performed. FIG. 90A shows a normal drawing period in which mask control is not performed, and FIG. 90B shows a mask control period in which mask control is performed. FIG. 90 (c) shows the timing at which at least one of the first separately stored data and the second separately saved data is executed, and FIG. 90 (d) shows the timing when the first separately saved data is provided in the VRAM 204. 90 (e) shows a period during which the second separate storage data is stored and held in the second separate storage buffer 252 provided in the VRAM 204, and FIG. FIG. 90 (f) shows the operation validity period of the effect operation device 48, FIG. 90 (g) shows the operation timing of the effect operation device 48, and FIG. 90 (h) shows the execution period of the operation corresponding effect.

  First, a case where an image is displayed using the first separate saved image data 245 will be described.

  In the normal drawing period in which the mask control is not performed as shown in FIG. 90A, the storage execution timing of the first separate storage data is reached at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 90C. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b), first separate storage data is created, and the first separate storage data is stored and held in the first separate storage buffer 251 of the VRAM 204. As a result, as shown in FIG. 90D, at the timing of t1, the first separate storage image data 245 is stored and held in the first separate storage buffer 251.

  Thereafter, at a timing of t2, a period in which an image using the first separate saved image data 245 is displayed becomes a period in which mask control is performed as shown in FIGS. 90A and 90B. . In this case, even during the period in which the mask control is performed, the first backed-up image data 245 corresponds to the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73 to be displayed. The various parameter information on the image data 241 to 243 to be stored is stored and held in the work RAM 202, and the update processing of the various parameter information is continued in the display CPU 201.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3, the period for displaying the image using the first separate saved image data 245 ends, and the mask control ends as shown in FIGS. 90A and 90B. The process returns to the normal writing period in which the mask control is not performed. In this case, as described above, even during the mask control period, the display CPU 201 for displaying various parameter information on the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73, respectively. , The display of these images G71 to G73 is started from the display mode corresponding to the timing when the execution period of the mask control has elapsed from the timing when the mask control is started.

  Next, a case will be described in which an image is displayed using the first saved image data 245 immediately after an image is displayed using the second saved image data 247. In the following description, FIGS. 91A to 91C are appropriately referred to. FIGS. 91 (a) to 91 (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining how an image is displayed using the first separately stored image data 245 and an image is displayed using the second separately stored image data 247. 91 (a1) to 91 (c1) show how three-dimensional image data is arranged in the world coordinate system, and FIGS. 91 (a2) to 91 (c2) show projection on a virtual two-dimensional plane. This shows the contents of the image displayed using the drawing data created by the drawing.

  In the normal drawing period in which the mask control is not performed as shown in FIG. 90 (a), at the timing t4, the operation effective period of the staging operation device 48 is started as shown in FIG. 90 (f). In this case, separate storage is performed at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 90 (c). At the execution timing of the separate save, both the first separate save data and the second separate save data are subjected to the separate save.

  The manner in which both the first saved data and the second saved data are created will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 91 (a1), the rearmost image data 241 is arranged at the innermost position in the world coordinate system, and the image data 242 for the first background individual image and the image data 242 for the second background individual image When the image data 243 is placed on the virtual two-dimensional plane in a state where the image data 244 for the effect character is further placed on the near side, drawing data is created. An image for one frame as shown in (a2) can be displayed on the symbol display device 41. In this case, the drawing data created by projecting all of the image data 241 to 244 shown in FIG. 91 (a1) onto the virtual two-dimensional plane is stored as the second storage data in the second storage buffer 252. You. The second separate storage data is data that enables display of still images of the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74.

  Also, in a state where the three-dimensional image data 241 to 244 are arranged as shown in FIG. 91 (a1), the backmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 242 for the second background individual image are arranged. The projection processing on the virtual two-dimensional plane is performed while the image data 243 is set as the projection target and the image data 244 for the effect character is not set as the projection target, so that the rearmost image G71 and the first background individual Two-dimensional drawing data that enables the display of the still image of the image G72 and the second background individual image G73 is created as the first separate storage data. Then, the first separate storage data is stored in the first separate storage buffer 251.

  Returning to the description with reference to FIG. 90, the first separate storage data and the second separate storage data are created at the timing of t4, so that the first separate storage buffer 251 is stored in the first separate storage buffer 251 as shown in FIG. The separate storage data is stored and held, and the second storage data is stored and held in the second storage buffer 252 as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t5, the operation operation device 48 is operated as shown in FIG. 90 (g), whereby the operation corresponding effect is started as shown in FIG. 90 (h). In this case, as shown in FIG. 91 (b1), the second separately stored data is pasted on the plate-shaped polygon data and arranged as second separately saved image data 247 in the world coordinate system, and Effect image data 248 for displaying the effect image G76 is arranged in front of the saved image data 247. Then, the second separate saved image data 247 and the effect image data 248 are projected onto a virtual two-dimensional plane to create drawing data, and thereby one frame worth as shown in FIG. Can be displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  By starting the operation-response effect at the timing of t5, a period during which the mask control is performed as shown in FIGS. 90A and 90B at the timing of the t5. In this case, even during the period in which the mask control is performed, the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image to be displayed in the second separate saved image data 247 are displayed. Various parameter information for the image data 241 to 244 corresponding to each of the G74 is stored and held in the work RAM 202, and the update processing of the various parameter information is continued in the display CPU 201.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t6, the operation corresponding effect ends as shown in FIG. 90 (h). In this case, the display of the image using the first saved image data 245 is started at the timing of t6. In this case, as shown in FIG. 91 (c1), the first separate saved data is pasted on the plate-shaped polygon data and arranged as the first separate saved image data 245 in the world coordinate system, and a directing character Image data 244 and image data 246 for additional individual images are arranged. Then, in this state, the first separate saved image data 245, the image data 244 for effect characters, and the image data 246 for additional individual images are projected onto a virtual two-dimensional plane to create drawing data. This makes it possible to display an image for one frame on the symbol display device 41 as shown in FIG. 91 (c2). In this case, as described above, since the updating process of the parameter information on the effect character image data 244 in the display CPU 201 is continued even during the mask control period, the display control of the effect character image G74 is started by the mask control. It starts from the display mode corresponding to the timing when the execution period of the mask control has elapsed with respect to the timing.

  When the display of the image using the first separately stored image data 245 is started at the timing of t6, the mask control is continued as illustrated in FIGS. 90A and 90B. However, the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73 are subject to the mask control, and the effect character image G74 and the additional individual The image data 244 and 246 corresponding to the image G75 are not subject to mask control. Various parameter information on the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to each of the images G71 to G73 to be mask-controlled is stored and held in the work RAM 202, and the display CPU 201 continues to update the various parameter information. You.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t7, the period in which the image using the first separate saved image data 245 is displayed ends, and the mask control ends as shown in FIGS. 90A and 90B. The process returns to the normal writing period in which the mask control is not performed. In this case, as described above, even during the mask control period, the display CPU 201 for displaying various parameter information on the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73, respectively. , The display of these images G71 to G73 is started from the display mode corresponding to the timing when the execution period of the mask control has elapsed from the timing when the mask control is started. This makes it possible to match the effect contents with the effect execution devices other than the symbol display device 41 such as the speaker unit 45.

  Next, although both the first saved data and the second saved data are separately saved, the first saved image data 245 is used without displaying an image using the second saved image data 247. A case where the displayed image is displayed will be described.

  In the normal drawing period in which the mask control is not performed as shown in FIG. 90A, the operation valid period of the staging operation device 48 becomes the start timing at the timing t8 as shown in FIG. 90F. In this case, as in the case of the timing of t4, the execution timing of the separate storage for both the first separately stored data and the second separately stored data is reached as shown in FIG. 90 (c). Accordingly, the first separate storage data is stored and held in the first separate storage buffer 251 as shown in FIG. 90 (d), and the second separate storage buffer 252 is stored in the second separate storage buffer 252 as shown in FIG. 90 (e). The state in which the separately stored data is stored and held.

  However, as shown in FIG. 90 (f) and FIG. 90 (g), at the timing of t9, the operation validity period elapses without the operation device 48 for operation being operated. In this case, since the display of the image using the second separately stored image data 247 is not performed, the mask control is not performed from the timing t8 to the timing t9. Therefore, at the timing of t9, the first separate storage data to be used thereafter is created again. That is, the first separate storage data created at the timing of t8 and stored and held in the first separate storage buffer 251 is deleted, and the first separate storage data created at the timing of t9 is stored in the first separate storage buffer 251. Newly stored. This makes it possible to display each of the images G71 to G73 in a display mode at a timing closer to the timing of using the first separate saved image data 245 as an image using the first separate saved image data 245. Become. The timing at which the first separate storage data is newly created is the timing of updating the next image with respect to the timing of updating the image after the operation valid period has elapsed.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t10, the display of the image using the first separately stored image data 245 is started, so that the mask control is started as shown in FIGS. 90 (a) and 90 (b). However, the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73 are subject to the mask control, and the effect character image G74 and the additional individual The image data 244 and 246 corresponding to the image G75 are not subject to mask control. Various parameter information on the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to each of the images G71 to G73 to be mask-controlled is stored and held in the work RAM 202, and the display CPU 201 continues to update the various parameter information. You.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t11, the period of displaying the image using the first separate saved image data 245 ends, and the mask control ends as shown in FIGS. 90 (a) and 90 (b). The process returns to the normal writing period in which the mask control is not performed. In this case, as described above, even during the mask control period, the display CPU 201 for displaying various parameter information on the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73, respectively. , The display of these images G71 to G73 is started from the display mode corresponding to the timing when the execution period of the mask control has elapsed from the timing when the mask control is started. This makes it possible to match the effect contents with the effect execution devices other than the symbol display device 41 such as the speaker unit 45.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the separate storage effect will be described. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for another storage effect executed by the display CPU 201. Note that the calculation processing for another storage effect is executed in the game operation in which the separate storage effect is to be executed by the background calculation processing of step S2503 in the task processing (FIG. 68).

  First, by updating the pointer information to be referred to in the execution target table read to the work RAM 202 in order to control the effect for the current game round, the contents of the data to be referred to in the execution target table are updated this time. (Step S3601). Thereafter, if neither the operation corresponding effect is being executed nor the operation validity period (step S3602 and step S3603: NO), it is determined whether it is the use period of the first saved data (step S3604). The use period of the first separate saved data is a game time in which the operation validity period does not occur and is a game time in which the separate saved effect occurs, and occurs when the elapsed time of the game time reaches a predetermined time. In the case of a game in which an operation validity period occurs, this occurs when the operation validity period elapses without the operation corresponding performance being executed or when the operation corresponding performance ends.

  If it is not the use period of the first separate storage data (step S3604: NO), the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S3605). The image data includes the backmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, and the image data 244 for the effect character. Thereafter, parameter information is calculated and derived for each of the rendering character image data 244, the backmost image data 241, the first background individual image image data 242, and the second background individual image image data 243. The derived parameter information is written in the area secured in the work RAM 202 in correspondence with each of the image data 241 to 244 (steps S3606 and S3607). After that, the non-use instruction information of the separately stored data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3608). If it is the time to create the first saved data (step S3609: YES), the first creation instruction information of the separately saved data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3610).

  When the calculation processing for the separate storage effect is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S2407) includes various image data 241 to 244 grasped in step S3605. Is set as a placement target in the world coordinate system. In the drawing list, parameter information applied to the image data 241 to 244 is set. In addition, the non-use instruction information of the separate storage data is set in the drawing list, and the first creation instruction information of the separate storage data is set if this time is the creation timing of the first separate storage data.

  If the first save data is being used during the separate save effect calculation process (step S3604: YES), the image data of the type corresponding to the current update timing is updated based on the currently set execution target table. It is determined (steps S3611 to S3613). The image data includes first storage data stored in the first storage buffer 251, image data 244 for effect characters, and image data 246 for additional individual images. Thereafter, the image data 244 for the effect character, the image data 241 for the rearmost image, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, the image data 246 for the additional individual image, and the first The parameter information is calculated and derived for each of the separately stored data, and the derived parameter information is written in the area secured in the work RAM 202 in correspondence with each of the image data 241 to 244 and 246 (steps S3614 to S3617). . In this case, the rearmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are not arranged in the world coordinate system. The storage and the updating of the parameter information about 246 in the work RAM 202 are continued. After that, the use instruction information of the separately stored data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3618).

  When the calculation processing for the separate storage effect is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S2407) includes various image data grasped in steps S3611 to S3613. 241 to 244 and 246 are set as placement targets in the world coordinate system. In the drawing list, parameter information to be applied to the image data 241 to 244 and 246 is set. In addition, use instruction information of separate storage data is set in the drawing list.

  In the calculation processing for the separate storage effect, if the operation is valid (step S3603: YES), the process is performed during the operation valid period in step S3618, and if the operation-response effect is being performed (step S3602: YES), in step S3619, an operation corresponding effect during processing is executed. The processing during the operation valid period and the processing during the operation corresponding effect are described below.

  FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing processing during the operation valid period.

  If it is the start timing of the operation valid period (step S3701: YES), the second creation instruction information of the separately stored data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3702). When the process of step S3702 is executed, or when it is not the start timing of the operation valid period and the operation device for staging 48 is not operated (step S3701 and step S3703: NO), based on the currently set execution target table Then, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped (step S3704). The image data includes the backmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, and the image data 244 for the effect character. Thereafter, parameter information is calculated and derived for each of the rendering character image data 244, the backmost image data 241, the first background individual image image data 242, and the second background individual image image data 243. The derived parameter information is written in the area secured in the work RAM 202 in correspondence with each of the image data 241 to 244 (steps S3705 and S3706). Thereafter, the validity period information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3707). If it is the end timing of the operation validity period (step S3708: YES), the first creation instruction information of the separately stored data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3709).

  When the processing during the operation valid period is performed as described above, the various image data 241 to 244 grasped in step S3704 are included in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S2407). It is set as a placement target in the coordinate system. In the drawing list, parameter information applied to the image data 241 to 244 is set. Further, the validity period information is set in the drawing list, and if the current time is the start timing of the operation validity period, the second creation instruction information of the separate saved data is set, and this time is the end timing of the operation validity period. For example, first creation instruction information of separately stored data is set.

  When the effect operation device 48 is operated in the process during the operation valid period (step S3703: YES), the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S3703). S3710 and step S3711). The image data includes the second separately stored data and the effect image data 248 stored and held in the second separately stored buffer 252. After that, the image data 244 for the effect character, the image data 241 for the rearmost image, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, the effect image data 248 and the second The parameter information is calculated and derived for each of them, and the derived parameter information is written in the area secured in the work RAM 202 in correspondence with each of the image data 241 to 244 and 248 (steps S3712 to S3715). In this case, the rendering character image data 244, the backmost image data 241, the first background individual image image data 242, and the second background individual image image data 243 are not placed in the world coordinate system. The storage of the parameter information of the image data 241 to 244 in the work RAM 202 and the updating of the parameter information are continued. After that, the operation corresponding effect information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3716).

  When the arithmetic processing for the separate storage effect is performed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S2407) includes various image data obtained in steps S3710 and S3711. 248 is set as an arrangement target in the world coordinate system. In the drawing list, parameter information applied to the image data 248 is set. Further, operation corresponding effect information is set in the drawing list.

  FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the operation-in-progress effect processing.

  First, based on the currently set execution target table, image data of a type corresponding to the current update timing is grasped (steps S3801 and S3802). The image data includes the second separately stored data and the effect image data 248 stored and held in the second separately stored buffer 252. After that, the image data 244 for the effect character, the image data 241 for the rearmost image, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, the effect image data 248 and the second The parameter information is calculated and derived for each of them, and the derived parameter information is written to the area secured in the work RAM 202 in correspondence with each of the image data 241 to 244 and 248 (steps S3803 to S3806). In this case, the rendering character image data 244, the backmost image data 241, the first background individual image image data 242, and the second background individual image image data 243 are not placed in the world coordinate system. The storage of the parameter information of the image data 241 to 244 in the work RAM 202 and the updating of the parameter information are continued. After that, the operation corresponding effect information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3806).

  When the calculation processing for the separate storage effect is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S2407) includes various image data grasped in steps S3801 and S3802. 248 is set as an arrangement target in the world coordinate system. In the drawing list, parameter information applied to the image data 248 is set. Further, operation corresponding effect information is set in the drawing list.

  Next, the setting processing for separate storage display executed by the VDP 205 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The setting process for separate storage display is executed as a part of the background setting process executed in step S2602 of the drawing process (FIG. 70). Further, when non-use instruction information of separate save data, use instruction information of separate save data, validity period information, or operation corresponding effect information is set in the drawing list, a setting process for separate save display is executed.

  When the use instruction information of the separate storage data is not set in the current drawing list and the operation corresponding effect information is not set in the current drawing list (step S3901: NO), the most recent drawing list is used. The rear image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, and the image data 244 for the effect character are grasped as objects to be arranged in the world coordinate system (step S3902). . The parameter information applied to the image data 241 to 244 is grasped based on the current drawing list (step S3903). Then, a setting process for the world coordinate system is performed in a state where the parameter information obtained this time is applied to the image data 241 to 244 to be arranged (step S3904). As a result, an image for one frame as shown in FIG. 91 (a2) is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  When the use instruction information of the separate storage data is set in the current drawing list (step S3905: YES), the first separate storage data, the image data 244 for the effect character, and the additional individual image Of the image data 246 as an arrangement target in the world coordinate system (steps S3906 to S3908). In addition, parameter information to be applied to the first separate storage data, the image data 244 for effect characters, and the image data 246 for additional individual images is grasped based on the current drawing list (step S3909). Then, the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed in a state where the parameter information obtained this time is applied to the first separate storage data, the image data 244 for the effect character, and the image data 246 for the additional individual image (step). S3904). As a result, an image for one frame as shown in FIG. 91 (c2) is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  When the operation-response effect information is set in the current drawing list (step S3905: NO), based on the current drawing list, the second-specific saved data and the effect image data 248 are grasped as placement targets in the world coordinate system. (Step S3910 and Step S3911). In addition, parameter information applied to the second saved data and the effect image data 248 is grasped based on the current drawing list (step S3912). Then, the setting process for the world coordinate system is executed in a state where the parameter information obtained this time is applied to the second saved data and the effect image data 248 (step S3904). Thereby, an image for one frame as shown in FIG. 91 (b2) is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  Next, a description will be given, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 96, of the drawing data creation processing for separate storage display executed by the VDP 205. The drawing data creation processing for separate storage display is executed as a part of the rendering data creation processing for the effect and the background executed in step S2610 of the drawing processing (FIG. 70). Further, when non-use instruction information of separate storage data, use instruction information of separate storage data, validity period information or operation corresponding effect information is set in the drawing list, drawing data creation processing for separate storage display is executed. You.

  When the first creation instruction information of separate storage data or the second creation instruction information of separate storage data is set in the current drawing list (step S4001: YES), the backmost image data 241 and the first background individual image The first separate storage data is created by projecting the image data 242 and the image data 243 for the second background individual image onto a virtual two-dimensional plane (step S4002). Then, the created first separate storage data is written to the first separate storage buffer 251 of the VRAM 204 (step S4003). As a result, the first storage data is stored and held in the first storage buffer 251.

  When a negative determination is made in step S4001 or when the process in step S4002 is performed, drawing data for displaying any of the images in FIGS. 91 (a2), 91 (b2), and 91 (c2) is created. (Step S4004). The drawing data is used in the drawing data synthesis processing in step S2612 in the drawing processing (FIG. 70) to display an image of one frame.

  Thereafter, when the second creation instruction information of the separate storage data is set in the current drawing list (step S4005: YES), the drawing data created in the immediately preceding step S4004 is used as the second separate storage data in the second of the VRAM 204. The data is written to the separate storage buffer 252 (step S4006). As a result, the second storage data is stored and held in the second storage buffer 252. Further, since the drawing data used to display the image of one frame is used as it is as the second saved data, the processing load for creating the second saved data can be reduced.

  As described above, when an image is displayed using the first separate saved data, the backmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are displayed. On the other hand, it is possible to display the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73 while performing the mask control. Accordingly, the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73 is reduced, and even if the additional individual image G75 is newly added as a display target. , VDP 205 can be prevented from increasing. When an image is displayed using the second saved data, the backmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, and the effect character It is possible to display the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74 while performing the mask control on the image data 244 for use. As a result, the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74 is reduced, and the effect image G76 is newly added as a display target. Even if the processing is performed, it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load of the VDP 205.

  The parameter information of the image data that is excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane due to the execution of the mask control is stored and held in the work RAM 202 without being erased. Accordingly, when returning to a period in which an image is displayed by projecting the image data on a virtual two-dimensional plane, a process for securing an area for updating parameter information of the image data in the work RAM 202 is executed. There is no need to do so. In order to newly set the parameter information of the image data as an update target, an initial process such as a search process of a storage area of the work RAM 202 for storing and holding the parameter information and a process of clearing the storage area searched by the search process are performed. It is necessary to execute the setting processing, and the processing load of the initial setting processing is larger than the processing load for updating the parameter information. In such a situation, the parameter information of the image data subject to the mask control is stored and held in the work RAM 202, so that the processing load on the display CPU 201 when the mask control is released becomes extremely large. Can be prevented.

  Further, even in a situation where the predetermined image data is excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane due to the execution of the mask control, the display CPU 201 performs the update processing of the parameter information for the predetermined image data. continue. As a result, immediately after the period in which the image display using the first saved data or the second saved data is performed is completed, the movement of the image corresponding to the predetermined image data from the state immediately before the start of the period. Is not restarted, but the display state immediately before the start of the period is changed from the state in which the change of the movement is continued for the time period in which the period is continued according to the display pattern up to that time to the predetermined image data. The movement of the corresponding image can be resumed. This makes it possible to match the effect contents with the effect execution devices other than the symbol display device 41 such as the speaker unit 45.

  Further, by performing the mask control, the rearmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane. Even in such a situation, a buffer area storing information referred to for arranging these image data 241 to 243 in the world coordinate system in the VRAM 204 is held. Thus, when returning to a period in which an image is displayed by projecting the image data 241 to 243 on a virtual two-dimensional plane, information referred to for arranging the image data 241 to 243 in the world coordinate system is obtained. There is no need to execute processing for securing a buffer area to store in the VRAM 204. In order to secure the buffer area, it is necessary to execute an initial setting process such as a process of searching for a storage region of the VRAM 204 and a process of clearing the storage region searched by the search process, but this is a target of mask control. By holding the buffer areas of the image data 241 to 243 as they are in the VRAM 204, it is possible to prevent the processing load of the VDP 205 from becoming extremely large when the mask control is released.

  In a case where a period for displaying an image using the first separate storage data may occur immediately after a period for displaying an image using the second separate storage data ends, an image using the second separate storage data is displayed. Before the start of the period, the first separate storage data is created in addition to the second separate storage data. Accordingly, even if the mask control is executed on the image data 241 to 243 for creating the first separate storage data during the period of displaying the image using the second separate storage data, Immediately after the period for displaying the image using the stored data ends, the image using the first separate stored data can be displayed.

  Further, even in a configuration in which the first separate storage data is created before the period for displaying the image using the second separate storage data is started, the period for displaying the image using the second separate storage data is limited. If the mask control is not performed on the image data 241 to 243 for creating the first separate storage data due to the occurrence of the first save data, the image data 241 to 243 immediately before the display of the image using the first separate save data is started is started. Creation of one-by-one storage data is newly performed. This makes it possible to display each of the images G71 to G73 in a display mode at a timing closer to the timing of using the first separate storage data as an image using the first separate storage data.

<Another form of another preservation effect>
-Instead of a configuration in which both the first and second saved data are stored and held when the operation valid period starts, the first separate saved data is provided at a predetermined timing before the operation valid period starts. One of the second saved data is stored and held, and the other saved data is stored after the predetermined timing and before the start of the operation valid period or at the start timing of the operation valid period. It may be configured to be held. In this case, it is possible to disperse the processing load as compared with a configuration in which both the first saved data and the second saved data are stored and held in the same process.

  When the mask control is being executed, the image data subject to the mask control is not arranged in the world coordinate system. Instead, the image data subject to the mask control is also implemented in the world coordinate system. , But may be excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane. In this case, when the mask control is completed, it is not necessary to execute a process for arranging the image data to be subjected to the mask control again in the world coordinate system. In this configuration, the image data to be mask-controlled may be arranged in the world coordinate system, but the parameter information applied to the image data in the VDP 205 may not be changed. However, it is preferable that the update of the parameter information of the image data in the display CPU 201 be continued.

  -Instead of the configuration in which the update of the parameter information about the image data subject to the mask control is continued in the display CPU 201, the update of the parameter information in the display CPU 201 about the image data subject to the mask control is performed. It is good also as a structure which is not performed. In this case, the operation of the image corresponding to the image data subject to the mask control is restarted from the display state of the image corresponding to the separately stored data. Even in this configuration, it is preferable that the work RAM 202 store and hold the state in which the parameter information to be subjected to the mask control is stored during the execution of the mask control.

  The separately stored data separately stored in advance is not limited to two types, and may be three or more types. Further, the configuration of the mask control described above may be applied to a configuration in which the separate storage data is one type.

<Configuration for performing angle display effect>
Next, a configuration for performing an angle display effect will be described.

  The angle display effect uses a plurality of types of moving images that enable the display object whose movement changes with time to be viewed from different angles, and is used until then based on the operation of the operation device 48 for effect. This is an effect that changes the use target to a video with an angle different from the target video. The specific display contents of the angle display effect will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b). As shown in FIG. 97 (a) and FIG. 97 (b), in the angle display effect, a live-action video is displayed as a moving image. In this live-action video, a person is displayed as the live-action character image G81, and the state in which the live-action character image G81 moves is displayed as a moving image. Further, FIG. 97 (a) corresponds to a moving image in which a person of the real image character image G81 is captured from an A angle which is a predetermined angle with respect to the real image character image G81, and FIG. 97 (b) is different from the A angle. This corresponds to a moving image obtained by capturing the person of the real photographed character image G81 from the angle. In addition to the A-angle moving image and the B-angle moving image, there is also a moving image in which the person of the photographed character image G81 is captured from a C angle different from the A-angle and the B-angle.

  The contents of data stored in advance in the memory module 203 to execute the angle display effect will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  In the memory module 203 as data for executing the angle display effect, as the moving image data for displaying the moving image of the A angle, the first moving image data group 261 of the A angle, the second moving image data group 262 of the A angle, and A An angle third moving image data group 263 is stored in advance. Further, the memory module 203 includes, as moving image data for displaying a B-angle moving image, a first moving image data group 264 of B angle, a second moving image data group 265 of B angle, and a third moving image data group 266 of B angle. Is stored in advance. In the memory module 203, as moving image data for displaying a moving image of C angle, a first moving image data group 267 of C angle, a second moving image data group 268 of C angle, and a third moving image data group 269 of C angle are provided. Is stored in advance.

  FIG. 99 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each of the moving image data groups 261 to 269. FIG. 99 (a) shows the first moving image data group 261 of A angle, and FIG. 99 (b) shows the second moving image of A angle. FIG. 99 (c) shows a third moving image data group 263 having an A angle, FIG. 99 (d) shows a first moving image data group 264 having a B angle, and FIG. 99 (e) shows a B angle. 99 (f) shows a third moving image data group 266 of B angle, FIG. 99 (g) shows a first moving image data group 267 of C angle, and FIG. 99 (h). ) Shows a second moving image data group 268 of C angle, and FIG. 99 (i) shows a third moving image data group 269 of C angle.

  As shown in FIGS. 99 (a) to 99 (i), each of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 has a plurality of moving image data 271a to 273c. As described above, the moving image data 271a to 273c are image data compressed between frames so as to have a plurality of pieces of difference data based on one frame of still image data, and encoded by, for example, the MPEG2 method. . When the moving image data 271a to 273c are decoded, the moving image data 271a to 273c are expanded into still image data for a plurality of frames.

  One moving image data 271a to 273c included in each of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 has a data amount such that the minimum unit number of still image data that can be set as moving image data can be reproduced. Is set. For the minimum unit number of still image data, specifically, each of the moving image data 271a to 273c can reproduce 48 still image data, in other words, can update the image 48 times (update 48 frames). It has become. Each of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 has the same number (specifically, 20) of such moving image data 271a to 273c.

  Each of the first moving image data group 261 of the A-angle, the second moving image data group 262 of the A-angle, and the third moving image data group 263 of the A-angle corresponds to the A-angle in which the actual captured character image G81 moves according to a predetermined motion pattern. This is for displaying a series of moving images viewed at an angle. A series of moving images viewed at an angle corresponding to the A angle is divided into a plurality of moving image data 271a to 271c in the moving image data groups 261 to 263 of the A angle. In this case, in each of the moving image data groups 261 to 263 of the A angle, the last order still image data in the moving image data 271a to 271c in which the order to be decoded is a predetermined order, and the next order with respect to the predetermined order The motion of the photographed character image G81 in the predetermined motion pattern has continuity with the still image data of the first order in the moving image data 271a to 271c in the order. Therefore, if the first moving image data group 261 has an A-angle, the image display is performed while sequentially decoding the moving image data 271a included in the first moving image data group 261 having the A-angle according to a predetermined decoding order. Accordingly, it is possible to display a series of motions in which the actual photographed character image G81 moves according to a predetermined motion pattern when viewed at an angle corresponding to the A angle. If the second moving image data group 262 has an A angle, the moving image data 271b included in the second moving image data group 262 having the A angle is sequentially decoded according to a predetermined decoding order to perform image display. Accordingly, it is possible to display a series of motions in which the actual photographed character image G81 moves according to a predetermined motion pattern when viewed at an angle corresponding to the A angle. In the case of the third moving image data group 263 of the A angle, the image display is performed while sequentially decoding the moving image data 271c included in the third moving image data group 263 of the A angle according to a predetermined decoding order. Accordingly, it is possible to display a series of motions in which the actual photographed character image G81 moves according to a predetermined motion pattern when viewed at an angle corresponding to the A angle.

  The first moving image data group 264 of the B angle, the second moving image data group 265 of the B angle, and the third moving image data group 266 of the B angle all correspond to the B angle in which the actual shot character image G81 moves according to a predetermined motion pattern. This is for displaying a series of moving images viewed at an angle. A series of moving images viewed at an angle corresponding to the B angle is divided into a plurality of moving image data 272a to 272c in the moving image data groups 264 to 266 of the B angle. In this case, in each of the moving image data groups 264 to 266 of the B-angle, the last order still image data in the moving image data 272a to 272c in which the order to be decoded is a predetermined order, and the next order with respect to the predetermined order The first order still image data in the moving image data 272a to 272c in the order has the continuity of the movement of the actually shot character image G81 in the above-described predetermined operation pattern. Therefore, in the case of the first moving image data group 264 of B angle, image display is performed while sequentially decoding the moving image data 272a included in the first moving image data group 264 of the B angle according to a predetermined decoding order. Accordingly, it is possible to display a series of motions in which the real character image G81 moves in accordance with a predetermined motion pattern when viewed at an angle corresponding to the B angle. In the case of the B-angle second moving image data group 265, image display is performed while sequentially decoding moving image data 272b included in the B-angle second moving image data group 265 according to a predetermined decoding order. Accordingly, it is possible to display a series of motions in which the real character image G81 moves in accordance with a predetermined motion pattern when viewed at an angle corresponding to the B angle. In the case of a B-angle third moving image data group 266, image display is performed while sequentially decoding moving image data 272c included in the B-angle third moving image data group 266 according to a predetermined decoding order. Accordingly, it is possible to display a series of motions in which the real character image G81 moves in accordance with a predetermined motion pattern when viewed at an angle corresponding to the B angle.

  The first moving image data group 267 of the C angle, the second moving image data group 268 of the C angle, and the third moving image data group 269 of the C angle all correspond to the C angle in which the actual photographed character image G81 moves according to a predetermined motion pattern. It is for displaying a series of moving images as viewed at an angle. A series of moving images viewed at an angle corresponding to the C angle is divided into a plurality of moving image data 273a to 273c in the moving image data groups 267 to 269 of the C angle. In this case, in each of the moving image data groups 267 to 269 of the C angle, the still image data in the last order in the moving image data 273a to 273c in which the order to be decoded is a predetermined order and the next order with respect to the predetermined order are The motion of the photographed character image G81 in the predetermined motion pattern has continuity with the first still image data in the moving image data 273a to 273c in the order. Therefore, if the first moving image data group 267 has a C angle, the image display is performed while sequentially decoding the moving image data 273a included in the first moving image data group 267 having the C angle according to a predetermined decoding order. Accordingly, it is possible to display a series of motions in which the real character image G81 moves in accordance with a predetermined motion pattern when viewed at an angle corresponding to the C angle. If the second moving image data group 268 has a C angle, image display is performed while sequentially decoding moving image data 273b included in the second moving image data group 268 having the C angle according to a predetermined decoding order. Accordingly, it is possible to display a series of motions in which the real character image G81 moves in accordance with a predetermined motion pattern when viewed at an angle corresponding to the C angle. In the case of the C-angle third moving image data group 269, image display is performed while sequentially decoding moving image data 273c included in the C-angle third moving image data group 269 according to a predetermined decoding order. Accordingly, it is possible to display a series of motions in which the real character image G81 moves in accordance with a predetermined motion pattern when viewed at an angle corresponding to the C angle.

  Since the moving image data 271a to 273c derives still image data by executing a decoding process, it is not possible to start displaying an image from the middle of the moving image data 271a to 273c. When the display of an image is started from the middle of the data 271a to 273c, a processing waiting time occurs until still image data at the middle of the data is derived. In this case, since each of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 has a plurality of moving image data 271a to 273c, the moving image data 271a to 273c in a predetermined order and the moving image data 271a to 273c in the next order are included. Can be used as the angle change timing. Therefore, during the execution of the angle display effect, the type of the angle can be changed among the A angle, the B angle, and the C angle.

  Here, in the angle display effect, an angle change trigger is generated by operating the effect operation device 48. In this case, if the angle change does not occur early with respect to the operation timing of the effect operation device 48, it becomes difficult to give the player the impression that the angle has been changed by the operation of the effect operation device 48. I will. On the other hand, as described above, each of the angles A to C has a plurality of moving image data groups 261 to 269 for displaying the same moving image, specifically, three moving image data groups. Further, the number of updates (the number of frames) of the images after the start of the angle display effect corresponding to the first order still image data in the arbitrary moving image data 271a to 273c is between the moving image data groups 261 to 269 within the same angle. Are different.

  More specifically, in each of the angles A to C, the first moving image data group 261, 264, 267 is such that the first order still image data in the first order moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a starts the angle display effect. The moving image data 271a, 272a, and 273a in the subsequent order correspond to the timing, and the still image data 271a to 273c that can be set as the moving image data 271a to 273c with respect to the moving image data 271a, 272a, and 273a in the previous order. This corresponds to the timing when the display of the moving image has progressed by the number corresponding to the minimum unit number. In this case, the first moving image data group 261 of the A angle, the first moving image data group 264 of the B angle, and the first moving image data group 267 of the C angle have the same number of moving image data 271a, 272a, and 273a. In the moving image data 271a, 272a, and 273a in the order corresponding to each other, the number of updates of the images after the start of the angle display effect corresponding to the first order still image data is the same.

  In each of the angles A to C, the second moving image data groups 262, 265, and 268 include the first moving image data in each of the moving image data 271b, 272b, and 273b in which the first moving image data is the first moving image of each of the angles A to C. In the data groups 261, 264, and 267, the first order still image data in the corresponding order moving image data 271a, 272a, and 273a corresponds to the timing at which the display of the moving image has advanced by the first reference period K1. I have. In other words, in each of the angles A to C, the second moving image data groups 262, 265, and 268 indicate that the first order still image data in the first order moving image data 271b, 272b, and 273b is the angle display start timing. Corresponds to the timing when the display of the moving image has progressed for the first reference period K1. The moving image data 271b, 272b, and 273b in the subsequent order correspond to the moving image data 271b, 272b, and 273b in the previous order. This corresponds to the timing when the display of the moving image has progressed by the number corresponding to the minimum unit number of the still image data that can be set as the moving image data 271a to 273c. In this case, the moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b included in the second moving image data groups 262, 265, 268 are the moving image data included in the first moving image data groups 261, 264, 267 at the same angle. The data 271a, 272a, and 273a partially overlap the corresponding moving image data 271a, 272a, and 273a with the contents of the still image data created by the decoding process. More specifically, all the still image data created by one piece of moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b included in the second moving image data groups 262, 265, 268 are all included in the first moving image data groups 261, 264, 267. Are included in the still image data created by the two consecutive moving image data 271a, 272a, and 273a included in.

  In each of the angles A to C, the third moving image data group 263, 266, 269 includes the first moving image data in the moving image data 271c, 272c, and 273c in each order, and the second moving image data in each of the angles AC. In the data group 262, 265, 268, the moving image data 271b, 272b, and 273b in the corresponding order in the first order still image data correspond to the timing at which the display of the moving image has progressed by the second reference period K1. I have. In other words, in each of the angles A to C, the third moving image data group 263, 266, 269 indicates that the first order still image data in the first order moving image data 271c, 272c, 273c is the angle display production start timing. Corresponds to the timing at which the display of the moving image has progressed by the second reference period K2, which is twice the first reference period K1, and the moving image data 271c, 272c, 273c in the subsequent order correspond to the previous order. The moving image data 271c, 272c, and 273c correspond to the timing when the display of the moving image has progressed by the number corresponding to the minimum unit number of the still image data that can be set as the moving image data 271a to 273c. In this case, the moving image data 271c, 272c, and 273c included in the third moving image data groups 263, 266, and 269 are the moving images included in the first moving image data groups 261, 264, and 267 at the same angle. The moving image data 271a, 272a, and 273a corresponding to the data 271a, 272a, and 273a partially overlap the contents of the still image data created by the decoding process, and the second moving image data at the same angle. The moving image data 271b, 272b, and 273b included in the groups 262, 265, and 268, and the contents of the still image data created by the decoding process partially overlap with the corresponding moving image data 271b, 272b, and 273b. are doing. More specifically, all the still image data created by one piece of moving image data 271c, 272c, 273c included in the third moving image data groups 263, 266, 269 are all the first moving image data groups 261, 264, 267. Are included in the still image data created by the two consecutive moving image data 271a, 272a, and 273a included in the second moving image data group 262, 265, and 268. It is included in the still image data created by the image data 271b, 272b, 273b.

  The number of still image data that can be reproduced in the first reference period K1 is smaller than the number of still image data that can be reproduced by one of the moving image data 271a to 273c included in each of the moving image data 271a to 273c. In other words, the number of image updates (the number of frames) in the first reference period K1 is smaller than the number of image updates by one of the moving image data 271a to 273c included in each of the moving image data 271a to 273c. More specifically, the number of still image data that can be reproduced in the first reference period K1 is smaller than the minimum unit number of still image data that can be set as the moving image data 271a to 273c. Specifically, the number of still image data that can be reproduced in the first reference period K1 is 16, and the number of image updates in the first reference period K1 is 16 times.

  The number of still image data that can be reproduced in the second reference period K2 is smaller than the number of still image data that can be reproduced by one of the moving image data 271a to 273c included in each of the moving image data 271a to 273c. In other words, the number of image updates (the number of frames) in the second reference period K2 is smaller than the number of image updates by one of the moving image data 271a to 273c included in each of the moving image data 271a to 273c. More specifically, the number of still image data that can be reproduced in the second reference period K2 is smaller than the minimum unit number of still image data that can be set as the moving image data 271a to 273c. Specifically, the number of still image data that can be reproduced in the first reference period K1 is 32, and the number of image updates in the first reference period K1 is 32.

  As described above, a plurality of moving image data groups 261 to 269 for displaying the same moving image at each of the angles A to C are provided. In each angle, the number of the second moving image data groups 262, 265, 268 is smaller than the minimum number of still image data that can be set as the moving image data 271a to 273c with respect to the first moving image data groups 261, 264, 267. , And the third moving image data group 263, 266, 269 is a still image that can be set as the moving image data 271a to 273c with respect to the second moving image data group 262, 265, 268. It is shifted by the first reference period K1 corresponding to a number smaller than the minimum unit number of data. This makes it possible to generate a large number of switching timings between the moving image data 271a to 273c in a predetermined order and the next moving image data 271a to 273c in each angle. Thus, the angle can be changed early.

  Next, how the angle display effect proceeds will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 100 (a) shows the operation timing of the effect operation device 48, FIG. 100 (b) shows the standby period until the angle is switched with respect to the operation of the effect operation device 48, and FIG. 100 (c) FIG. 100 (d) shows a period during which a moving image of A-angle is displayed, and FIG. 100 (e) shows one timing included in moving-image data groups 261 to 263 of A-angle. 100F shows a period during which the moving image data 271a to 271c are read from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204, and FIG. Stores one piece of moving image data 272a to 272c included in the B-angle moving image data groups 264 to 266 from the memory module 203 to the VRAM 20. Indicate the period during which the are read deployed buffer 211. In the following description, a case where the angle is changed from the A angle to the B angle will be described, but the same applies to other patterns of the angle change.

  As shown in FIG. 100 (d), in a situation where a moving image is displayed using the first moving image data group 261 of the A-angle moving image data groups 261 to 263, as shown in FIG. 100 (c). At the timing of t1, a switchable timing to the B-angle second moving image data group 265 is generated, and at the timing of t2, a switchable timing to the B-angle third moving image data group 266 is generated. However, since the staging operation device 48 has not been operated by each of the timing of t1 and the timing of t2, no angle switching occurs.

  The angle switching triggered by the operation of the effect operation device 48 is performed by looping in a predetermined order among the A angle, the B angle, and the C angle. Specifically, at the start timing of the angle display effect, the A angle is selected, and thereafter, triggered by the operation of the effect operation device 48, the A angle → B angle → C angle → A angle → B angle → C angle → A Angle switching occurs in the order of angle →.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3, the next moving image data 271a in the first moving image data group 261 of the A-angle to be displayed as a moving image is read and decoded. Therefore, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 100 (e), the next order moving image data 271a is read from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204, and Decoding processing is started for the image data 271a. In this case, only one piece of moving image data 271a is read from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b, and the decoding process is started. Then, the plurality of still image data after the decoding process is written to the moving image data area 211b. When reading and decoding the one moving image data 271a, the moving image data area 211b is set so that the still image data created from the one moving image data 271a that is currently displayed is not erased. Is set to the data.

  Thereafter, at a timing t4 when the decoding process is completed, a timing at which switching to the first moving image data group 264 of B angle is possible as shown in FIG. 100 (c). However, since the staging operation device 48 has not been operated by the time t4, the angle switching does not occur, and the moving image of the first moving image data group 261 of the A angle whose decoding has been completed at the time t4. Display of a moving image using the data 271a is started.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t5, the operation device for effect 48 is operated as shown in FIG. 100 (a). In this case, the moving image of the moving image data 271a, which is the current display target, is being displayed, and it is not the timing to switch to the B-angle moving image data group 264 to 266. Therefore, as shown in FIG. Is in a standby state.

  Thereafter, at timing t6, the timing of switching to the B-angle moving image data groups 264 to 266, that is, timing t7, is earlier than the timing of t7 by a period that allows the decoding of one piece of moving image data 271a to 273c. This is the timing at which decoding can be started. Therefore, at the timing t6, decoding of the switching destination moving image data 272b in the second moving image data group 265 having the B angle is started as shown in FIG. 100 (g). Specifically, in the second moving image data group 265 of the B angle, the moving image data 272b of the current switching destination is read from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b, and the moving image data 272b is decoded. Be started. Then, the plurality of still image data after the decoding process is written to the moving image data area 211b. When reading and decoding the one moving image data 272b, the moving image data area 211b is set so that the still image data created from the current one moving image data 271a to be displayed is not erased. Is set to the data. Note that the period between the decode startable timing and the switchable timing is shorter than the period during which a moving image is displayed by one piece of moving image data 271a to 273c. This corresponds to the image update timing two times before the possible timing.

  After that, at the timing t7 when the decoding process is completed, the display of the moving image using the moving image data 272b of the second moving image data group 265 of the B angle that has been decoded at the timing of the t7 is started. Thus, as shown in FIG. 100 (f), the display of the B-angle moving image is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 100 (c), at the timing of t8, a switchable timing to the C-angle third moving image data group 269 occurs. However, since the staging operation device 48 has not been operated by the timing of the time t8, the switching of the angle does not occur, and the second moving image data group 265 of the B angle whose decoding is completed at the timing of the time t7 is not performed. The display of the moving image using the moving image data 272b is continued.

  As described above, the angle is changed based on the operation of the production operation device 48, and the operation timing of the production operation device 48 is used to decode the moving image data 271a to 273c of the switching destination at the operation timing. If the decoding process is not completed by the timing at which the next angle can be switched even after the start, the angle switching is not performed at the timing at which the next angle can be switched, and further, the timing at which the next angle can be switched. The angle is switched at. The operation will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 100 (d), in a situation where a moving image is displayed using the first moving image data group 261 of the A-angle moving image data groups 261 to 263, the timing shown in FIG. As shown, the operation device for effect 48 is operated. In this case, the moving image of the moving image data 271a, which is the current display target, is being displayed, and it is not the timing to switch to the B-angle moving image data group 264 to 266. Therefore, as shown in FIG. Is in a standby state.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIG. 100 (c), it becomes the timing at which switching to the B-angle moving image data groups 264 to 266 is possible. However, the period between the timing of t9 when the operation device for operation 48 is operated and the timing of t10, which is the timing at which switching to the B-angle moving image data groups 264 to 266 is possible, is performed by one piece of moving image data 271a to 271a. 273c is less than the period required to complete the decoding process. Therefore, switching to the B-angle moving image data groups 264 to 266 does not occur at the timing of t10. Note that the reading and decoding of the B-angle moving image data 272a to 272c have not been started yet at the timing of t10.

  Thereafter, at a timing of t11, the timing of the switching to the B-angle moving image data groups 264 to 266, that is, a timing of t12, is earlier than the timing of t12 by a period in which one moving image data 271a to 273c can be decoded. This is the timing at which decoding can be started. Therefore, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 100 (g), decoding of the switching destination moving image data 272c in the B-angle third moving image data group 266 is started. Specifically, in the third moving image data group 266 of the B angle, the moving image data 272c of the current switching destination is read from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b, and the decoding processing is performed on the moving image data 272c. Be started. Then, the plurality of still image data after the decoding process is written to the moving image data area 211b. When reading and decoding the one moving image data 272c, the moving image data area 211b is set so that the still image data created from the current one moving image data 271a to be displayed is not erased. Is set.

  Thereafter, at the timing t12, which is the timing when the decoding process is completed, the display of the moving image using the moving image data 272c of the third moving image data group 266 of the B-angle that has been decoded at the timing of the t12 is started. Thus, as shown in FIG. 100 (f), the display of the B-angle moving image is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 100 (c), at the timing of t13, a switchable timing to the first moving image data group 267 having the C angle occurs. However, since the staging operation device 48 has not been operated by the timing of the time t13, the switching of the angle does not occur, and the third moving image data group 266 of the B angle whose decoding has been completed at the time of the time t12 is not performed. The display of the moving image using the moving image data 272c is continued.

  When the operation device for operation 48 is operated immediately before the timing at which the angle can be switched as described above, the angle is switched at the next timing at which the angle can be switched, so that the moving image of the angle at the switching destination is obtained. The angle is switched at the timing when the decoding of the data 271a to 273c is completed. This makes it possible to prevent the decoding waiting time of the moving image data 271a to 273c from occurring when the angle is switched.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the angle display effect will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the calculation processing for angle display effect executed by the display CPU 201. The calculation processing for the angle display effect is executed by the effect calculation processing in step S2504 in the task processing (FIG. 68) in the opening / closing execution mode in which the angle display effect is to be executed.

  If it is the opening period immediately before the start of the angle display effect (step S4101: YES), an opening process is executed (step S4102). The opening period is a period that is set before the display of a moving image in any of the A angle to the C angle is started, and the display of the moving image in any of the A angle to the C angle is started in the opening period. It is notified that the angle can be changed by operating the effect operation device 48. In the opening period, an angle to be displayed can be selected at the start timing of the moving image display based on the operation of the effect operation device 48.

  The opening process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. First, it is determined whether or not it is the reading period of the moving image data 271a to 273c (step S4201). In the opening period, an angle selection period for enabling selection of an angle is set first, and thereafter, a reading period of the moving image data 271a to 273c is set. If it is during the angle selection period (step S4201: NO), it is determined whether an operation generation command has been received from the sound-light-side MPU 62 (step S4202). The effect operation device 48 is electrically connected to the sound light MPU 62, and when the effect operation device 48 is operated, an operation generation command is transmitted from the sound light MPU 62 to the display CPU 201.

  If an operation generation command has been received from the sound-light-side MPU 62 (step S4202: YES), an angle counter provided in the work RAM 202 is updated (step S4203). The angle counter is a counter for the display CPU 201 to specify which angle of the moving image data 271a to 273c is to be read at the timing of reading the moving image data 271a to 273c. The case where the value of the angle counter is “0” corresponds to the A angle, the case where the value of the angle counter is “1” corresponds to the B angle, and the value of the angle counter is “2”. The case corresponds to the C angle. When the opening period starts, the value of the angle counter is “0”, the operation generation command is received, the process of step S4203 is executed, and 1 is added to the value of the angle counter. When the value of the angle counter after adding 1 becomes “3”, the value of the angle counter is cleared to “0”.

  On the other hand, if it is the reading period of the moving image data 271a to 273c (step S4201: YES), the moving image data 271a to 273c corresponding to the current value in the angle counter of the work RAM 202 is grasped (step S4204). In this case, if the value of the angle counter is “0”, the first-order moving image data 271a in the first moving image data group 261 having the A angle is grasped, and if the value of the angle counter is “1”, the B angle The first order moving image data 272a in the first moving image data group 264 is grasped, and if the value of the angle counter is "2", the first order moving image data 273a in the C angle first moving image data group 267 is grasped. I do. After that, the decoding designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4205).

  If a negative determination is made in step S4202, if the processing in step S4203 is performed, or if the processing in step S4205 is performed, various image data necessary to display the image corresponding to the current update timing in the opening period Is grasped (step S4206), and parameter information applied to the image data is calculated and derived (step S4207). Then, the opening information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4208).

  When the opening process is performed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S2407), in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205, the various image data obtained in step S4206 are arranged in the world coordinate system. Set as target. In the drawing list, parameter information applied to these various image data is set. Opening information is set in the drawing list. By executing the drawing process (FIG. 70) in the VDP 205 according to the drawing list, an image for the opening period is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  If the decoding designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201, the decoding designation information is set in the drawing list, and the moving image data 271a to 273c grasped in step S4204 are stored. The address information of the memory module 203 and the address of the area where the moving image data 271a to 273c are developed as still image data in the moving image data area 211b are set. In this case, the VDP 205 reads the moving image data 271a to 273c specified in the drawing list from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b, and executes the decoding process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

  More specifically, the address of the moving image data 271a to 273c is grasped from the information specified in the drawing list (step S4301), and the moving image data 271a to 273c is converted to the still image from the information specified in the drawing list. The address of the area to be developed as data is grasped (step S4302). Then, the moving image data 271a to 273c are read from the address of the memory module 203 grasped in step S4301, and the moving image data 271a to 273c are decoded. Then, the still image data group resulting from the decoding is written into each area of the address of the moving image data area 211b grasped in step S4302 (step S4303).

  Returning to the description of the calculation processing for the angle display effect (FIG. 101), if it is not the opening period (step S4101: NO), the operation generation command is received from the sound light side MPU 62 (step S4103: YES). ), “1” is set to the operation reception flag provided in the work RAM 202 (step S4104). The operation reception flag is a flag for specifying by the display CPU 201 that the angle should be switched. Only one operation reception flag is provided, and even if the operation device for operation 48 is operated a plurality of times before the angle switching occurs, the operation is received for the operation of the operation device for operation for the second and subsequent times. Only the state in which the flag is set to "1" is maintained. When the operation reception flag is set to “1” as described later in detail, no matter how many times the staging operation device 48 is operated before the angle switching occurs, the next order from the current angle is performed. Is switched for the angle of. As a result, when an angle change occurs, the angles are switched in a predetermined order as the contents of the angle display effect displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  In the calculation processing for the angle display effect, it is determined in step S4105 whether or not it is the timing to start decoding the moving image data 271a to 273c. The timing at which decoding can be started is the timing at which the angle can be switched thereafter (timing at t1, timing at t2, timing at t4, timing at t7, timing at t8, timing at t10, timing at t12, timing at t13 in FIG. 100). The timing is set as the update timing of the image a predetermined period before, in other words, a predetermined number of times before the timing). More specifically, the period between the decode startable timing and the switchable timing is shorter than the period during which a moving image is displayed by one piece of moving image data 271a to 273c. Corresponds to the update timing of the image twice before the switchable timing immediately after. Whether or not it is the decoding timing of the moving image data is grasped based on the execution target table for the angle display effect read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 when the angle display effect is started.

  If it is the timing at which decoding of the moving image data 271a to 273c can be started (step S4105: YES), it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the operation reception flag of the work RAM 202 (step S4106). If “1” is not set in the operation reception flag (step S4106: NO), the value of the timing counter provided in the work RAM 202 is decremented by 1 (step S4107). When the moving image display of one moving image data group 271a to 273c of the same moving image data group 261 to 269 is continued without the angle switching occurring, the timing counter indicates the same moving image data group 261. This is a counter for specifying by the display CPU 201 the timing at which the decoding processing of the moving image data 271a to 273c in the next order in the order from 269 to 269 is executed. The timing counter is set to “3” when the decoding processing of the moving image data 271 a to 273 c is newly performed, and the moving image data 271 a to 273 c is used in a situation where the same moving image data 271 a to 273 c is used. The value of the timing counter is decremented by "1" each time the decoding timing is reached. At the timing when the opening period ends in the angle display effect, the value of the timing counter is “3”.

  If the value of the timing counter after subtraction of “1” is “0” (step S4108: YES), at the timing of decoding the next order moving image data 271a to 273c in the same moving image data group 261 to 269. It means there is. In this case, decoding processing of the moving image data 271a to 273c shown in steps S4109 to S4112 is executed.

  Specifically, first, the moving image correspondence table 275 corresponding to the current value of the angle counter is read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S4109). As described above, the angle counter is a counter for the display CPU 201 to specify which angle of the moving image data 271a to 273c is to be read at the timing of reading the moving image data 271a to 273c. The moving image correspondence table 275 is stored in the memory module 203 in advance in a one-to-one correspondence with each of the A angle, the B angle, and the C angle. In the moving image correspondence table 275, the relationship between the timing at which switching to the new moving image data 271a to 273c can occur and the type of the moving image data 271a to 273c at the switching timing at the switching timing is predetermined. At each angle, the first moving image data groups 261, 264, 267, the second moving image data groups 262, 265, 268, and the third moving image data groups 263, 266, 269 form new moving image data 271a to 273c. Since the timing at which switching is possible is different and the types of moving image data 271a to 273c at the switching destination are also different, the above data is set for each of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 to be used in the moving image correspondence table 275. I have.

  FIG. 104A is an explanatory diagram for describing the moving image correspondence table 275 corresponding to the A angle. The contents of the moving image correspondence table corresponding to the B angle and the moving image correspondence table corresponding to the C angle are the same as those in FIG. 104 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 104A, pointer information corresponding to switching is set as information for specifying a timing at which switching to new moving image data 271a to 271c can occur. The pointer information corresponds to the number of times the image has been updated using the moving image data 271a to 271c. Specifically, each time the image has been updated using the moving image data 271a to 271c, The pointer information to be referenced is incremented by one. When display of an image using the first moving image data 271a to 271c is started in the angle display effect, the pointer information of the reference target is “0”. The updating of the pointer information to be referred to is continued without being cleared to "0" in the middle until the display of the image using the moving image data 271a to 271c in the angle display effect is completed. Therefore, the pointer information “16” means that the image update using the moving image data 271a to 271c has been performed 16 times, and the pointer information “32” means that the moving image data This means that the image update using 271a to 271c has been performed 32 times.

  One type of moving image data 271a to 271c is set corresponding to each piece of pointer information corresponding to switching. As described above, in the first moving image data group 261, the moving image data 271a in the first order corresponds to the start timing of the angle display effect, and the moving image data 271a in the subsequent order is the moving image data 271a in the previous order. On the other hand, this corresponds to the timing when the display of the moving image has progressed by the number of still image data that can be displayed using one piece of moving image data 271a. Therefore, regarding the first moving image data group 261, the moving image data 271a in the first order is not set in the moving image correspondence table 275, and the number of still image data that can be displayed using one moving image data 271a is reduced. On the other hand, pointer information corresponding to each value multiplied by an integer is set as switching-compatible pointer information. Then, with respect to each of the pointer information corresponding to each of the switchings, information of the type of the corresponding moving image data 271a, specifically, the area of the moving image data 271a in the moving image data area 211b of the VRAM 204 is expanded. Address information is set.

  Each moving image data 271b of the second moving image data group 262 corresponds to the timing at which moving image display has progressed by the first reference period K1 with respect to each moving image data 271a of the first moving image data group 261 as described above. are doing. Therefore, as for the second moving image data group 262, as the pointer information corresponding to the switching of the moving image data 271b in the first order, the timing at which the moving image display advances by the first reference period K1 with respect to the start timing of the angle display effect is described. Pointer information is set. For the moving image data 271b after the first order in the second moving image data group 262, the switching corresponding pointer information set in the moving image data 271a of the first moving image data group 261 as the switching corresponding pointer information. , Pointer information of the timing at which the display of the moving image has progressed for the first reference period K1 is set.

  Each moving image data 271c of the third moving image data group 263 corresponds to the timing at which moving image display has progressed by the second reference period K2 with respect to each moving image data 271a of the first moving image data group 261 as described above. are doing. Therefore, as for the third moving image data group 263, as the pointer information corresponding to the switching of the moving image data 271c in the first order, the timing of the moving image display advanced by the second reference period K2 with respect to the start timing of the angle display effect is described. Pointer information is set. In addition, as for the moving image data 271c in the third moving image data group 263 after the first order, the switching corresponding pointer information set in the moving image data 271a of the first moving image data group 261 as the switching corresponding pointer information. , Pointer information of the timing at which the display of the moving image has progressed for the second reference period K2 is set.

  Returning to the description of the calculation processing for the angle display effect (FIG. 101), after the moving image correspondence table 275 is read, the moving image data 271a to 273c to be read this time and subjected to the decoding processing are grasped (step S4110). For this determination, a target moving image counter provided in the work RAM 202 is referred to. The target moving image counter is a counter for the display CPU 201 to specify which moving image data group 261 to 269 is to be read at the timing of reading the moving image data 271a to 273c. The case where the value of the target moving image counter is “0” corresponds to the first moving image data group 261, 264, 267, and the case where the value of the target moving image counter is “1”, the second moving image data group 262, 265. , 268, and the case where the value of the target moving image counter is “2” corresponds to the third moving image data group 263, 266, 269. In step S4110, the types of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 to be read are specified in the moving image correspondence table 275 read in step S4109 based on the value of the target moving image counter. Then, of the pointer information corresponding to the switching set for the moving image data groups 261 to 269 to be read, the pointer information having a value larger than the current pointer information in the angle display effect and The information of the moving image data 271a to 273c set corresponding to the pointer information corresponding to the switching of the closest value to the moving image data is grasped. As a result, the display CPU 201 grasps the information of the moving image data 271a to 273c which should be read and decoded at this time.

  Thereafter, “3” is set in the timing counter of the work RAM 202 (step S4111), and the decoding designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4112). When these processes are executed, decode designation information is set in the current drawing list, and information on the address of the memory module 203 and the moving image in which the moving image data 271a to 273c grasped in step S4110 are stored. In the data area 211b, an address of an area for developing the moving image data 271a to 273c as still image data is set. Upon receiving the drawing list, the VDP 205 executes the decoding process (FIG. 103) as described above, and reads the moving image data 271a to 273c to be read from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b. Then, the still image data after the decoding process is written to the designated area in the moving image data area 211b.

  On the other hand, in the angle display effect calculation process (FIG. 101), when it is the decoding start timing and “1” is set in the operation reception flag of the work RAM 202 (step S4105 and step S4106: YES), the operation The reception flag is cleared to “0” (step S4113), and the switching reference table 276 is read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S4114). When the angle is changed based on the operation of the staging operation device 48, the switching reference table 276 indicates the current angle and the type of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 in relation to the current angle and the type of the moving image data groups 261 to 269. It is a table for specifying a.

  FIG. 104B is an explanatory diagram for describing the switching reference table 276. As shown in FIG. 104B, pointer information corresponding to switching is set as information for specifying a timing at which switching to new moving image data 271a to 273c can occur. The contents of the pointer information are the same as the contents described for the moving image correspondence table 275 in FIG. The pointer information corresponding to the switching is set corresponding to the switchable timing of each of the first moving image data groups 261, 264, 267, the second moving image data groups 262, 265, 268, and the third moving image data groups 263, 266, 269. Have been. Specifically, the pointer information corresponding to the first switching corresponds to the timing at which the display of the moving image has progressed by the first reference period K1 with respect to the start timing of the angle display effect. In the pointer information, pointer information at a timing when the display of the moving image has progressed for the first reference period K1 with respect to the pointer information corresponding to the immediately preceding switching is set.

  For the pointer information corresponding to each switching, information on the correspondence between the current angle, the angle of the switching destination, and the combination of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 is set. Specifically, as described above, when the angle is changed by the operation of the staging operation device 48, the A angle → B angle → C angle → A angle → B angle → C angle → A angle →. In this order, the angle is changed. Further, the switchable timing to the first moving image data groups 261, 264, 267, the switchable timing to the second moving image data groups 262, 265, 268, and the switchable timing to the third moving image data groups 263, 266, 269 are as follows. This is as described in the moving image correspondence table 275 of FIG. Therefore, the correspondence is as shown in FIG.

  Returning to the description of the calculation processing for the angle display effect (FIG. 101), after reading the switching reference table 276, the angle counter and the target moving image counter are set based on the switching reference table 276 (step S4115). In the setting process, of the pointer information corresponding to switching set in the switching reference table 276, a value corresponding to a value larger than the current pointer information in the angle display effect and closest to the current pointer information is selected. Is specified, and the information set corresponding to the current angle in the pointer information corresponding to the switching is specified. For example, when the current pointer information in the angle display effect is “10” and the current angle is the A angle, the information of the B angle is specified as the information of the angle of the switching destination based on the switching reference table 276, and the switching is performed. The information of the second video data group 265 is specified as the information of the previous video data groups 261 to 269. Further, for example, when the current pointer information in the angle display effect is “68” and the current angle is the C angle, the information of the A angle is specified as the angle information of the switching destination based on the switching reference table 276, The information of the third moving image data group 263 is specified as the information of the switching destination moving image data groups 261 to 269. The specified switching destination angle information is set in the angle counter, and the information of the specified switching destination moving image data groups 261 to 269 is set in the target moving image counter.

  After executing the processing of steps S4113 to S4115, the processing of steps S4109 to S4112 described above is executed. In this case, in step S4109, the moving image correspondence table 275 corresponding to the value of the angle counter newly set in step S4115 is read, and in step S4110, the value corresponding to the value of the target moving image counter newly set in step S4115 is read. The moving image data 271a to 273c to be processed are grasped.

  In the calculation processing for the angle display effect, it is determined whether or not it is time to change the type of the moving image data 271a to 273c (step S4116). When the processing in steps S4109 to S4112 has been performed, “1” is set in the change trigger flag provided in the work RAM 202. In step S4116, when the change trigger flag is set to “1” and the timing at which the moving image data 271a to 273c can be switched is reached, the timing of changing the type of the moving image data 271a to 273c And a positive determination is made. The switchable timing of the moving image data 271a to 273c is as described above, and the first switchable timing corresponds to the timing at which the display of the moving image has advanced by the first reference period K1 with respect to the start timing of the angle display effect. The subsequent switchable timing corresponds to the timing at which the display of the moving image has advanced by the first reference period K1 with respect to the immediately preceding switchable timing.

  If it is time to change the moving image data 271a to 273c (step S4116: YES), the value of the frame counter provided in the work RAM 202 is cleared to “0” (step S4117). If the determination in step S4116 is affirmative, the change trigger flag is cleared to "0". The frame counter is a counter for the display CPU 201 to specify which still image data among the still image data of the moving image data 271a to 273c developed in the moving image data area 211b of the VRAM 204 is to be used by the display CPU 201. It is. When the value of the frame counter is “0”, the first order still image data in one of the developed moving image data 271a to 273c is grasped as a use target. In addition, when the still image data is grasped as a use target in step S4118 to be described later, the value of the frame counter is incremented by one, and in the next step S4118, the still images in the order corresponding to the frame counter value after the increment of one are added. Data is grasped as a target for use.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4116, or if the process in step S4117 is performed, still image data corresponding to the value of the frame counter in the work RAM 202 is grasped as image data to be used at the current update timing (step S4118). . In this case, the value of the frame counter is incremented by one. In addition, other image data necessary to display an image corresponding to the current update timing is grasped (step S4119), and parameter information applied to the image data grasped in steps S4118 and S4119 is calculated. It is derived (step S4120). Then, the angle effect information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4121).

  When the calculation processing for the angle display effect is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S2407) includes various image data grasped in steps S4118 and S4119. Is set as a placement target in the world coordinate system. In the drawing list, parameter information applied to these various image data is set. Angle rendering information is set in the drawing list.

  When the VDP 205 receives the drawing list, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 105, the still image data acquired in step S4118 is acquired first (step S4401), and then the process proceeds to step S4119 as shown in the flowchart of FIG. The other image data grasped in (1) is grasped (step S4402). Further, the parameter information grasped in step S4120 is grasped (step S4403). Then, the image data obtained in steps S4401 and S4402 is set in the world coordinate system with the parameter information obtained in step S4403 applied (step S4404). Thereby, the drawing data for displaying the image for the angle display effect is finally created, and the image for the angle display effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41. The angle display effect setting process is executed in the effect setting process of step S2603 in the drawing process (FIG. 70) when the drawing list in which the angle effect information is set is received.

  As described above, since each of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 has the plurality of moving image data 271a to 273c, the moving image data 271a to 273c of the predetermined order and the moving image data 271a to 273c of the next order are generated. The switching timing can be used as the angle change timing. Therefore, during the execution of the angle display effect, the type of the angle can be changed among the A angle, the B angle, and the C angle.

  The data amount of the moving image data 271a to 273c is set so that the minimum unit number of still image data that can be set as moving image data can be reproduced. This makes it possible to set many timings at which the moving image data 271a to 273c to be used can be switched. Further, according to the configuration, it is possible to reduce the data amount of the image data read at one time.

  A plurality of moving image data groups 261 to 269 for displaying the same moving image at each of the angles A to C are provided. In each angle, the number of the second moving image data groups 262, 265, 268 is smaller than the minimum number of still image data that can be set as the moving image data 271a to 273c with respect to the first moving image data groups 261, 264, 267. , And the third moving image data group 263, 266, 269 is a still image that can be set as the moving image data 271a to 273c with respect to the second moving image data group 262, 265, 268. It is shifted by the first reference period K1 corresponding to a number smaller than the minimum unit number of data. This makes it possible to generate a large number of switching timings between the moving image data 271a to 273c in a predetermined order and the next moving image data 271a to 273c in each angle. Thus, the angle can be changed early.

  The moving image data 271a to 273c are not read out collectively for each of the angles to be selected, but in the situation where one moving image data 271a to 273c is decoded and used, When the timing to decode the moving image data 271a to 273c to be used comes, one moving image data 271a to 273c to be used is read and decoded. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required to read out the moving image data 271a to 273c in the moving image data area 211b of the VRAM 204.

  In a situation where one of the moving image data 271a to 273c is decoded and used, the next moving image data 271a to 273c to be used next is read and decoded. This makes it possible to prevent a waiting time for decoding the moving image data 271a to 273c from occurring when the new moving image data 271a to 273c is to be used.

  In the configuration in which the angle is changed based on the operation of the staging operation device 48, even if the operation timing of the staging operation device 48 is earlier than the switching timing of the moving image data 271a to 273c, it is later than the decoding start timing. In the case of, the angle change for the operation of the staging operation device 48 occurs not at the immediately switchable timing but at the next switchable timing with respect to the immediately subsequent switchable timing. Thus, it is possible to smoothly switch the angle with respect to the operation of the effect operation device 48.

<Another form of angle display effect>
The number of images that can be displayed by one piece of moving image data 271a to 273c is not limited to the same configuration, and the number of images that can be displayed by at least a part of moving image data is different from that of another moving image. The configuration may be different from the data. In this case, it is necessary to set the timing at which switching to new moving image data 271a to 273c is possible and the timing at which decoding can be started in accordance with the type of each of the moving image data 271a to 273c.

  In a configuration in which a moving image display using moving image data is started when the staging operation device 48 is operated during the operation valid period, the moving image display starts at a timing corresponding to an elapsed time from the start timing of the operation valid period. A moving image data group that enables a series of specific moving images to be displayed with respect to a configuration to be started, and another moving image data group that allows a moving image that starts from a timing in the middle of the specific moving image to be displayed May be applied separately.

  The number of moving image data groups prepared for one angle is not limited to three, but may be two or four or more. The types of angles are not limited to three, but may be two or four or more.

<Configuration for performing special video production>
Next, a configuration for performing an effect using a special moving image will be described.

  The special moving image use effect is an effect using the special moving image data 282 when displaying an image on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 106 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the special moving image data 282, and FIG. 106A shows normal moving image data 281 such as the moving image data 271a to 273c already described, and FIG. Indicates special moving image data 282.

  As shown in FIG. 106A, in the normal moving image data 281, file data is set at the first address, and compressed data of each frame is set subsequently to the file data. The compressed data of each frame is accompanied by a frame header. The compressed data includes one frame of I picture data corresponding to the reference data, a plurality of frames of P picture data corresponding to the first difference data, and a plurality of frames of B picture data corresponding to the second difference data. And

  The I picture data is data that can be used to create one frame of still image data by itself when decoding. The P picture data is data that can generate one frame of still image data by performing forward prediction with reference to I picture data or P picture data one frame or a plurality of frames before in decoding. . B-picture data is decoded by performing bidirectional prediction with reference to I-picture data or P-picture data one frame or a plurality of frames earlier and I-picture data or P-picture data one frame or a plurality of frames later. Is data for which still image data for one frame can be created.

  In the compressed data of the normal moving image data 281, I picture data is set as data of the first frame. Also, B picture data is set as data of the second frame,..., M-1 frame. Also, P picture data is set as data of the m-th frame. Also, B picture data is set as data of the (m + 1) th frame,..., N−1th frame. Also, P picture data is set as the data of the n-th frame. Note that the arrangement pattern of the picture data is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary.

  By executing decoding processing on the normal moving image data 281, still image data 283 a to 283 d (hereinafter, referred to as normal decoded image data 283 a to 283 d) corresponding to a plurality of update timings from the normal moving image data 281 are stored in the VRAM 204. It is created in the moving image data area 211b. In this case, the normal decoded image data 283a to 283d are image data in which the contents of some of the images displayed by the normal decoded image data 283a to 283d are different from each other.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), in the special moving image data 282, file data is set at the first address, and one frame of I picture data corresponding to the reference data is set after that. The compressed data other than the I picture data is not set. By executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 282, the still image data 284 (hereinafter referred to as special decoded image data 284) corresponding to a plurality of update timings from the special moving image data 282 is stored in the moving image data area of the VRAM 204. 211b. However, in the special decoded image data 284, the contents of the images displayed by the special decoded image data 284 are all the same image data.

  The data amount of the special moving image data 282 is set so that the minimum unit number of still image data that can be set as moving image data can be reproduced. Specifically, the special moving image data 282 can reproduce 48 pieces of still image data, in other words, the image can be updated 48 times (update of 48 frames) for the minimum unit number of still image data. ing. Therefore, when the special moving image data 282 is decoded, the same special decoded image data 284 as the contents of the image is created for the minimum number of units. Note that the moving image data 271a to 273c corresponding to the normal moving image data 281 has a data amount set so that the minimum unit number of still image data that can be set as moving image data can be reproduced as described above. However, the data amount of the normal moving image data 281 other than the moving image data 271a to 273c is set such that a larger number of still image data than the minimum unit number that can be set as moving image data can be created. I have.

  The special moving image data 282 is stored in the memory module 203 in advance similarly to the normal moving image data 281, but the memory module 203 stores a plurality of types of special moving image data 282. The content of the image based on the special decoded image data 284 after the decoding process is different for each type of the special moving image data 282.

  The special decoded image data 284 is used as texture data. In this case, predetermined object data for applying the special decoded image data 284 as texture data is stored in the memory module 203 in advance. The type of image displayed using the special decoded image data 284 and the predetermined object data is arbitrary. For example, a character image of an animal such as a person, a cat, a fish, and a dog may be displayed. A configuration may be adopted in which an individual image of the object is displayed.

  Since the special moving image data 282 is set as described above, one piece of texture data can be stored in the memory module 203 as moving image data. As described above, all of the texture data previously stored in the memory module 203 as still image data is read out from the memory module 203 when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 201 is started, and is used for developing the VRAM 204. The data is written to the texture area 211a in the buffer 211. In this case, as the type of the texture data increases, the required storage capacity in the texture area 211a increases. On the other hand, every time the type of texture data to be used changes, an attempt to change the type of texture data read into the texture area 211a increases the processing load of the VDP 205.

  On the other hand, by storing some of the texture data as special moving image data 282, it is possible to read out some of the texture data to the VRAM 204 as needed, without having to replace the texture area 211a. Becomes Also, since the special moving image data 282 is not stored in the memory module 203 as the texture data, the texture data is created from the special moving image data 282 using the moving image data area 211b. Becomes possible. Furthermore, when the moving image data area 211b is also used as the area for using the texture data, the special moving image data 282 is read instead of the texture data itself in the moving image data area 211b. There is no need to change the handling of the moving image data area 211b in the VDP 205 according to the type of data read into the moving image data area 211b.

  Next, the manner in which the special moving image use effect is executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 107 (a) shows the timing of starting supply of operating power, FIG. 107 (b) shows the period of reading texture data from the memory module 203 to the texture area 211a, and FIG. 107 (c) shows the period in the texture area 211a. FIG. 107 (d) shows the start timing of the special moving image using effect, and FIG. 107 (e) shows the execution period of the special moving image using effect, in which the special moving image data 282 is used. FIG. 107 (f) shows a period during which the special moving image data 282 is read from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b, and FIG. 107 (g) shows a period during which the special moving image data 282 is used. .

  At the timing of t1, the timing of starting the supply of the operating power to the display CPU 201 as shown in FIG. 107A is reached, so that the texture data is transferred from the memory module 203 to the texture area 211a as shown in FIG. Is started, and the reading of the texture data is completed at the timing of t2. Thus, while the supply of the operating power to the VRAM 204 is continued as shown in FIG. 107 (c), all the texture data previously stored in the memory module 203 is stored and held in the texture area 211a. . Since backup power is not supplied to the VRAM 204, texture data cannot be stored and held in the texture area 211a when the supply of operation power to the display control device 200 is stopped.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. However, the use of the special moving image data 282 is not started at the timing of t3. Therefore, at the timing t3, the object data read from the memory module 203 to the area other than the texture area 211a and the moving image data area 211b in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 as necessary, and the texture at the start of the operation power supply. Drawing data is created using the texture data read to the area for use 211a, and an image is displayed on the symbol display device 41 using the drawing data.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 107 (f), when the timing of reading the special moving image data 282 is reached, the reading of the special moving image data 282 from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b starts. At the same time, decoding processing is performed on the special moving image data 282 read into the moving image data area 211b. At time t5, the decoding processing of the special moving image data 282 is completed, and a plurality of special decoded image data 284 created by executing the decoding processing on the special moving image data 282 is used for moving image data. The data is written to the area 211b.

  At time t5 when the decoding of the special moving image data 282 is completed, display of an image using the special decoded image data 284 is started as shown in FIG. 107 (g). In this case, the special decoded image data 284 is used as texture data for pasting on the predetermined object data, and the projection including the predetermined object data and the special decoded image data 284 onto a virtual two-dimensional plane is performed. Drawing data is created. Then, an image is displayed on the symbol display device 41 using the drawing data, so that an image using the special decoded image data 284 is displayed. Thereafter, the display of the image using the special moving image data 282 ends at the timing of t6.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the special moving image using effect will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for a special moving image using effect performed by the display CPU 201. Note that the special moving image using effect calculation process is performed in the game operation in which the special moving image using effect is to be executed by the effect calculation process of step S2504 in the task process (FIG. 68).

  If it is not the usage period of the special moving image data 282 (step S4501: NO), the special moving image data 282 is read by referring to the execution target table read out to the work RAM 202 in order to control the execution of the special moving image use effect. It is determined whether it is the read timing (step S4502). If it is the read timing of the special moving image data 282 (step S4502: YES), the special moving image data 282 to be read this time and subjected to the decoding process is grasped (step S4502). Note that there are a plurality of special moving image using effects, and the type of special moving image data 282 to be used is different for each type of special moving image using effect. Further, the decoding designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4504).

  Thereafter, various image data necessary to display an image corresponding to the current update timing are grasped (step S4505), and parameter information applied to the image data is calculated and derived (step S4506). Then, the special moving image use effect information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4507). Note that the various types of image data obtained in step S4505 include the object data stored in the memory module 203 and the texture data read to the texture area 211a.

  When the arithmetic processing for the special moving image using effect is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S2407), the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 contains the various image data obtained in step S4505. It is set as a placement target in the coordinate system. In the drawing list, parameter information applied to these various image data is set. In addition, special animation use effect information is set in the drawing list.

  When the decoding designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201, the decoding designation information is set in the drawing list, and the special moving image data 282 grasped in step S4503 is stored. The address information of the memory module 203 and the address of an area where the special moving image data 282 is developed as special decoded image data 284 in the moving image data area 211b are set. In this case, the VDP 205 reads the special moving image data 282 of the type specified in the drawing list from the memory module 203 into the moving image data area 211b and executes the decoding process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

  In detail, the address of the special moving image data 282 is grasped from the information specified in the drawing list (step S4301), and the special moving image data 282 is converted into the special decoded image data from the information specified in the drawing list. The address of the area to be developed as 284 is grasped (step S4302). Then, the special moving image data 282 is read from the address of the memory module 203 grasped in step S4301, and the special moving image data 282 is decoded. Then, a plurality of special decoded image data 284 resulting from the decoding is written to each area of the address of the moving image data area 211b grasped in step S4302 (step S4303). As a result, all the special decoded image data 284 created from the special moving image data 282 is written in the moving image data area 211b.

  Returning to the description of the special moving image production effect calculation process (FIG. 108), if it is the use period of the special moving image data 282 (step S4501: YES), the special decoded image data 284 corresponding to the value of the frame counter of the work RAM 202 Is grasped as image data to be used at the current update timing (step S4508). The frame counter is used by the display CPU 201 to specify which special decoded image data 284 of the special decoded image data 284 of the special moving image data 282 developed in the moving image data area 211b is to be used. It is a counter. The frame counter is also used when the normal moving image data 281 is used, such as in an angle display effect. When the use period of the special moving image data 282 starts, the value of the frame counter is “0”, and when the value of the frame counter is “0”, the first order in the special moving image data 282 is changed. Of special decoded image data 284 is grasped as an object to be used. When the special decoded image data 284 is identified as a use target in step S4508, the value of the frame counter is incremented by one, and in the next step S4508, the special decoding in the order corresponding to the value of the frame counter after the increment is performed. The image data 284 is grasped as a use target.

  Here, as described above, the plurality of special decoded image data 284 created by executing the decoding process on one type of special moving image data 282 are all the same image data. The content of the image displayed using the same is the same. On the other hand, when the special decoded image data 284 is used as the texture data, the special decoded image data 284 corresponding to the value of the frame counter is used instead of always using one special decoded image data 284. This makes it possible to use the same processing configuration as when displaying an image using the normal moving image data 281.

  Thereafter, other image data necessary for displaying the image corresponding to the current update timing is grasped (step S4509). In this case, the image data includes predetermined object data to which the special decoded image data 284 is applied. After that, parameter information to be applied to the image data grasped in steps S4508 and S4509 is calculated and derived (step S4510), and the use instruction information of the special moving image data is stored in a register of the display CPU 201 (step S4511).

  When the arithmetic processing for the special moving image production effect is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S2407) includes various images grasped in steps S4508 and S4509. The data is set as a placement target in the world coordinate system. In the drawing list, parameter information applied to these various image data is set. Further, use instruction information of special moving image data is set in the drawing list.

  When the VDP 205 receives the drawing list in which the special moving image use effect information or the special moving image data use instruction information is set, the VDP 205 executes a special moving image use effect setting process. As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 109, in the special moving image use effect setting process, when the use instruction information of the special moving image data is set (step S4601: YES), the special decoding grasped in step S4508 The image data 284 is grasped (step S4602). In addition, the other image data grasped in step S4509 is grasped (step S4603), and the parameter information grasped in step S4510 is grasped (step S4604). Then, the image data obtained in steps S4602 and S4603 is set in the world coordinate system with the parameter information obtained in step S4604 applied (step S4605). As a result, drawing data for displaying an image for a special moving image using effect using the special decoded image data 284 as texture data is finally created, and the image for the special moving image using effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Will be done. It should be noted that the setting process for the special moving image use effect is performed when the drawing list in which the special moving image use effect information or the special moving image data use instruction information is set is received, in step S2603 in the drawing process (FIG. 70). This is executed in the setting process.

  By setting the special moving image data 282 as described above, one piece of texture data can be stored in the memory module 203 as moving image data. As described above, all of the texture data previously stored in the memory module 203 as still image data is read out from the memory module 203 when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 201 is started, and is used for developing the VRAM 204. The data is written to the texture area 211a in the buffer 211. In this case, as the type of the texture data increases, the required storage capacity in the texture area 211a increases. On the other hand, every time the type of texture data to be used changes, an attempt to change the type of texture data read into the texture area 211a increases the processing load of the VDP 205.

  On the other hand, by storing some of the texture data as special moving image data 282, it is possible to read out some of the texture data to the VRAM 204 as needed, without having to replace the texture area 211a. Becomes Also, since the special moving image data 282 is not stored in the memory module 203 as the texture data, the texture data is created from the special moving image data 282 using the moving image data area 211b. Becomes possible. Furthermore, when the moving image data area 211b is also used as the area for using the texture data, the special moving image data 282 is read instead of the texture data itself in the moving image data area 211b. There is no need to change the handling of the moving image data area 211b in the VDP 205 according to the type of data read into the moving image data area 211b.

  The number of special decoded image data 284 created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 282 is one. This makes it possible to prevent unnecessary image data from being created.

  The plurality of special decoded image data 284 created by executing the decoding process on one type of special moving image data 282 are all the same image data, and are the same as the image data displayed using the special decoded image data 284. The content is the same. On the other hand, when the special decoded image data 284 is used as the texture data, the special decoded image data 284 corresponding to the value of the frame counter is used instead of always using one special decoded image data 284. This makes it possible to use the same processing configuration as when displaying an image using the normal moving image data 281.

  The special moving image data 282 has only I picture data and does not have difference data such as B picture data and P picture data. This makes it possible to simplify the data configuration of the special moving image data 282.

  The special moving image data 282 is set as the minimum data amount that can be set as moving image data. Thus, the data capacity of the special moving image data 282 can be reduced.

<Another form of special video production>
The object data as well as the texture data may be read from the memory module 203 to the development buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 when the supply of the operating power to the display CPU 201 is started. In this case, since it is not necessary to read the object data into the VRAM 204 at an appropriate timing, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the VDP 205 at each timing of creating the drawing data.

  Although a plurality of types of image data are created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 282, only one or a part of the types may be used. Even in this case, the texture data can be handled as moving image data.

  The decoding process may be performed on the special moving image data 282 to create only one image data. In this case, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity for storing the image data created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 282.

  In the special moving image data 282, only the same I picture data is set in plurality, and when decoding processing is performed on the special moving image data 282, image data for the number of I picture data may be created. .

  A plurality of image data of the same type is created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 282, but only one of the image data may be used. In this case, of the plurality of image data created by executing the decoding process, only one image data may be stored and held in the moving image data area 211b, and the rest may be deleted.

  A separate storage area is provided in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204, and decoding processing is performed on the special moving image data 282, so that all or a part of the image data created in the moving image data area 211b is stored in the separate storage area. It may be configured to be transferred. In this case, the image data can be stored and held in the separate storage area even after use, and the image data is read out from the separate storage area at the next use, so that the special moving image data 282 can be stored. Does not need to be executed again.

  The special moving image data 282 has difference data such as B picture data and P picture data, but the difference data may be set so that the difference becomes “0”. Even in this case, it is possible to create a plurality of special decoded image data 284 of the same type.

<Other embodiments>
It is to be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the following different configurations may be individually applied to the configuration of the above embodiment, or may be applied in combination.

  (1) The processing configuration of the sound-light-side MPU 62, the processing configuration of the display CPU 72, and the processing configuration of the VDP 76 in the first embodiment are the same as those in the second embodiment, in which a 3D image is displayed on the symbol display device 41. May be applied. Further, the processing configuration of the sound-light-side MPU 62, the processing configuration of the display CPU 201, and the processing configuration of the VDP 205 in the second embodiment are changed to a configuration for displaying a 2D image on the symbol display device 41 as in the first embodiment. May be applied.

  (2) In the second embodiment, the camera (viewpoint) is set individually for each image data set in the world coordinate system. A configuration may be adopted in which a single camera is commonly set for image data.

  (3) In the second embodiment, the image data arranged in the world coordinate system is configured to be projected in units of the background image, the effect image, and the design image. However, the image data is summarized in the unit of the background image and the effect image. Or a configuration in which the effect image and the design image are collectively projected, or a configuration in which all of them are projected together.

  (4) In the second embodiment, when the color information setting process (step S2609) is performed, the color information may be set such as pasting the texture only on the surface to be projected. In this case, the processing load of rendering can be reduced. Alternatively, instead of setting color information such as texture mapping before projection, color information such as texture mapping may be set after projection. In this case, upon projection, the coordinate information of each pixel constituting the projection plane may be stored, and color information such as texture mapping may be set based on the coordinate information.

  (5) Instead of the configuration in which the display control device 90 is controlled by the sound emission control device 60 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 50, display control is performed based on a command transmitted from the main control device 50. The device 90 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 60. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 60 and the display control device 90 are separately provided, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be adopted. May be integrated in the main control device 50, and both functions of the two control devices may be integrated in the main control device 50. The configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 50 to the audio light emission control device 60 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the audio light emission control device 60 to the display control device 90 are also arbitrary.

  (6) Other types of pachinko machines, such as pachinko machines, which are different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific region of a special device, or a game ball in a specific region of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that becomes a jackpot when a right enters and a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball and the like.

  In addition, a game machine that is not a ball-and-ball type, for example, includes a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of symbols are provided in a circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reels by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols has been established on the activated line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed, a bonus such as payout of medals is provided to the player. The present invention can be applied to a slot machine.

  Further, the game machine main body supported to be openable and closable on the outer frame includes a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Accordingly, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, in which the rotation of a reel is started.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, features of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses or the like.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. A display unit (symbol display device 41) having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 41a);
Display storage means (memory module 74) for storing image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 201, VDP 205) for displaying an image on the display unit using the image data stored in the display storage means;
With
The display storage means stores special moving image data (special moving image data 282), which is created by executing a decoding process and is one type of image data to be used by the display control means. A gaming machine characterized by being stored in a game machine.

  According to the feature A1, the special moving image data in which the decoding process is executed and the image data to be used is one type is provided by the display control means, so that one type of image data after the decoding is converted into the special moving image. It can be handled as image data. This makes it possible to use the one type of image data while keeping the capacity of the same type of image data after decoding from increasing.

  Feature A2. The gaming machine according to Feature A1, wherein the special moving image data is moving image data in which one type of image data is created by executing the decoding process.

  According to the feature A2, when decoding the special moving image data, a plurality of types of image data are not generated, but one type of image data is generated. It is possible to achieve the above-described effects while avoiding being performed.

  Feature A3. The game according to Feature A1 or A2, wherein the special moving image data is data in which a plurality of special image data (still image data 284) having the same contents are created by executing the decoding process. Machine.

  According to the feature A3, when the decoding process is performed on the special moving image data, a plurality of special image data having the same content is created, so that the special image data is treated in the same manner as the image data created from other moving image data. The special image data having the same content can be used at the timing of updating a plurality of images.

  Feature A4. The display control means uses the special image data in a predetermined order created from the special moving image data when the update timing of the image is a predetermined update timing. The gaming machine according to Feature A3, wherein the special image data in the next order with respect to the predetermined order is used when the update timing is the first update timing.

  According to the feature A4, a plurality of special image data having the same contents are created by executing a decoding process on the special moving image data, and the special image data is used in a predetermined order. Thereby, the special image data created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data is combined with the image data created by executing the decoding process on the moving image data other than the special moving image data. It can be handled in the same way.

Feature A5. Moving image data other than the special moving image data includes reference data (I picture data) serving as a reference when the image data is created by performing the decoding process on the moving image data, and the reference data. And differential data (B picture data, P picture data) that can create image data different from the image data created by the reference data by applying
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the special moving image data includes the reference data and does not include the difference data.

  According to the feature A5, since the special moving image data has reference data and no difference data, only one type of image data is created when decoding processing is performed. Can be simplified. Further, the data capacity of the special moving image data can be reduced.

  Feature A6. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein the special moving image data is set as a data amount of a minimum unit that can be set as moving image data.

  According to the feature A6, the data volume of the special moving image data can be reduced.

Feature A7. The display control means executes predetermined processing on predetermined image data (texture data) stored in the display storage means to display an image corresponding to the predetermined image data (step in the VDP 205). Function for executing the processing of S2609).
When displaying an image corresponding to special image data created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data, the predetermined process is executed on the special image data by the predetermined process execution unit. And
When the image data is used in the display control unit, the image data is read from the display storage unit to the read storage unit (VRAM 204),
The reading storage means includes a first reading area (texture area 211a) from which the predetermined image data is read, and a second reading area (moving image data area 211b) from which the special moving image data is read. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6.

  According to the feature A7, when the image data is used in the display control unit, the image data is not used directly from the display storage unit, but is used after it is once read out to the readout storage unit. Therefore, by reading out the image data in advance in the read-out storage unit, when the display control unit uses the image data, the image data can be used immediately. Further, the reading storage means is provided with a first reading area from which predetermined image data is read and a second reading area from which special moving image data is read, so that reading means corresponding to each use is provided. The area is set, and when the image data is used in the display control means, the area can be specified according to the type of the image data.

  In this case, the display device has the configuration of the above-mentioned feature A1, and the display control means uses only one type of special image data for display as special moving image data, not as predetermined image data, but as special moving image data. It is stored in storage means. As a result, the special image data is read out not in the first readout area but in the second readout area, so that it is not necessary to secure an area for using the special image data in the first readout area. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the required storage capacity in the first read area.

Feature A8. A plurality of types of the predetermined image data are stored in the display storage unit,
The gaming machine is
First read execution means (a function of executing the process of step S2402 in the display CPU 201) for reading all of the plurality of types of predetermined image data into the first read area when a predetermined read timing comes;
In the case where image data corresponding to moving image data other than the special moving image data is stored in the second reading area, when storing image data corresponding to the special moving image data in the second reading area, Second reading execution means (a function of executing a decoding process in the VDP 205) for overwriting the image data on the image data already stored in the second reading area;
The gaming machine according to feature A7, comprising:

  According to the feature A8, all of the plurality of types of predetermined image data are read to the first reading area, so that it is not necessary to read the predetermined image data as needed. On the other hand, moving image data is read from the second read area as needed, and when new moving image data is read, the second read area is overwritten. This makes it possible to reduce the required storage capacity in the second read area. In this case, the display device has the configuration of the above-mentioned feature A1, and the display control means uses only one type of special image data for display as special moving image data, not as predetermined image data, but as special moving image data. It is stored in storage means. As a result, the special image data is read out not in the first readout area but in the second readout area, so that it is not necessary to secure an area for using the special image data in the first readout area. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the required storage capacity in the first read area.

  Feature A9. The gaming machine according to Feature A8, wherein the first read execution unit reads all of the plurality of types of the predetermined image data into the first read area when the supply of the operation power is started.

  According to the feature A9, a state in which all of the plurality of types of predetermined image data are read to the first reading area can be generated early.

  Feature A10. The special image data created by performing the decoding process on the special moving image data is texture data used for displaying a three-dimensional image. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature A10, when the texture data is used, the above-described excellent effects can be obtained.

  Note that, for any one of the features A1 to A10, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. One or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. A display unit (symbol display device 41) having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 41a);
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display unit;
In a gaming machine equipped with
Data for determining the display mode of the individual image at each update timing of the image when the specific variation display is performed on the individual image (the symbols displayed in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3) over a predetermined period on the display unit. Information storage means (memory module) for storing in advance mode determination information (execution target table T10 for acceleration period, execution target table T11 for first high speed period, execution target table T12 for first low speed period) in which is set 74)
The display control means,
A target determining unit (display CPU 72) that determines at least one of the type of the individual image to which the aspect determining information is applied to the plurality of types of individual images and the order in which the aspect determining information is applied to the plurality of types of individual images. Function for executing the processing of steps S908 and S1011 in
An application execution unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S1012 to S1014 in the display CPU 72) for performing the specific change display by applying the aspect determination information according to the content determined by the target determination unit;
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature B1, the aspect determination information is commonly applied to a plurality of types of individual images. As a result, it is possible to commonly use the mode determining information in various situations in which the specific change display is executed, and it is possible to reduce the number of mode determining information. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for storing the mode determination information in the information storage unit.

Feature B2. When the specific variable display is newly started, the display is controlled so that the individual image of the type displayed at the start of the specific variable display starts the variable display according to a predetermined change start mode. The type of the individual image is a configuration that can change,
As the aspect determination information, at least information for causing the individual image to perform a variation display according to the predetermined variation start mode is set,
The target determination unit is configured to apply the aspect determining information to a plurality of types of the individual images according to the type of the individual image displayed at the start of the specific variation display, and the plurality of types of the individual images. The gaming machine according to Feature B1, wherein at least one of the order in which the aspect determination information is applied to the individual image is determined.

  According to the feature B2, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the specific variable display has been started by setting the mode of the variable display at the start of the specific variable display at a predetermined variable start mode. . Further, even when the mode of the variable display at the start of the specific variable display is fixed, the specific variable display is started because the type of the individual image displayed at the start may change. Can be diversified.

  In this configuration, the information for performing the variation display of the individual image according to the predetermined variation start mode at the start of the specific variation display is set in the aspect determination information, and is displayed at the start of the specific variation display. At least one of the type of the individual image to which the mode determining information is applied and the order of the individual images is determined in a mode corresponding to the type of the individual image. Thus, even when the type of the individual image displayed at the start of the specific variable display can be changed, it is possible to commonly use the mode determining information for performing the specific variable display.

  Feature B3. The individual image of the type corresponding to the type of the individual image that was displayed when the specific variation display was terminated last time is displayed at the start of the specific variation display in the next execution time. The gaming machine according to Feature B2.

  According to the feature B3, the individual image of the type corresponding to the type of the individual image that was displayed when the specific variation display was completed last time is displayed at the start of the specific variation display in the next execution time, so that the specific variation display is performed. When the display is repeatedly executed, continuity can be given to each execution of the specific fluctuation display. In this case, at the start of the specific variation display, the type of the individual image for which the variation display is started according to the predetermined variation start mode is different. Even in a configuration in which the type of the individual image displayed at the start of the variable display can be changed, it is possible to commonly use the mode determining information for performing the specific variable display.

Feature B4. In the mode determining information, mode information (contents of a task) for determining the mode of the specific variation display is set in time series.
The target determination unit changes the type of the individual image to which each of the aspect information is applied, and the type of the individual image to be subjected to the specific variable display changes with the progress of the specific variable display. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein the gaming machine is determined in correspondence with the above.

  According to the feature B4, even when the type of the individual image to be subjected to the specific variation display changes in accordance with the progress of the specific variation display, the mode information set in time series in the mode determination information is applied. The type of individual image to be processed is determined. This makes it possible to use the mode determination information in common even in a configuration in which the type of the individual image to be subjected to the specific variable display changes with the progress of the specific variable display.

  Feature B5. Any one of the features B1 to B4, wherein the aspect determination information is set as information corresponding to a period equal to or longer than a longest duration assumed as a situation in which the aspect determination information is used. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature B5, regardless of the duration of various situations in which the mode determining information is used, the mode determining information can be commonly used.

  Feature B6. The duration of the situation in which the mode determining information is used is a predetermined timing from one switching timing of the type of the individual image to which the mode determining information is applied to a next switching timing. The gaming machine according to Feature B5, wherein use of the mode determination information is set to end.

  In a configuration in which the mode determining information is set corresponding to the duration of various situations in which the mode determining information is used, the mode determining information is set in the middle of the time-series information set in the mode determining information. It is supposed that the timing for ending use of the application information will be reached, and the next control information will be used. In this case, according to the feature B6, the end timing of the use of the mode determining information is determined in advance from the timing of switching one type of individual image to which the mode determining information is applied to the next timing of switching. Timing. As a result, the situation in which the use of the next control information is started can be made constant, and the design of the control information can be facilitated.

  The “predetermined timing from one switching timing of the type of the individual image to which the aspect determination information is applied to the next switching timing” includes “the application target of the aspect determination information”. At which the type of the individual image is switched.

Feature B7. The information for mode determination,
A mode information group (contents of task) in which mode information for determining the mode of the specific change display is set in time series;
A target information group (display symbol adjustment area) in which a plurality of target information in which information of the type of the individual image to which the aspect information is applied are set corresponding to the aspect information;
With
The object determining means sets information of the type of the individual image for each of the object information included in the object information group when the use of the aspect determining information is started. The gaming machine according to any one of B1 to B6.

  According to the feature B7, since the aspect information group and the target information group are set in the aspect determination information, the individual of the target to which the aspect information is applied at each update timing is referred to only by referring to the aspect determination information. It is possible to grasp the type of the image. In this case, when the use of the mode determining information is started, the information of the type of the individual image is set for each of the target information included in the group of target information of the mode determining information. Accordingly, it is not necessary to execute the process of adjusting the type of the individual image to be applied during the execution of the specific variation display, so that the processing configuration during the execution of the specific variation display can be simplified.

Feature B8. The specific variable display is configured to be performed in each of a plurality of variable display areas,
The game according to any one of Features B1 to B7, wherein the aspect determination information is commonly used as information for controlling the specific variable display in each of the plurality of variable display areas. Machine.

  According to the feature B8, the mode determining information is commonly used for the specific variable display in each of the plurality of variable display areas, so that the number of mode determining information can be reduced.

  Note that, for any one of the features B1 to B8, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. One or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. A display unit (symbol display device 41) having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 41a);
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display unit;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means includes a simultaneous display control means (in the display CPU 72) for simultaneously displaying a first type image (loop display character G4) and a second type image (loop display background G5) on the display unit. A VDP 76) for executing a calculation process for the character loop and a calculation process for the background loop.
The gaming machine has first mode determination information (character movement table 123) in which first mode information for determining the display mode of the first type image is set in time series, and display mode of the second type image. Information storing means (memory module 74) for storing in advance the second mode determining information (background table 124) in which the second mode information for determining is set in chronological order,
When simultaneously displaying the first type image and the second type image on the display unit, the simultaneous display control unit determines a display mode of the first type image according to the first mode determination information, A gaming machine, wherein a display mode of the second type image is determined according to second mode determination information.

  According to the feature C1, in a configuration in which the first type image and the second type image are simultaneously displayed, the mode determining information for determining the display mode of the first type image and the second type image is one mode. Rather than being provided as determination information, a first mode determination information for determining the display mode of the first type image and a second mode determination information for determining the display mode of the second type image are provided. Are provided individually. Accordingly, in a situation where one of the first type image and the second type image is stopped and displayed, the other is variably displayed, and then the image on the side where the stopped type is displayed changes from the state where the stopped type is displayed. Even when the display is restarted, it is possible to independently control the display of each type of image using each of the first mode determination information and the second mode determination information. Therefore, it is possible to suitably control the display effect in which both the first type image and the second type image are simultaneously displayed.

Feature C2. The first aspect determination information includes:
A first reference information group (pointer information) in which a plurality of first reference information in which a reference target by the simultaneous display control means is sequentially updated each time the first type image is updated,
A first aspect information group (task information) in which first aspect information for determining the display mode of the first type image at each update timing of the first type image is set corresponding to each of the first reference information. Content) and
With
The information for determining the second aspect,
A second reference information group (pointer information) in which a plurality of pieces of second reference information for sequentially updating a reference target by the simultaneous display control means each time an update timing of the second type image is reached;
A second aspect information group (task information) in which second aspect information for determining a display aspect of the second type image at each update timing of the second type image is set corresponding to each of the second reference information. Content) and
The gaming machine according to feature C1, further comprising:

  According to the feature C2, a dedicated first reference information group is set in the first mode determination information, and a dedicated second reference information group is set in the second mode determination information. Thus, while not using one of the first mode determination information and the second mode determination information, the other reference target reference information is continuously updated, or the other reference target reference information is updated. For example, it is possible to hold the information in predetermined reference information.

Feature C3. The first aspect determination information is information in which the first aspect information for causing the first type image to perform display in a first variation aspect is set in time series,
The information storage means is a third mode determination information (character stationary table 122) in which information for causing the first type image to be displayed in a variation mode different from the first variation mode is set in time series. The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, wherein is stored in advance.

  According to the feature C3, even when the first type image is displayed, different aspect determination information is provided in correspondence with the difference in the content of the variation aspect. Thus, when switching between a situation in which the first type image is displayed in the first variation mode and a situation in which the first type image is displayed in a variation mode different from the first variation mode, a mode to be used is determined. It is only necessary to switch the information for use between the information for determining the first aspect and the information for determining the third aspect, and it is possible to suitably switch between these variation modes.

Feature C4. The simultaneous display control means,
First simultaneous display control means (Step S1102 to Step S1104, Step S1109 to Step S1113 and Step S1113 in the display CPU 72) for controlling the display of the display unit so that both the first type image and the second type image are variably displayed. S1202-a function of executing the processing of step S1206);
A second simultaneous display control unit (steps S1105 to S1113 in the display CPU 72) that controls the display of the display unit so that one of the first type image and the second type image is variably displayed and the other is stopped and displayed. Function for executing the processing of steps S1207 to S1208);
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, comprising:

  According to the feature C4, a situation where both the first type image and the second type image are variably displayed, and a situation where one of the first type image and the second type image is variably displayed and the other is stopped and displayed. Owing to the occurrence, it is possible to diversify the display mode even in a situation where both the first type image and the second type image are displayed. In this case, the configuration of the feature C1 is provided, and the information for determining the first aspect and the information for determining the second aspect are separately provided. It is only necessary to switch the use status of the second mode determination information, and it is possible to suitably switch these display statuses.

Feature C5. The first simultaneous display control means controls display of the display unit such that the first type image performs display in a first variation mode, and the second type image performs display in a second variation mode.
The second simultaneous display control means performs display control on the display unit such that the first type image performs display in a variation mode different from the first variation mode, and the second type image performs stop display.
The first mode determination information is information in which the first mode information for causing the first type image to perform display in the first variation mode is set in time series,
The information storage unit pre-stores third mode determination information (character stationary table 122) in which information for causing the first type image to be displayed in the different variation mode is set in time series. The gaming machine according to feature C4, wherein:

  According to the feature C5, the situation where the first type image is variably displayed in the first variation mode and the second type image is variably displayed in the second variation mode is different from the situation where the first type image is variably displayed in the first variation mode. A situation in which both the first type image and the second type image are displayed due to the fact that the second type image is stopped and displayed while the second type image is displayed variably due to the fluctuation mode is diversified. Can be achieved. In this case, for the first type image, the first mode determining information and the third mode determining information are separately provided, and for the second type image, the second mode determining information is separately provided. ing. Thereby, when switching the display status, the use object is switched between the first mode determination information and the third mode determination information for the first type image, and the second mode determination is performed for the second type image. It is only necessary to switch between a situation in which the information to be used is updated and a situation in which the information is fixed in the usage information. Therefore, it is possible to suitably switch these display states.

Feature C6. In the first mode determination information, information necessary for causing the first type image to perform a display in a series of first variation modes for one round is set in time series.
The simultaneous display control means can repeatedly display the series of first variation modes using the first type image by repeatedly using the first aspect determination information. The gaming machine according to any one of C1 to C5.

  According to the feature C6, by repeatedly using the first mode determination information, it is possible to cause the first type image to repeatedly display a series of first variation modes. If the information for variably displaying the first type image and the information for variably displaying the second type image are integrated and set as one mode determination information, a series of first type images in the first type image is obtained. When one cycle of the display of the variation mode is completed and the next cycle is started, the first type image is added to the first type image unless the display content of one cycle also starts in the second type image. It is necessary to set more information for displaying one variation mode than for one round. In this case, information exceeding one round is wasted. On the other hand, since the configuration of the feature C1 is provided and the information for determining the first aspect and the information for determining the second aspect are separately provided, it is not necessary to set such useless information.

Feature C7. In the second mode determination information, information necessary for causing the second type image to perform a display in a series of second variation modes for one round is set in time series,
The simultaneous display control means can repeatedly display the series of second variation modes using the second type image by repeatedly using the second aspect determination information,
The number of update timings of the first type image required for causing the first type image to perform the display in the first variation mode for one round, and the display in the second type image by the second variation mode is one. The gaming machine according to feature C6, wherein the number of update timings of the second type image necessary for performing the circumference is different.

  According to the feature C7, the information for determining the first aspect and the information for determining the second aspect are separately provided, so that only the information corresponding to one round of each of the first variation mode and the second variation mode is provided. Can be set in each mode determining information, and there is no need to set useless information.

Feature C8. The simultaneous display control means,
When the display of the first type image according to the first aspect determination information is started, the start information is set in a start information storage unit (linkage flag 125), and the start information according to the first aspect determination information is set. Means for erasing the start information from the start information storage means when ending the display of the first type image (the function of executing the processing of steps S1103 and S1107 in the display CPU 72);
Means for displaying the second type image in accordance with the second aspect determination information when the start information is set in the start information storage means (a positive determination is made in step S1201 in the display CPU 72). Function),
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7, comprising:

  According to the feature C8, when the display of the first type image according to the first mode determination information is started, the start information is set, and when the display is ended, the start information is deleted, and the start information is deleted. Is set, the display of the second type image is performed according to the information for determining the second mode. Therefore, as long as the information of the start timing of use of the information for determining the first mode is prepared in advance. Thus, the second mode determination information can be used in accordance with the use of the first mode determination information. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of use start timing information in a configuration in which the first mode determination information and the second mode determination information are separately provided.

  For any one of the features C1 to C8, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. One or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A display unit (symbol display device 41) having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 41a);
Display storage means (memory module 74) for storing image data in advance;
Drawing data is created based on the setting of the image data in the setting storage means (the first frame area 82a and the second frame area 82b), and an image signal corresponding to the drawing data is output to the display means. Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display unit based on the
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means,
First setting range control means (display CPU 72) for setting the range set in the setting storage means in the specific image data (decoded image data 132) to the first setting range so that the first setting range image is displayed. A function for executing the processing of steps S1307 to S1309 in the VDP 76),
A second setting range control unit configured to set a range set in the setting storage unit in the specific image data to a second setting range different from the first setting range so that a second setting range image is displayed; (A function of the display CPU 72 for executing the processing of steps S1311 to S1313, VDP 76)
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature D1, by changing the range set in the setting storage unit between the first setting range and the second setting range while using the same specific image data, the first setting range image and the second setting range can be used. Each of the two setting range images can be displayed. This makes it possible to change the content of the displayed image even in a situation where the type of image data is small.

  Feature D2. The gaming machine according to Feature D1, wherein the first setting range and the second setting range partially overlap.

  According to the feature D2, the first setting range and the second setting range partially overlap, so that the first setting range image and the second setting range image are used while using the same specific image data. It is possible to cause a slight image change.

  Feature D3. The gaming machine according to Feature D1 or D2, wherein the second setting range image is displayed at an update timing of an image subsequent to the display of the first setting range image.

  According to the feature D3, the second setting range image is displayed at the update timing of the image following the display of the first setting range image, so that the first setting range image and the second setting range image are converted into a series of images. It can be used as

Feature D4. Both the first setting range image and the second setting range image include a predetermined individual image (group display character G11) as a display target, and the predetermined individual image is displayed so as to move in a predetermined direction. The first setting range image and the second setting range image are displayed on the
The display position of the predetermined individual image included in the second setting range image is shifted from the display position of the predetermined individual image included in the first setting range image in the predetermined direction. The gaming machine according to Feature D3, wherein the first setting range and the second setting range are set so as to correspond to a display position.

  According to the feature D4, it is possible to realize display of an image in which a predetermined individual image is displayed so as to move in a predetermined direction by using a small number of image data.

  Feature D5. The feature D4 is characterized in that the first set range image and the second set range image are images that display a large number of the predetermined individual images in an effect period in which the predetermined individual images are displayed in a large number. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature D5, the display of the first set range image and the second set range image using the same specific image data is performed in a situation where a large number of predetermined individual images are displayed, so that the same specific image data is used. What you do is less noticeable.

Feature D6. The data size of the specific image data is set to be larger than the data size of an area to be displayed on the display unit in the setting storage unit,
The first set range and the second set range correspond to a range in the setting storage unit that fills an entire area to be displayed on the display unit, wherein the first set range and the second set range correspond to a range that fills the entire area to be displayed on the display unit. 2. The gaming machine according to item 1.

  According to the feature D6, it is possible to make it less noticeable that the first set range image and the second set range image are displayed using the same specific image data.

  Feature D7. The specific image data may be image data created by performing a decoding process on moving image data stored in the display storage unit. The gaming machine described.

  Even if the number of image data created by executing the decoding process on the moving image data is smaller than the image update timing, the same specific image data is provided with the configuration of the feature D1. Since different images, that is, the first setting range image and the second setting range image can be displayed by using the same, it is possible to prevent the same image from being displayed between a plurality of update timings. .

Feature D8. The plurality of image data created by performing the decoding process on the moving image data include image data for displaying a predetermined individual image so as to move in a predetermined direction, including the specific image data. And
The feature D7 is characterized in that the first setting range control means and the second setting range control means apply the first setting range and the second setting range to each of the plurality of image data. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature D8, it is possible to cope with a situation where the number of image data created by executing the decoding process on the moving image data while using the same processing configuration is smaller than the image update timing. It is possible to do.

Feature D9. The plurality of image data created by performing the decoding process on the moving image data include image data for displaying a predetermined individual image so as to move in a predetermined direction, including the specific image data. And
The second setting range image is displayed at an update timing of an image following the display of the first setting range image,
The second display position of the predetermined individual image included in the second setting range image is different from the first display position of the predetermined individual image included in the first setting range image. The first setting range and the second setting range are set to correspond to the display position moved in the direction,
In an image displayed next to the second set range image using next use image data to be used next to the specific image data among the plurality of image data, a display position of the predetermined individual image Is the same or substantially the same amount of movement as the amount of movement from the first display position to the second display position with respect to the display position of the predetermined individual image in the second set range image. Is a display position moved in the predetermined direction, the gaming machine according to feature D7 or D8.

  According to the feature D9, even when the first setting range image and the second setting range image are displayed from the same specific image data, the moving amount of the predetermined individual image in the predetermined direction between the plurality of update timings is determined. It can be made constant.

  Note that, for any one of the features D1 to D9, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. One or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. A display unit (symbol display device 41) having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 41a);
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display unit;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means,
The first display content (the size position information of the band image G24 and the position information of the blinking image G25) of the predetermined individual image at each update timing when the predetermined individual image (effective period image G22) is changed and displayed in a predetermined manner is displayed. First determining means (step in the display CPU 72) for determining the first predetermined mode information for determining the first display content using the first predetermined mode determining information (band display table 145) set in time series. S1606, a function of executing the processing of steps S1615 and S1616), and
The second display content (the type of image data for displaying the blinking image G25) of the predetermined individual image at each update timing when the predetermined individual image is changed and displayed in the predetermined mode is set in the first predetermined mode. A second determination unit (a function of executing the processes of steps S1608 and S1613 in the display CPU 72) for determining without using the determination information;
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature E1, it is possible to individually and individually control the first display content and the second display content of the predetermined individual image when the predetermined individual image is changed and displayed in a predetermined manner. Thereby, when the display mode of the change display in the predetermined mode in the predetermined individual image is diversified, the first display content and the second display content can be controlled independently and individually, and the diversification is performed. It will be easier.

  Feature E2. The second determining means determines the second display content of the predetermined individual image at each update timing when the predetermined individual image is changed and displayed in the predetermined mode, and determines the second display content. The gaming machine according to Feature E1, wherein the information is determined using second predetermined mode determination information (blinking display table 146) set in time series.

  According to the feature E2, the first predetermined mode determining information for determining the first display content and the second predetermined mode determining information for determining the second display content are separately provided, so that each predetermined mode is determined. The first display content and the second display content can be independently controlled independently while enabling display control to be performed in accordance with the application information.

Feature E3. The first predetermined mode determination information includes:
A first predetermined reference information group (pointer information) in which a plurality of first predetermined reference information in which a reference target by the first determination unit is sequentially updated each time an update timing of the first display content of the predetermined individual image is reached When,
A first predetermined mode in which the first predetermined mode information for determining the first display content at each update timing of the first display content of the predetermined individual image is set corresponding to each of the first predetermined reference information; A group of mode information (size information and tip position information);
With
The second predetermined mode determination information includes:
A second predetermined reference information group (pointer information) in which a plurality of second predetermined reference information are set, the reference target of which is sequentially updated by the second determining means each time the second display content of the predetermined individual image is updated. When,
A second predetermined mode in which the second predetermined mode information for determining the second display content at each update timing of the second display content of the predetermined individual image is set corresponding to each of the second predetermined reference information; A group of mode information (information of image data);
The gaming machine according to Feature E2, comprising:

  According to the feature E3, a dedicated first predetermined reference information group is set in the first predetermined mode determination information, and a dedicated second predetermined reference information group is set in the second predetermined mode determination information. I have. This makes it easy to control the update cycle of the first display content and the update cycle of the second display content individually and independently.

  Feature E4. A means for changing one of the first display content and the second display content in the update cycle independently of the other update cycle (the function of executing the processes of steps S1610 and S1612 in the display CPU 72) is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3.

  According to the feature E4, one of the update cycles of the first display content and the second display content is changed independently of the other update cycle, whereby the display mode of the change display in the predetermined mode in the predetermined individual image is changed. Diversification can be suitably realized.

Feature E5. The display control means creates drawing data by setting image data in setting storage means (first frame area 82a, second frame area 82b), and sends an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means. Displaying an image on the display unit based on the output,
The predetermined individual image is displayed using first predetermined individual image data (band display image data 142) and second predetermined individual image data (lighting image data 143, light-off image data 144),
The first display content corresponds to a display content of an image displayed using the first predetermined individual image data in the predetermined individual image,
The second display content corresponds to a display content of an image displayed using the second predetermined individual image data in the predetermined individual image,
The first predetermined mode determining information is used to set the second predetermined individual image data in association with the first predetermined individual image data when the second predetermined individual image data is set in the setting storage unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein information (tip position information) is set.

  According to the feature E5, even if the first display content and the second display content can be controlled independently and independently, even if the second predetermined individual image data is associated with the first predetermined individual image data, It is possible to easily perform settings in the setting storage means.

Feature E6. One of the first display content and the second display content is at least one of a size, a shape, and a color of the predetermined individual image,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein the other of the first display content and the second display content is a type of image data for displaying the predetermined individual image.

  According to the feature E6, it is possible to independently and independently control at least one of the size, shape, and color of the predetermined individual image and the type of image data for displaying the predetermined individual image.

  Note that, for any one of the features E1 to E6, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. One or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic F group>
Feature F1. A display unit (symbol display device 41) having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 41a);
Display storage means (memory module 203) for storing image data in advance;
Setting storage means (VRAM 204) in which the image data is set;
A deriving unit (display CPU 201) for deriving parameter information for determining a setting mode when the image data is set in the setting storage unit;
Generating drawing data based on setting the image data in the setting storage unit in accordance with the parameter information derived by the deriving unit; and outputting an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display unit. Display control means (VDP205) for displaying an image on the display unit based on
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control unit is configured to store predetermined type image data (backmost image data 241, image data 242 for a first background individual image, image data 243 for a second background individual image, and image data 244 for a production character) as the image data. After the predetermined type image is displayed over the front side period based on the setting in the setting storage unit, the display of the predetermined type image based on the setting of the predetermined type image data in the setting storage unit is performed on the rear side. A predetermined type control unit (a function of executing a setting process for separate storage display in the VDP 205) for preventing the setting from being performed over a period;
Parameter information derived by the deriving means for application to the predetermined type image data in the front period is stored in a predetermined storage area of a predetermined storage means (work RAM 202), and the predetermined storage area is the rear period. A gaming machine characterized by being stored as an area for storing parameter information of the predetermined type image data.

  According to the feature F1, even when the display of the predetermined type image using the predetermined type image data is interrupted, the predetermined storage area in which the parameter information to be applied to the predetermined type image data is stored in the predetermined storage area. By retaining the parameter information of the predetermined type image data as an area for storing the predetermined type image data, a process for securing the predetermined storage area when the display of the predetermined type image using the predetermined type image data is restarted is newly added. No need to run. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the display of the predetermined type image using the predetermined type image data is restarted.

  Feature F2. The gaming machine according to Feature F1, wherein the deriving unit updates parameter information to be applied to the predetermined type image data even during the rear period.

  According to the feature F2, since the parameter information for applying to the predetermined type image data is updated even in the rear side period, the display of the predetermined type image using the predetermined type image data after the rear side period ends. When restarting, the display state immediately before the start of the rear period is changed from the state where the content of the predetermined type image is continuously changed for the rear period according to the display pattern determined in chronological order to the predetermined type. It is possible to restart the display of the predetermined type image using the image data.

  Feature F3. The predetermined type control means is configured to generate pre-created data (first separately stored image data 245, second separately stored image data 247) based on setting the predetermined type image data in the setting storage means during the preceding period. The gaming machine according to Feature F1 or F2, wherein the drawing data is created in the rear side period using the following method.

  According to the feature F3, it is possible to display a predetermined type of image even in the rear period.

  Feature F4. The predetermined type control unit sets the pre-created data and additional image data (image data 246 for additional individual images, effect image data 248) in the setting storage unit in the rear period. The gaming machine according to Feature F3, characterized by creating drawing data.

  According to the feature F4, the additional image data is added as the image data to be used in the rear period, so that the display content can be made flashy. Also, in the later period, the predetermined type image data is not used as the image data for displaying the predetermined type image, but the pre-created data is used, so the additional image data is added as the image data to be used. Even if this is the case, the processing load can be reduced.

Feature F5. The rear side period occurs when a predetermined start trigger occurs in the front side period,
The gaming machine according to Feature F3 or F4, wherein the predetermined type control means creates the pre-created data before a situation where the predetermined start opportunity can occur in the preceding period.

  According to the feature F5, since the pre-created data is created before the situation where the predetermined start opportunity can occur, the predetermined start occasion is shorter than the configuration in which the pre-created data is created at the timing when the predetermined start opportunity occurs. It is possible to reduce the processing load at the timing of occurrence.

  Feature F6. The predetermined type control means is continued when the predetermined start opportunity does not occur before the branch timing of the one that created the pre-created data before the situation where the predetermined start opportunity can occur in the preceding period. The gaming machine according to Feature F5, wherein the pre-created data is newly created in the previous period.

  According to the feature F6, since the pre-created data is newly created as needed, it is possible to use the pre-created data created at a timing closer to the timing when the pre-created data is actually used. Become.

  Feature F7. Any one of the features F3 to F6, wherein the predetermined type control means creates a plurality of types of the pre-created data in the preceding period so that the content of an image displayed by the pre-created data is different. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature F7, by creating a plurality of types of pre-created data, it is possible to diversify a situation in which an image is displayed using the pre-created data.

Feature F8. A configuration in which at least first pre-created data (second separately stored image data 247) and second pre-created data (first separately stored image data 245) are generated as the pre-created data;
As the rear side period, there is a first rear side period and a second rear side period that can occur after the first rear side period,
The predetermined type control means,
A first pre-creating unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S3910 to S3912 in the VDP 205) for creating the drawing data using the first pre-created data in the first post-period;
A second pre-creating unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S3906 to S3909 in the VDP 205) for creating the drawing data using the second pre-created data in the second rear side period;
The gaming machine according to Feature F7, comprising:

  According to the feature F8, it is possible to use pre-created data suitable for each rear period.

Feature F9. The first rear side period occurs when a predetermined start trigger occurs in the front side period,
The first pre-created data and the second pre-created data are created before the predetermined start opportunity can occur in the preceding period,
The second pre-creation means, if the predetermined start trigger does not occur in the preceding period, newly creates the second pre-created data in the continued preceding period. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature F9, when the first rear-side period does not occur, the second pre-created data is newly generated before the second rear-side period occurs, and thus the second pre-created data is actually generated. It is possible to use the second pre-created data created at a timing closer to the use timing.

Feature F10. The display control means,
Arranging means for arranging object data as three-dimensional information as the image data in the virtual three-dimensional space in the setting storage means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2602 to S2604 in the VDP 205);
Viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function of executing the processing of steps S2605 to S2606 in the VDP 205);
Drawing setting means for projecting the object data on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint and creating the drawing data based on the data projected on the projection plane (the processing of steps S2607 to S2612 in the VDP 205). Function to perform)
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F9, comprising:

  According to the feature F10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects described above in the configuration for displaying a three-dimensional image.

  For any one of the features F1 to F10, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. One or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  The inventions of the above-described feature group A to feature F group can solve the following problems.

  As one type of gaming machines, pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine has a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. Becomes

  Here, in the gaming machines as exemplified above, a configuration capable of suitably performing display control is required, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic G group>
Feature G1. A first control unit (main MPU 52) and a second control unit (sound-light MPU 62, display CPU 72, VDP 76);
The first control means includes:
Grant determination means (a function of executing a special figure special power control process in the main MPU 52) for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to the player;
An information transmitting means (a function of executing a special figure special power control process in the main MPU 52) for transmitting predetermined correspondence information (variation command and type command) corresponding to the result of the assignment determination;
With
The second control means includes:
Content determination means (a function of executing the processing of step S404 and steps S406 to S408 in the sound-side MPU 62) for determining the effect contents of the unit effect (effect for the game round) corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information;
Effect execution control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for controlling effect execution means (symbol display device 41) such that the unit effect corresponding to the effect content determined by the content determination means is executed;
With
The effect contents that can be determined by the content determination means based on the same type of the predetermined correspondence information include a first effect content in which the effect duration is equivalent to the first duration, and an effect duration that corresponds to the second duration. A gaming machine characterized by including at least a second effect content.

  According to the feature G1, it is possible to diversify the effect contents by selecting the effect contents having different effect durations from the same type of predetermined correspondence information, and it is possible to perform the process for determining the effect contents. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the configuration.

  Feature G2. The feature G1 is characterized in that the production execution control means terminates the unit production when a duration corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information has elapsed, regardless of which production content is determined by the content determination means. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature G2, the unit effect ends when the duration corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information has elapsed, regardless of which effect content is determined, so the duration of the effect differs from the same type of predetermined correspondence information. Even if the effect content can be selected, the duration of the unit effect can be set as the duration corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information.

Feature G3. The first control means includes a duration determining means (a function of executing a special figure special power control process in the main MPU 52) for determining a duration of the unit effect,
The gaming machine according to Feature G2, wherein the predetermined correspondence information includes information that enables the second control unit to specify the duration determined by the duration determination unit.

  According to the feature G3, even when the first control means determines the duration of the unit effect, the second control means controls the execution of the unit effect even if the second control means controls the execution of the unit effect. It is possible to grasp the duration of the unit effect in the first control means without the need to transmit information to the first effect. In this case, by providing the configuration of the feature G2, even if the effect content having a different effect duration can be selected from the same type of predetermined correspondence information, the unit effect duration can be changed to the first. It is possible to set the duration determined by one control means.

  Feature G4. The effect content determined by the content determining means is an effect content in which the duration corresponding to the effect content is equal to or less than the duration corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information that triggered the determination of the effect content. The gaming machine according to Feature G2 or G3.

  According to the feature G4, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the event that the duration of the unit effect elapses and the unit effect ends during the execution of the effect content determined by the content determining unit.

Feature G5. The effect execution control means is for causing the effect execution means to perform an effect of holding the pattern in a predetermined area and displaying the image in standby after the variable display of the pattern is performed as the unit effect,
If the duration of the effect content determined by the content determining means is shorter than the duration corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information, the means for extending the standby display execution period accordingly (step S504 in the sound-light-side MPU 62). The gaming machine according to any one of features G2 to G4, comprising: a function of executing a process.

  According to the feature G5, by extending the execution period of the standby display, the difference between the duration of the effect content determined by the content determination unit and the duration corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information is supplemented. Thereby, it is not necessary to largely modify the effect contents of the unit effect to compensate for the difference, and it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for compensating for the difference.

Feature G6. The content determining means,
Means for executing the first lottery process to determine the effect content of the first effect range among the unit effects (the function of executing the process of step S404 in the sound-light-side MPU 62);
Means for determining the effect content of the second effect range of the unit effects by executing the second lottery process (the function of executing the process of step S406 in the sound-light-side MPU 62);
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, comprising:

  According to the feature G6, the first lottery process and the second lottery process are executed to determine the effect contents of the unit effect, so that the effect contents of the unit effect can be determined irregularly. In this case, it is possible to select an effect content having a different effect continuation period from the same type of predetermined correspondence information provided with the configuration of the above-described feature G1, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in designing the first lottery process and the second lottery process. Can be

  In addition, for any one of the features G1 to G6, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. One or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  Each invention of the feature G group can solve the following problems.

  As one type of gaming machines, pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine has a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. Becomes

  Here, in the gaming machines as exemplified above, there is a demand for a configuration capable of suitably performing an effect such as a display effect, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic H group>
Feature H1. A display unit (symbol display device 41) having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 41a);
Display control means (measurement display in display CPU 72) for controlling display of the display means so that measurement result information (number display image G31) corresponding to the number of measurement objects (acquired number of game balls) is displayed on the display unit. A function of executing the calculation processing of the display CPU 72, a function of executing the calculation processing for increasing display in the display CPU 72), and
With
The display control unit changes the change value of the value displayed in the measurement result information when updating the measurement result information (step S2003, step S2007, step S2010, and step S2012 in the display CPU 72). ), And a function of executing the processing of steps S2102 to S2104 in the display CPU 72).

  According to the feature H1, the measurement result information corresponding to the number of measurement targets is displayed on the display unit, so that the player can recognize the number of measurement targets. In this case, when the measurement result information is updated, the change value of the value currently displayed in the measurement result information is changed. This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which the measurement result information changes.

Feature H2. The display control means starts the display of the measurement result information when a measurement start trigger occurs, and ends the display of the measurement result information in the measurement cycle when a measurement end trigger occurs.
The gaming machine according to Feature H1, wherein the change value changing means can change the change value within a range of one measurement.

  According to the feature H2, the change value of the measurement result information can be changed within the range of one measurement cycle, so that the manner in which the measurement result information changes even within the range of one measurement cycle is diversified. It becomes possible.

Feature H3. The display control means starts the display of the measurement result information when a measurement start trigger occurs, and ends the display of the measurement result information in the measurement cycle when a measurement end trigger occurs.
The gaming machine according to the feature H1 or H2, wherein the change value changing means can change the change value between one measurement time and another measurement time.

  According to the feature H3, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the measurement result information changes in each measurement.

  Feature H4. The gaming machine according to Feature H3, wherein the change value changing unit sets a value corresponding to a result of dividing a value finally displayed as the measurement result information by a predetermined value as the change value.

  According to the feature H4, it is possible to make the change value of the value corresponding to the measurement result information irregular according to the value finally displayed as the measurement result information.

  Feature H5. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4, wherein the change value changing unit changes the change value according to a value to be reflected on a value displayed in the measurement result information.

  According to the feature H5, the change value is changed according to the value to be reflected on the value displayed in the measurement result information, so that the change value of the value of the measurement result information is related to the value to be reflected. It can be changed.

  Feature H6. The change value changing means may set the change value to a larger value as the value to be reflected on the value displayed in the measurement result information is larger, wherein The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature H6, the larger the value to be reflected on the value displayed in the measurement result information is, the larger the value of the change value is, so that the reflection of the value to be reflected on the measurement result information is completed. It is possible to diversify the manner in which the measurement result information changes, while shortening the time required for the measurement.

Feature H7. The display control means,
When the value to be reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information is a value corresponding to an increase in the value of the measurement target, the value to be reflected is displayed in the measurement result information in a plurality of update timings. A first reflection unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S2005 to S2013 in the display CPU 72) for reflecting the value to the set value;
When the value to be reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information is a value corresponding to the decrease in the value to be measured, the value to be reflected is displayed in the measurement result information at one update timing. A second reflection unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S2003 and S2004 in the display CPU 72) for reflecting the value to
With
The change value changing unit, when the value to be reflected by the first reflection unit is reflected on a value displayed in the measurement result information in a plurality of update timings, the change at each of the update timings. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H6, wherein the change value can be changed.

  According to the feature H7, when the value of the measurement target increases, it is possible to emphasize that the value of the measurement target is increasing by reflecting the value to be reflected in a plurality of update timings separately. When the value of the measurement target decreases, the value to be reflected is reflected at one update timing, so that the decrease of the value of the measurement target can be made inconspicuous. In this case, if the value of the measurement target increases, the change value at each update timing may be changed, so that the measurement result information changes in a situation where the value of the measurement target is emphasized to increase. Various aspects can be diversified.

  Feature H8. The measurement target is a difference between an increase in the number of game media that can be used by the player and a decrease in the number of game media that can be used by the player, any of the features H1 to H7. 2. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature H8, when the difference between the increase and decrease in the number of game media usable by the player is displayed as the measurement result information, the mode in which the measurement result information changes is diversified. It becomes possible.

  Note that, for any one of the features H1 to H8, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. One or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  Each invention of the feature H group can solve the following problem.

  As one type of gaming machines, pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine has a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. Becomes

  Here, in the gaming machines as exemplified above, a configuration capable of suitably performing display control is required, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic I group>
Feature I1. Effect executing means (symbol display device 41) for executing an effect,
Effect control means (sound light side MPU 62, display CPU 201, VDP 205) for controlling the effect execution means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The effect control means includes a time-correspondence control means (sound-light side) for starting a special effect (effect in a special period) by the effect executing means when a predetermined start corresponding time is reached, and when a start condition is satisfied. A gaming machine having a function of executing the processes of steps S3010 and S3011 in the MPU 62).

  According to the feature I1, the special effect is started when the predetermined start corresponding time comes, so that it is possible to perform the effect triggered by the predetermined time. Further, for example, the same effect can be simultaneously started in a plurality of gaming machines installed in a game hall. In addition, since the special effect is started when the start corresponding time is reached and the start condition is satisfied, it is not preferable to start the special effect from the viewpoint of facilitating understanding of the processing load and the game content. It is possible to prevent a special effect from being started in a situation.

  Feature I2. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the time corresponding control means starts the special effect after a preparation period has elapsed when the start corresponding time has come.

  According to the feature I2, when the start corresponding time comes, the special effect is started after the preparation period elapses, so that the start time of the special effect can be set to a predetermined time. In addition, it is possible to distribute and execute the processing required to execute the special effect during the preparation period, and it is possible to distribute the processing load.

Feature I3. The effect control means is an optional control means (step S3208 in the sound-light-side MPU 62) for causing the effect executing means to execute an optional response effect (effect for game play) when an arbitrary opportunity occurs at an arbitrary timing. To execute the process of step S3213).
The gaming machine according to Feature I2, wherein the preparation period is set as a period that is equal to or longer than a longest execution period of the execution period of the optional response effect.

  According to the feature I3, since the preparation period is set to be equal to or longer than the longest execution period of the optional effect, the special effect starts even if the start corresponding time is reached in the situation where the optional effect is being executed. Before the timing to make it occur, the arbitrary corresponding effect in the middle of the execution ends. As a result, it is possible to restrict the execution state of the optional effect in the case where the special effect is started to a predetermined condition, and to prevent the occurrence of an event that the processing load at the timing when the special effect is started becomes extremely high. It is possible to prevent it.

Feature I4. The effect control means is an optional control means (step S3208 in the sound-light-side MPU 62) for causing the effect executing means to execute an optional response effect (effect for game play) when an arbitrary opportunity occurs at an arbitrary timing. To execute the process of step S3213).
The optional correspondence control means restricts the effect content of the optional response effect to a predetermined effect content when the optional response effect is started after the start corresponding time and before the start condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to feature I3, wherein:

  According to the feature I4, it is possible to limit the effect contents of the optional corresponding effect when the special effect is started to predetermined effect contents. As a result, the processing load at the timing when the special effect is started becomes extremely high while the optional effect can be started after the start corresponding time and before the special effect is started. Can be prevented from occurring.

  Feature I5. The effect control means causes the effect execution means to execute a preparatory effect (effect in a preparatory period) until the start condition is satisfied and the start condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4, further comprising: a function of executing the processing of steps S2806, S2807, S3006, and S3007 in the side MPU 62.

  According to the feature I5, by executing the preparation corresponding effect, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the special effect is to be executed.

  Feature I6. If the restriction condition is satisfied when the start correspondence time has come, the preparation correspondence control means does not start the preparation correspondence effect until the restriction condition is released. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature I6, when the restriction condition is satisfied, even if the start corresponding time is reached, the preparation corresponding effect is not started, so that the preparation corresponding effect is started in an unfavorable situation from the viewpoint of a processing load or the like. It is possible to prevent it from happening.

  Feature I7. The gaming machine according to Feature I6, wherein, when the restriction condition is satisfied, the preparation correspondence control means executes a notification corresponding to the restriction condition (display of the remaining time notification image G63).

  According to the feature I7, it is possible for the player to recognize that the preparation corresponding effect and the special effect are to be executed even in a situation where the restriction condition is satisfied.

Feature I8. The effect control means is an optional control means (step S3208 in the sound-light-side MPU 62) for causing the effect executing means to execute an optional response effect (effect for game play) when an arbitrary opportunity occurs at an arbitrary timing. To execute the process of step S3213).
When the start corresponding time is reached in a situation where the optional response effect is being executed, the preparation response control means determines that the restriction condition is satisfied, and executes the preparation response effect until the optional response effect ends. The gaming machine according to feature I6 or I7, wherein the gaming machine is not started.

  According to the feature I8, it is possible to prevent the preparation corresponding effect from being started during the execution of the optional corresponding effect. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the processing load at the timing when the preparation corresponding effect is started becomes extremely high.

Feature I9. The effect executing means is a display means having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 41a),
When the preparation-response effect and another effect (game effect) are simultaneously executed, the preparation-response effect is executed in a partial area of the display unit, and another area (section display) of the display unit is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features I5 to I8, wherein the other effect is executed in an area G66).

  According to the feature I9, it is possible for the player to clearly recognize each of the preparation-response production and the other productions.

  Feature I10. The preparation corresponding control means causes the effect execution means to notify the remaining time information (remaining time notification image G63) corresponding to the remaining time until the special effect is started, as the preparation corresponding effect. The gaming machine according to any one of features I5 to I9.

  According to the feature I10, the player can recognize that the start of the special effect is approaching by checking the remaining time information.

Feature I11. The preparation correspondence control means,
Regardless of the timing at which the preparation corresponding effect is started, the display is started from the information of the predetermined initial value as the remaining time information and the remaining time information is updated until the information of the predetermined end value is obtained. (The function of executing the process of step S3404 in the display CPU 201);
Means for changing one update value of the remaining time information according to the timing at which the preparation corresponding effect is started (a function of executing the processing of steps S3402 and S3403 in the display CPU 201);
The gaming machine according to feature I10, comprising:

  According to the feature I11, it is possible to diversify the manner of updating the remaining time information in relation to the timing at which the preparation corresponding effect is started.

  Feature I12. At a predetermined time before or at the start corresponding time and before the start condition is satisfied, a predetermined execution means (display light emitting unit 44, speaker unit 45) different from the effect execution means is used. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I11, further comprising means for starting an effect (a function of executing the process of step S2801 in the sound-light-side MPU 62).

  According to the feature I12, it is possible to reliably start a predetermined effect triggered by the start corresponding time. Thus, for example, it is possible to simultaneously start a predetermined effect on the plurality of gaming machines irrespective of the effect execution state of the effect executing means in the plurality of gaming machines installed in the game hall.

  For any one of the features I1 to I12, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. One or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  Each invention of the feature I group can solve the following problems.

  Pachinko machines, slot machines and the like are known as a kind of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on a predetermined lottery condition being satisfied, and a bonus is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, a configuration is generally used in which an effect for causing the player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

  For pachinko machines, a lottery is performed based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry area provided in the game area, and a variation display of the pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device. There is known a configuration in which, when a winning result is obtained, a combination of specific patterns and the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and the game machine shifts to a special game state advantageous to the player. Then, in the case of transition to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entry device provided in a game area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device.

  Here, it is necessary to provide novel game contents in the gaming machines as exemplified above, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. A display unit (symbol display device 41) having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 41a);
Display storage means (memory module 74) for storing image data in advance;
Drawing data is created based on the setting of the image data in the setting storage means (the first frame area 82a and the second frame area 82b), and an image signal corresponding to the drawing data is output to the display means. Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display unit based on the
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means,
Utilizing the first still image data (first character image data 171) stored in advance in the display storage means, specific individual images (first pseudo moving image character G42, second pseudo moving image character G43, pseudo First frame control means (display CPU 72 for executing processing of steps S2204 to S2207 in display CPU 72) for displaying first frame images (first character image G41, first pseudo moving image G52) including moving image character G51). )When,
A second frame image (the second character image G48, the second pseudo image) including the specific individual image using the second still image data (the second character image data 173) stored in the display storage unit in advance. Second frame control means for displaying the moving image G53 (a function of executing the processing of steps S2217 to S2220 in the display CPU 72);
At an image update timing after the first frame image is displayed and before the second frame image is displayed, the intermediate image data (effects) stored in advance in the display storage means. Using the image data 172), the middle control means (steps S2211 to S2214 in the display CPU 72) for displaying the middle image (effect image G45, pseudo moving image effect image G54) not including the specific individual image. Function), and
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature J1, the specific individual image is displayed between the update timing at which the first frame image including the specific individual image is displayed and the update timing at which the second frame image including the specific individual image is displayed. An intermediate image not included is displayed. With this, even in a situation where there is not enough image data for causing the player to recognize that a moving image is being displayed for a specific individual image, the specific individual image It is possible to make the player recognize that the moving image display is being performed.

  Feature J2. The first frame control unit displays the first frame image in a different display mode at a plurality of update timings by changing a setting mode of the first still image data in the setting storage unit. The gaming machine according to Feature J1, wherein

  According to the feature J2, by using the first still image data, it is possible to generate a situation in which the display mode is changed at a plurality of update timings while displaying a specific individual image.

  Feature J3. The second frame control unit displays the second frame image in a different display mode at a plurality of update timings by changing a setting mode of the second still image data in the setting storage unit. A gaming machine according to feature J1 or J2.

  According to the feature J3, by using the second still image data, it is possible to generate a situation in which the display mode is changed at a plurality of update timings while displaying a specific individual image.

Feature J4. In the specific effect period, the intermediate image is displayed next to the first frame image, and the second frame image is displayed next to the intermediate image,
The first still image data is used in a first period different from the specific effect period,
The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3, wherein the second still image data is used in a second period different from the specific effect period and the first period.

  According to the feature J4, an effect of displaying a specific individual image in a specific effect period using the first still image data used in the first period and the second still image data used in the second period is executed. You. As a result, the still image data can be shared in a plurality of situations, and the storage capacity required for the display storage means can be reduced. In this case, by providing the configuration of the feature J1, even in the configuration using the first still image data and the second still image data, the moving image of the specific individual image in the specific effect period It is possible for the player to recognize that the display is being performed.

Feature J5. For a predetermined portion (predetermined portion G51a) of the specific individual image displayed in the first frame image, the predetermined portion of the specific individual image displayed in the second frame image has a predetermined motion path. The first still image data and the second still image data are set so as to be displayed at a position on the front side of
The method according to any one of features J1 to J4, wherein the intermediate image data is set such that the intermediate individual image (individual image G54a) displayed in the intermediate image is displaced according to the predetermined motion path. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature J5, the first still image is displayed by displacing the halfway individual image in accordance with the motion path of the predetermined part in the specific individual image based on the first still image data and the second still image data. Even when the display position of the predetermined part in the specific individual image based on the image data is far from the display position of the predetermined part in the specific individual image based on the second still image data, the predetermined part is displaced according to the predetermined operation path. It is possible to give the player the impression that he / she is playing.

  Feature J6. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J5, wherein the first frame image and the second frame image are real shot images, and the intermediate image is a non-real shot image.

  According to the feature J6, it is possible to give a player an impression that a moving image is displayed for a specific individual image by using a non-real image even in a situation where the types of real images are small. Become.

  Note that, for any one of the features J1 to J6, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. , H1 to H8, I1 to I12, J1 to J6, and K1 to K10. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. A display unit (symbol display device 41) having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 41a);
Display storage means (memory module 203) for storing image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 201, VDP 205) for displaying an image on the display unit using the image data stored in the display storage means;
With
The display storage means,
First moving image data (first moving image data group 261 of A angle) that enables a series of specific moving images to be displayed by using image data created by executing the decoding process;
The second moving image data (A-angle) that enables the display of a specific moving image that starts from a timing in the middle of the specific moving image by using image data created by performing the decoding process. Second video data group 262), and
A gaming machine characterized by storing in advance.

  According to the feature K1, not only the first moving image data but also the second moving image data is provided, so that the first moving image data and the second moving image can be used as objects to be used according to the timing when the display start trigger occurs. It becomes possible to select any of the data. Thus, the display of the specific moving image can be started from the beginning of the specific moving image only by switching the moving image data to be used, and the display of the specific moving image can be started in the middle of the specific moving image.

Feature K2. The first moving image data includes a plurality of first unit moving image data (moving image data 271a) with different display periods in the specific moving image, respectively.
The second moving image data includes a plurality of second unit moving image data (moving image data 271b) with different display periods corresponding to the specific moving image, and
Each of the second unit moving image data is a moving image that is started from the middle of the moving image displayed by using the corresponding first unit moving image data in the plurality of first unit moving image data. The gaming machine according to Feature K1, wherein the gaming machine is set as data to be displayed.

  According to the feature K2, it is possible to set many timings at which the specific moving image can be started from the middle, and it is easy to start the specific moving image from the display content corresponding to the display start timing.

  Feature K3. In the first unit moving image data and the second unit moving image data in the corresponding order, the start timing of the moving image displayed by using the first unit moving image data and the second unit moving image data The amount of shift in the update timing of the image between the start timing of the moving image displayed by use and the combination of the first unit moving image data and the second unit moving image data in the corresponding order is the same. Or the gaming machine according to feature K2, wherein the gaming machine is substantially the same.

  According to the feature K3, it is possible to easily design the timing at which the display of the moving image by the first unit moving image data can be started and the timing at which the display of the moving image by the second unit moving image data can be started. Can be

  Feature K4. The first unit moving image data and the second unit moving image data are data in which the number of image data created by performing the decoding process is the minimum number that can be set as moving image data. The gaming machine according to feature K2 or K3.

  According to the feature K4, it is possible to set many timings at which the display can be switched to the display of the moving image based on the first moving image data and a timing at which the display can be switched to the display of the moving image based on the second moving image data. Further, it is possible to reduce the amount of moving image data to be read at one time.

  Feature K5. The display control means, when a predetermined operation by the player is performed at a timing before the timing corresponding to the start of the specific moving image, starts displaying the specific moving image using the first moving image data, When the predetermined operation is performed at a timing later than the timing corresponding to the start of the specific moving image, a target switching unit (step in the display CPU 201) that starts displaying the specific intermediate moving image using the second moving image data. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K4, further comprising: a function of executing the process of S4105 to step S4117).

  According to the feature K5, even when the predetermined operation by the player occurs at an arbitrary timing, it is possible to start the display of the specific moving image from a situation corresponding to the generation timing of the predetermined operation.

  Feature K6. The target switching unit may be configured to perform the predetermined operation at a timing after the timing corresponding to the start of the specific moving image and before the timing corresponding to the start of the specific moving image. Also, when the predetermined operation is performed after a timing earlier than a period required to start using the second moving image data with respect to the timing corresponding to the start, the second moving image data The gaming machine according to Feature K5, wherein the display of the specific halfway moving image using is not started.

  According to the feature K6, the display of the specific moving image can be started from the situation corresponding to the timing of the occurrence of the predetermined operation within a range in which the use of the second moving image data can be smoothly started.

Feature K7. The display control unit is a target switching unit (in the display CPU 201) that switches to a state in which another moving image is displayed when a predetermined operation is performed by a player in a state in which one of a plurality of types of moving images is displayed. (The function of executing the processing of steps S4105 to S4117)
A combination of the first moving image data and the second moving image data is provided as moving image data for displaying a first moving image of the plurality of types of moving images,
The display storage means,
Third moving image data (first moving image data group 264 of B angle) that enables a series of predetermined moving images to be displayed by using the image data created by executing the decoding process;
The fourth moving image data (B-angle) that enables the display of a predetermined moving image that starts from the middle of the predetermined moving image by using image data created by performing the decoding process. Second video data group 265),
Is stored in advance,
The combination of the third moving image data and the fourth moving image data is provided as moving image data for displaying a second moving image of the plurality of moving images. A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims.

  According to the feature K7, it is possible to set many timings at which the moving image to be displayed can be switched between the first moving image and the second moving image.

Feature K8. The first moving image data and the third moving image data coincide in timing at which a start image can be displayed in a predetermined effect period,
The gaming machine according to Feature K7, wherein the second moving image data and the fourth moving image data have the same timing at which a start image can be displayed in the predetermined effect period.

  According to the feature K8, when one of the first moving image and the second moving image is switched to the other, the display of the switching destination moving image can be started from the display content corresponding to the switching source display content.

  Feature K9. The gaming machine according to Feature K7 or K8, wherein the first moving image and the second moving image are moving images having different angles at which a special individual image is displayed.

  According to the feature K9, it is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effect in the configuration in which the display target is switched between a plurality of moving images at different angles at which the special individual image is displayed.

Feature K10. A display unit (symbol display device 41) having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 41a);
Display storage means (memory module 203) for storing image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 201, VDP 205) for displaying an image on the display unit using the image data stored in the display storage means;
With
The display storage means stores predetermined moving image data (various moving image data groups 261 to 269) capable of displaying a series of special moving images by using image data created by executing a decoding process. ) Is stored in advance,
The predetermined moving image data includes a plurality of special unit moving image data (moving image data 271a to 273c) with different display periods in the special moving image.
A gaming machine, wherein the special unit moving image data is data in which the number of image data created by executing the decoding process is the minimum number that can be set as moving image data.

  According to the feature K10, it is possible to set many timings at which the display can be switched to the display of the moving image based on the predetermined moving image data. Further, it is possible to reduce the amount of moving image data to be read at one time.

  For any one of the features K1 to K10, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. One or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  The inventions of the feature J group and the feature K group can solve the following problems.

  Pachinko game machines, slot machines and the like are known as a kind of game machines. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine has a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. Becomes

  Here, in the gaming machines as exemplified above, a configuration capable of suitably performing display control is required, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

  Hereinafter, a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each of the features will be described.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operating means operated by a player, gaming ball firing means for firing game balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball path for guiding the fired game balls to a predetermined game area, A gaming machine comprising: a plurality of game components arranged in a region; and a bonus is provided to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of the game components.

  Spinning-type gaming machines such as slot machines: provided with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably displaying the plurality of pictures is started by the operation of the start operation means, and caused by the operation of the stop operation means A gaming machine in which the variable display of the plurality of pictures is stopped after a predetermined time or a predetermined time has elapsed, and a privilege is given to the player according to the pictures after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 41 ... Symbol display device, 41a ... Liquid crystal display part, 44 ... Display light emission part, 45 ... Speaker part, 52 ... Main side MPU, 62 ... Sound light side MPU, 72 ... Display CPU, 74 ... Memory module 76, VDP, 82a, first frame area, 82b, second frame area, 122, character stationary table, 123, character moving table, 124, background table, 125, interlocking flag, 132, decoded image data , 142... Band display image data, 143... Lighting image data, 144... Light-off image data, 145... Band display table, 146 .. blinking display table, 171. Data, 173: image data for the second character, 201: display CPU, 202: work RAM, 203 Memory module, 204 VRAM, 205 VDP, 211 VRAM, 211 a texture area, 211 b moving image data area, 241 back image data, 242 image data for first background individual image, 243. Image data for a second background individual image, 244... Image data for effect characters, 245... First separate saved image data, 246... Image data for additional individual images, 247. Image data, 261 to 269 moving image data group, 271a to 273c moving image data, 282 special moving image data, 284 still image data, G4 loop display character, G5 loop display background, G11 group display Characters, G22: validity period image, G24: band image, G25: blinking image, G31: number Display image, G41: image for first character, G42: character for first pseudo moving image, G43: character for second pseudo moving image, G45: effect image, G48: image for second character, G51: character for pseudo moving image, G51a ... Predetermined part, G52... First pseudo moving image, G53... Second pseudo moving image, G54... Pseudo moving effect image, G54a. Execution target table for acceleration period, T11: Execution target table for first high speed period, T12: Execution target table for first low speed period.

Claims (1)

Display means for displaying an image;
Display control means capable of controlling the display means in a manner to allow a player to recognize that the individual image is variably displayed in front of the background image;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means includes a time-correspondence control means for starting a special effect on the display means when a predetermined start-response time is reached, and when a start condition is satisfied,
In the special effect, the processing load for displaying the background image is greater than when a predetermined effect different from the special effect is performed,
A configuration in which a first display effect can be executed in a situation where the predetermined effect is executed, and a second display effect in which a processing load for displaying an image is larger than that of the first display effect. And
The gaming machine, wherein the time-corresponding control means enables the first display effect to be executed in a situation where the special effect is executed, but does not execute the second display effect.

Images